COGO by Eagle Point

COGO by Eagle Point
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of the vendor. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may
be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Eagle Point has carefully prepared this program package, including research, development, and testing to
ascertain its effectiveness and accuracy. However, no warranty of any kind is made with respect to this
program package or its related material, except as may be expressly stated in the licensing agreement or
other contractual document. In no event is Eagle Point liable for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of this program package.
The installation program used to install Eagle Point software, InstallShield, is licensed software provided
by InstallShield Software Corporation.
ColorFast™, RoadCalc™, LANDCADD™, Virtual Simulator™, as well as the ColorFast™ and Eagle Point
logos, are unregistered trademarks of Eagle Point.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.
Windows® and DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other registered or
unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Copyright © Q3, 2005, by Eagle Point. All rights reserved.
COGO
TA B L E
OF
CONTENTS
1 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
COGO Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Complex Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COGO Place Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
COGO Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
COGO Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COGO Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
COGO Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Snap Nodes to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Snap Options and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Place Nodes Along Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Resection by 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Resection by 3 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table of Contents i
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Locate Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Zoom to Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Edit Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Match Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Leader Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Renumber/Rename Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Raise/Lower Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Resize Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Clean Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rotate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Scale Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copy Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Erase Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Modify Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3 Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Alignment Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
ii COGO
Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Resultant Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Resultant Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Field Data Traverse Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4 Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve Direction . . . . . 109
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Dc . . . . . . . 110
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Radius . . . . 111
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Tangent
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Construct Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Construct Polar Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Construct Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Construct Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Table of Contents iii

Construct Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Construct Curve Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Construct Inscribed Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Construct Spiral Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Construct Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . 136
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Intersect Distance-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Intersect Direction-Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Intersect 3-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Manage Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Convert to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Convert to Lot – Points Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Convert to Lot – Closed Objects Along Path Method . . . . . . . 165
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Convert to Lot – Objects Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Convert to Lot – Eagle Point Boundary Method . . . . . . . . . . . 168
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
iv COGO
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Modify Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Create Lot Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Create Lot Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Create Mapcheck Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Create Mapcheck Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Layout Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Layout Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Layout Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Layout Road Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Layout Linear Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Layout Curved Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Layout Area Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Layout Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Layout Offset Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Layout Hammer Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Report Unused Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Single Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Report Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Report Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Report Area By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Report Area By Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Table of Contents v
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Report Area By Eagle Point Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Report Area By Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Report Area Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Report Angle By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Report Angle By Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Inverse Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Stakeout Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Stakeout Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
QuickSteps (Eagle Point Boundary Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
QuickSteps (Closed Object Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
QuickSteps (Lots Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Stakeout Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Entry Options – Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Entry Options – Instrument Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Entry Options – Node Placement Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Entry Options – Audit Trail Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Command Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Select Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Launch COGO Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Manage Command Line Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Command Line COGO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Command Sequence Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Command History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Draw Lines Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Draw Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Draw Lines and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Start Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
vi COGO
End Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Place Node by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Place Node by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Place Polar Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Start Traverse/Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
End Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Place Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Place Traverse Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Place Traverse Point (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 267
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Inverse Curve (POC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Inverse Curve (RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Intersect Direction-Direction (Line-Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Inverse Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Inverse Station and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Inverse Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Zoom Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Command Line COGO Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
New Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Northing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Occupied Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Draw Sideshot Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Horizontal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Examples of Horizontal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Table of Contents vii

Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Examples of Distance Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Vertical Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Examples of Vertical Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Backsight Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Turned Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Radius Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Examples of Radius Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Curve Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Examples of Curve Parameter Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
First Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Second Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Node 1 – Node 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Node 1 – Node 2 – Node 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Distance Along . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
COGO Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
viii COGO
CONCEPTS
The Concepts chapter is provided to introduce and describe the theories
used in Coordinate Geometry (COGO).
CHAPTER
COGO runs on AutoCAD, BricsCad, and MicroStation.
In this chapter:
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
COGO Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COGO Place Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
COGO Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
COGO Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
COGO Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
COGO Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 1: Concepts 1
Introduction
COGO uses the combination of the mathematical concepts of trigonometry and some basic surveying
principles to allow you to input and query information in a CAD graphic in an intuitive and flexible
manner. COGO may be used to create, query and print out full reports on points, Nodes, lines, arcs,
spirals, alignments, cul-de-sacs, traverses and lots. COGO may also be used to input traverses from
field notes, lot design and layout, intersection and lot clean-up, as well as batch processing and an
audit trail on most all placement/modification to objects in the project.
COGO Objects
Different COGO commands create different types of objects in the CAD graphic. Depending on the
command, COGO may place Nodes, lines, curves, spirals, complex objects, alignments or lots.
Nodes
A Node is a specific point in the project that is placed using COGO or other modules such as Data
Collection or Data Transfer. A Node is comprised of a symbol and associated attributes. Each Node
possesses coordinates in 3-D space and an ID value. The Node ID, or point number, is a unique
identifier for the Node in the project (although duplicate IDs may occur, they can be resolved using the
Resolve Duplicate Nodes command found in COGO. The ID and coordinates may be represented in
the CAD graphic by attributes with user-definable properties. You may place the Node ID, elevation,
description, Northing and Easting coordinates, or station and offset information as attributes associated
with the Node. The attributes, properties, position about the symbol and Field Code are all controlled
through the Node (Field Code) Library command.
For more information, see Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
The Node ID may be alphanumeric, which means it may contain up to seven alpha characters as a
prefix to the Node ID. You may use the alpha prefix as a way to further group Nodes by giving all of the
Nodes for a particular utility one prefix or name. The alpha character may also be used as a value (zz9
is greater than aa9).
You may establish alphanumeric Nodes for your project by setting the ID Format for the Nodes category
on the Formats command to be alphanumeric.
For more information, refer to Nodes Format in the Eagle Point Menu.
Nodes may be contained within an individual drawing/design file, an external database or within both.
For more information about Nodes and the External Nodes Database refer to Nodes and External Node
Database in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Lines
Lines in CAD may be single line segments, 2-D or 3-D polyline segments in AutoCAD/BricsCad, or
smartlines in MicroStation. Lines may be selected to obtain distance and direction values when you are
entering information into the standard distance or direction fields in COGO.
! A line may not be selected if it is part of a block in AutoCAD/BricsCad or a cell in MicroStation.
2 COGO
Curves
Chapter 1: Concepts
Curves are arc segments that can be defined as having a constant radius and one or two other curve
parameters.
Figure 1-1 Circular Curve Parameters
A curve may be graphically selected to get a distance or length value. For example, if your cursor is
located in a distance or length edit field in COGO, you may select the PIC button to shift focus to the
CAD graphic and select a curve segment. The arc length of the curve will be placed in the edit field
where your cursor was located originally. If focus is in a Radius edit field, the PIC button will return the
radius of the arc you select in the CAD graphic.
Spirals
Spirals may be transition or combining in COGO. They can be defined by the curve parameters that
they are joined with, as well as the beginning, ending and PI location of the spiral.
Figure 1-2 Transition Spiral Parameters
Complex Objects
Complex objects are continuous leg lists that are entirely made up of line, arc and spiral segments.
These are most commonly represented as polylines in AutoCAD/BricsCad or complex chains in
MicroStation.
! If a complex object contains splines or curve segments that do not have a constant radius, they may be
used with several COGO commands, but not all.
Alignments
Alignments are lines, arcs, spirals or complex objects that have stationing information associated with
them. Existing road geometry made up of lines, arcs and spiral segments may be converted to an
alignment graphically using the Convert Objects to Alignment command. Once an alignment is created
within the project, it may be queried from any CAD graphic file defined within the project. This allows for
easier project sharing between different disciplines within a company. When you are prompted for an
alignment, you may select the alignment from the CAD graphic or through the Defined Alignments
dialog box which lists all the alignments defined within the project.
Lots
A lot may be created from existing objects in CAD by graphically selecting them. The converted lots
may be used to determine planimetric areas, perimeters, closures and to generate user-definable
Summary and Mapcheck reports. The lots can also be annotated, placed in tables, used to help create
legal descriptions or used for GIS purposes with other Eagle Point products.
Field Codes
A Field Code is the code or description given to a point or feature when it is surveyed in the field, hence
the name Field Code. A Field Code may be named with up to 10 characters, either alpha, numeric or a
combination thereof. Eagle Point ships with its own default Field Code Library, however you are
encouraged to create your own Node (Field Code) Library with your own alphanumeric Field Codes.
You may use Field Codes to designate what symbol, attributes and corresponding attribute properties
you want to use for the Nodes you place. Each Field Code has a symbol and an attribute style
associated with it, allowing you to control what attributes get placed with each Node and how it is
annotated.
For more information on Field Codes, see Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Batch Processing
Several commands within COGO allow you to write all of the information entered to a batch file. The
batch file may be stored and manipulated through the Edit Batch File command found in the Survey
menu. The Edit Batch File command is where you also have the ability to “replay” your batch file after
modifications are made to replace objects into your project.
The commands that can be recorded to a batch file are Place Nodes, Place Nodes by Station/Offset,
Resection by 2 Points, Resection by 3 Points, Alignment Traverse, Boundary Traverse and Field Data
Traverse.
The batch file that is recorded will be in an SDMS format. For more information about SDMS, see EP
SDMS in the Data Collection documentation.
4 COGO
Some of the advantages of recording information to a batch file are as follows:
Chapter 1: Concepts
" Easy manipulation of the batch file data using the Select Objects command in the Edit Batch File
command.
" Your current CAD view can show only the data that is contained in the batch file using the Show
Only command in the Edit Batch File command.
" Edit the batch file using the SDMS Editor. For more information about the SDMS Editor, see SDMS
Editor in the Data Collection manual.
" Use the batch file with the Survey Adjustment module for running an angle balance, adjustment or
for generating closure reports.
" The Batch File Manager may serve to store files as a backup to data that exists in the project.
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box

The COGO Pick Point dialog box (such as the one shown below) is used in commands that require a
Node or point to be selected. If a Node is to be selected, you may type the Node ID directly into the
Node ID field. You may then press the Tab key to have the Northing, Easting, Elevation, Field Code and
Description edit fields update with the appropriate information found. The additional data fields may
also be updated by clicking on Next instead of selecting the Tab key. Note, however, that the command
wizard does not proceed to the next dialog. You must select Next a second time to advance through the
command.
You may also select a Node from your CAD graphic. When focus is placed into the Node ID edit field
you can select the PIC button and graphically pick the Node from the CAD graphic. After the Node is
found, the additional fields update with the appropriate information found.
If you don’t have a Node to select as the desired point you may also enter coordinates. Type the
Northing and Easting values into the corresponding edit fields or alternatively, place focus into the
Northing or Easting edit field and select the PIC button to graphically pick a point from the CAD graphic.
Note that when you are using the PIC button, the coordinates of your cursor track in the coordinate edit
fields for reference and are “locked in” once you actually select a point. Once the coordinate information
is input you may select Next to proceed to the next dialog in the command.
Figure 1-3 COGO Pick Point Dialog Box
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box Definitions

Option Icon Function
PIC Clicking on this icon allows you to graphically select a Node or Northing and Easting
coordinate pairs from the CAD graphic, depending on which edit control has focus.
Node ID Enter the Node ID of the desired point. Enter the Node ID directly into the edit field or use the
PIC button to graphically select a Node from the CAD graphic.
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box Definitions
Northing Enter the Northing coordinate (Y-coordinate) of the desired point. If a Node ID is entered
directly, make sure to press the Tab key or select Next to update the Northing edit field with
the appropriate coordinate. Place focus into the Northing or Easting edit field if you wish to
use the PIC button to graphically select a point from the CAD graphic.
Easting Enter the Easting coordinate (X-coordinate) of the desired point. If a Node ID is entered
directly, make sure to press the Tab key or select Next to update the Easting edit field with the
appropriate coordinate. Place focus into the Northing or Easting edit field if you wish to use
the PIC button to graphically select a point from the CAD graphic.
Elevation This statically reports the elevation (Z-coordinate) of the selected Node or point. In some
commands (Construct Feature Line, Construct Polar Line) you can enter the desired
elevation.
Field Code This statically reports the Field Code of the selected Node.
Description This statically reports the Description of the selected Node.
COGO Place Node Dialog Box

A COGO Place Node dialog box (below) displays within commands that place Nodes as a result of
some computation or process. This dialog box provides you the opportunity to set the Node ID,
elevation, Field Code and description of the Node that is going to be placed. The Northing and Easting
edit fields are disabled but show you where the Node is going to be placed. Occasionally, the Elevation
edit field will also be disabled when the result of a computation is not only the calculated Northing and
Easting but Elevation as well. The Field Code defaults to the code set on the Node Placement tab of the
Entry Options command found in the COGO Settings menu. What appears in the Description edit field
also depends on what is set in the Entry Options command. It will use the default description, the
description set within the Field Code or it will be a description in the context of the command depending
on your settings.
Some commands that end with a Place Node dialog box will have the Apply button turn into a Repeat
button after the Apply button has been selected. This allows you to repeat the command without having
to close the dialog box and re-issue the command. You could also use the Back button prior to selecting
the Apply button and change input on previous dialog boxes.
Figure 1-4 COGO Place Node Dialog Box
COGO Place Node Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available on this dialog box unless the Northing and Easing coordinates edit
fields are available. When these edit fields are disabled, the values displayed are calculated
coordinates and cannot be modified or selected from the CAD graphic.
Node ID This is the Node ID of the Node you are going to place. It automatically increments in value
after a Node is placed.
6 COGO
COGO Place Node Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 1: Concepts
Northing This is the calculated Northing coordinate (Y-coordinate) at which the Node will be placed.
The edit field is disabled because this value is the result of some computation or process.
Easting This is the calculated Easting coordinate (X-coordinate) at which the Node will be placed. The
edit field is disabled because this value is the result of some computation or process.
Elevation This is the elevation (Z-coordinate) at which the Node will be placed. In some cases the
elevation is the result of a computation while at other times it is the default elevation. In either
case, it can be modified so that the Node you are placing is located at the specified elevation.
Field Code This controls what symbol and annotation will appear on the Node when it is placed. The
available Field Codes are read from the current Node (Field Code) Library.
For more information on the Node (Field Code) Library, see Node (Field Code) Library in the
Eagle Point Menu manual.
Description The text entered in this edit field will be annotated as the description on the Node when it is
placed.
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box

Several commands within COGO will prompt you to select one or more Nodes. A Select Node dialog
box (such as the Move Nodes dialog box (below) provides several methods to select the Nodes. The
available methods are Single, Coordinate, Range, All, Name, AutoCAD (BricsCad)/Fence, Proximity,
Description, Block/Cell, Field Code and Elevation Range.
For any of the above selection methods that are prompting you for a Node ID, you can either type the
Node ID into the edit field or place focus into the edit field, use the PIC button and graphically select a
Node from the CAD graphic. When typing a Node ID, be sure to press the Tab key so COGO can find
the Node and then select Apply to accept the selection. If you don’t press the Tab key, selecting Apply
the first time will find the Node while selecting it a second time will actually apply the selection. You may
also use the PIC button to select a Node from your CAD graphic.
Most of the commands in COGO use the Select Nodes dialog box that has a Back and Next button
because more dialog boxes will follow to complete the command. In these instances, the Apply button
should be used to build the selection set and when that is complete, the Next button should be selected
to proceed to the next dialog box.
A few commands in COGO will use this dialog box without a Back and Next button combination
because while the selection set is being built the command is using the Nodes (i.e. Report Nodes).
Figure 1-5 COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Clicking on the PIC icon allows you to graphically select a Node or multiple Nodes from the CAD
graphic, depending on the selection method. If the selection method is set to Coordinate, then you
select a Northing and Easting coordinate pair from the CAD graphics.
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box Definitions
Selection This allows you to choose whether you are adding Nodes to the selection set or if you are removing
Mode them from the selection set. If the selection mode is set to select when the Apply button is pressed, the
Nodes will be added to the selection set. If the selection mode is set to unselect, the Nodes will be
removed from the selection set when the Apply button is clicked on.
Selection This allows you to choose the method that will be used to select or unselect Nodes. Each available
Method method is described in detail below.
" Single: You may select a single Node from the CAD graphic by pressing the PIC button and
selecting a Node or by entering the Node ID in the edit field. When a Node is selected, the
coordinates for the Node will update in the static text fields next to the coordinate labels. You
may continue to select Nodes and the fields will update, but only one Node will be selected
when the Apply button is pressed.
" Coordinate: You may select a single point from the CAD graphic by pressing the PIC button
and selecting a point or by entering the coordinate values.
" Range: You may enter an interval for a range of Nodes or select two Nodes from the CAD
graphic by pressing the PIC button and selecting the Nodes. The range may be entered with
either the larger or smaller Node ID first. The Prefix option will be available only if the Node
Type option is set to Alphanumeric as the Format. You may enter an alpha prefix for the
Nodes to be selected. All Nodes within the range and with the portion of the alpha prefix
entered will be selected.
For more information, see Nodes Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
" All: This will select all of the Nodes for the project.
" Name: You may enter in an alpha prefix for the Nodes to be selected. All Nodes with the
portion of the alpha prefix entered will be selected.
" AutoCAD/BricsCad: Within AutoCAD/BricsCad, you have several methods to select Nodes
(window, crossing, fence, etc.). Select the desired Nodes and click on Apply. If you want to
select additional Nodes, click on the PIC button.
" Fence: Within MicroStation, you may use a fence to select the Nodes. When the Apply
button is pressed, the fence will be used to select the Nodes. If you want to select additional
Nodes, redraw your fence and click on Apply. Proximity: You may select all of the Nodes
within a proximity of a Node or point in the CAD graphic. To select a Node or point, click on
the PIC button and select a Node, enter a Node ID that exists in the project or place focus in
a coordinate edit field, click on the PIC button and select a location in CAD. You may enter a
horizontal distance to represent the proximity around the Node selected. All Nodes within
this horizontal radius will be selected.
" Description: Enter a description of the Nodes you would like to select. Any Nodes that have
a description that matches the description entered will be selected. You may use an * as a
wildcard when entering your description. For example, entering TREE* would select any
Node that starts with the description of TREE. Entering just TREE would only select Nodes
that had an exact description of TREE. The description option is NOT case sensitive.
" Block: Select Nodes in AutoCAD/BricsCad by the block name of the symbol placed. If your
ground shots all use a plus block name but vary in description or Field Code, use the Block
method and enter a block name of PLUS.
Selection " Cell: Select Nodes in MicroStation by the cell name of the symbol placed. If your ground
Method shots all use a plus cell name but vary in description or Field Code, use the Cell method and
enter a cell name of PLUS.
" Field Code: Select Nodes based on the Field Code used when the Node was placed. For
example, if you want to select all of your ground shots and they use the Field Code of GS,
set your selection method to Field Code and select the GS Field Code from the drop list.
" Elevation Range: Use this method to select any Nodes that are within a specified elevation
range. If you would like to select all Nodes between the elevation of 100 and 125, use the
Elevation Range method and enter 100 in the From edit field and 125 in the To edit field.
8 COGO
Chapter 1: Concepts
COGO Direction Dialog Box
The COGO Direction dialog box (similar to the one shown in Figure 1-12 on page 11) is used in
commands that request horizontal direction information. The available options for entering a direction
are; Absolute, Geometric, Direction Point, Two Points, Backsight by Absolute, Backsight by Geometric,
Backsight by Direction Point and Backsight by Two Points.
When you set your option to Absolute or Backsight by Absolute you also are able to set the Direction
type to bearings or azimuths and enter the value in the Direction edit field. When focus is in the
Direction edit field, you may also use the PIC button to set your direction by graphically selecting an
object from the CAD graphic. When a single line is selected the PIC command will return the direction
of that line. When a polyline/complex chain is selected, the PIC button returns the direction of the
segment of the polyline/complex chain you selected. Using the PIC button on an arc will return the
chord direction. In any case, the direction is defined from the nearest end point of the object you
selected. The following figures show examples of using the PIC button to retrieve the direction from a
line or complex object.
Figure 1-6 Retrieval of a Direction From a Line
Figure 1-7 Retrieval of a Direction From a Complex Object
When your option is set to Geometric or Backsight by Geometric, you are again able to enter the
Geometric direction by typing the value in the Geometric edit field or by using the PIC button.
Geometric directions assume 0 degrees is due east and measure counterclockwise from there.
For more information on Direction types, see Horizontal Direction Formats in the Eagle Point Menu
manual.
The units that you enter in the directions edit field (Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, Decimal Degrees,
Gradian, Mils or Radians) are set using the Units command found in the System menu on the Eagle
Point menu.
For more information, see Angular Units in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
When any of the Point options are chosen (Direction Point, Two Points, Backsight by Direction Point or
Backsight by Two Points) you may enter the point information by typing the Node ID or Coordinates or
by using the PIC button to graphically select them.
Refer to COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5 for more information.
The Backsight options allow you to calculate a resulting forward direction by knowing a backsight
direction and an angle turned from that backsight. The backsight direction is established using the
same forward direction options outlined earlier in this section. The difference being that the backsight
direction is then used as a reference direction to turn an angle away from. The angle turned from that
backsight can either be turned left or right or deflected left or right. The four angle types are shown in
the following four figures.
Figure 1-8 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Right
Figure 1-9 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Left
Figure 1-10 Backsight With an Angle Deflected to the Right
Figure 1-11 Backsight With an Angle Deflected to the Left
10 COGO
Chapter 1: Concepts
Figure 1-12 COGO Direction Dialog Box
COGO Direction Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Clicking on the PIC icon allows you to select an object in the CAD graphic to us its direction. It is
also used to select a Node or Northing and Easting values when defining a direction between
points.
Options This allows you to set the type of direction that will be used. The available options are Absolute,
Geometric, Direction Point, Two Points, Backsight by Absolute, Backsight by Geometric, Backsight
by Direction Point and Backsight by Two Points.
" Absolute: Enter the absolute direction in bearings or azimuths by setting the Direction
Type and typing a value in the Direction edit field or by setting focus to the Direction edit
field and using the PIC button to select an object from the CAD graphic.
" Geometric: Enter the Geometric direction by typing a value in the Geometric edit field or
by setting focus to the Geometric edit field and using the PIC button to select an object
from the CAD graphic.
" Direction Point: Use this option to return a horizontal direction based on your current
occupied point and the direction to another point. Enter the Node ID or coordinates
directly into the edit fields or use the PIC button to graphically select the direction point in
the CAD graphic.
" Two Points: Use this option to calculate a direction from your current occupied point by
using the direction between two other points. Enter the Node ID or coordinates directly
into the First Point and Second Point edit fields or use the PIC button to graphically select
the first and second points in the CAD graphic.
" Backsight by Absolute: Use this option to set a backsight direction by knowing an
absolute direction. Then enter an angle from the backsight to calculate the resulting
direction.
" Backsight by Geometric: Use this option to set a backsight direction by knowing a
geometric direction. Then enter an angle from the backsight to calculate the resulting
direction.
" Backsight by Direction Point: Use this option to set a backsight direction by knowing a
direction to the backsight point. Then enter an angle from the backsight to calculate the
resulting direction.
" Backsight by Two Points: Use this option to set a backsight direction by knowing a
direction between two points. Then enter an angle from the backsight to calculate the
resulting direction.
Direction Type When entering absolute directions, you may set this option to the four bearing settings (North East,
North West, South East, South West) or two azimuth settings (North Azimuth or South Azimuth).
COGO Distance Dialog Box

The COGO Distance dialog box (such as the one in Figure 1-15 on page 13) is used in various
commands that request a distance to be entered. The distance options available include Horizontal
Distance, Distance to Node/Point, Two Points and Slope Distance.
The Slope distance option offers additional Slope Method Options including Elevation, Height Distance,
Grade, Slope (H/V), Slope (V/H), Ratio (Rise/Run), Zenith, Horizon and Nadir.
Using the Horizontal Distance option allows you to type the actual horizontal distance or to use the PIC
button to select an object in the CAD graphic to use it’s horizontal length as the distance. When a line is
selected, the “plan” length of the line fills in the Horizontal edit field. The same is true of the line
segment that is selected from a polyline/complex chain using the PIC button. When an arc is selected,
the arc length is returned to the Horizontal edit field. The following figure illustrates the values that are
returned when a line, complex object or arc is selected.
Figure 1-13 Retrieval of a Distance When Selecting a Line, Complex Object or Arc
The Distance to Node/Point option allows you to enter a Node ID or coordinates to a point to which you
want the horizontal distance to be calculated. The Two Points option lets you select two Nodes or points
between which the horizontal distance is calculated. In either option, you can enter the Node ID or
coordinates directly into the edit fields or use the PIC button to locate points in the CAD graphic.
Refer to COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5 for more information.
When Slope Distance is chosen, you must provide a slope distance value as well as additional
information to calculate elevation change. The Elevation option requires the ending elevation as
additional input. The Height Distance option requires an additional input of vertical offset using an
instrument height and target height. The Grade, Slope (H/V), Slope (V/H) and Ratio (Rise/Run) options
allow you to enter the slope corresponding to the slope distance in various formats.
The Zenith, Horizon and Nadir options allow you to enter a vertical angle along with the slope distance
to calculate a horizontal distance. The following figure shows examples of the three vertical angle
measurements.
Figure 1-14 Three Vertical Angle Measurements
12 COGO
Chapter 1: Concepts
Figure 1-15 COGO Distance Dialog Box
COGO Distance Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Clicking on the PIC icon allows you to select an object in the CAD graphic to use its horizontal
length as the distance.
Distance This allows you to set how the distance will be entered. The available options are Horizontal
Options Distance, Distance to Node/Point, Two Points and Slope Distance.
" Horizontal Distance: Enter a Horizontal distance by typing a value in the Horizontal
Distance edit field or use the PIC button to graphically select an object in the CAD
graphic. The “plan” length of the selected object will be used as the horizontal
distance.
" Distance to Node/Point: Select a Node or point which you want to use to define the
horizontal distance to be between that point and your currently occupied point.
" Two Points: Select two Nodes or points which you want to use to define the horizontal
distance to be between the two points.
" Slope Distance: Enter a slope distance and choose a Slope Method Option in which
to provide information to calculate a resulting horizontal distance.
Slope Method This allows you to specify how you want the elevation to be calculated. The available options are
Options Elevation, Height Distance, Grade, Slope (H/V), Slope (V/H), Ratio (Rise/Run), Zenith, Horizon
and Nadir.
" Elevation: Use this option to enter the elevation of the target if it is known, such as a
benchmark or a check elevation shot.
" Height Distance: Enter a vertical offset, or “boot” of the shot taken. This value may be
positive or negative.
" Grade: Enter the percent grade of the slope to the target.
" Slope (H/V): Enter the slope as a calculated ratio of horizontal distance over 1.
" Slope (V/H): Enter the slope as a calculated ratio of vertical distance over 1.
" Ratio (Rise/Run): Enter the slope as a calculated foot per foot or meter per meter ratio
(i.e. 2% grade = 0.02 feet per feet).
" Zenith: Enter the vertical angle measured from the Zenith direction, where 0 degrees
is straight up.
" Horizon: Enter the vertical angle measured from the Horizon, where 0 degrees is
horizontal.
" Nadir: Enter the vertical angle measured from the Nadir direction, where 0 degrees is
straight down.
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box
The COGO Place Curve Nodes dialog box (such as the one below) is used in commands that result in
constructing curves. After inputting the necessary information on the previous dialog boxes of the
command, the Place Curve Nodes dialog box displays allowing you to control what “key” Nodes are
going to be placed. By toggling the checkbox that labels the various “key points,” you can control what
Nodes get placed and what the Node IDs are. You may also edit the Field Code and Description of the
Nodes that will get placed by using the Curve Node Options button.
For more information on Curve Node Options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box below.
Another version of this dialog box is used when placing spiral Nodes as the result of commands that
place spirals.
The toggles change from PC, PT, RP, PI to things such as Tangent to Spiral (TS), Spiral to Curve (SC),
Curve to Spiral (CS) and Spiral to Tangent (ST).
Figure 1-16 COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Point of By toggling on this option, COGO will place a Node at the beginning of the curve with the corresponding
Curvature (PC) Node ID and Curve Node Options. If the toggle is off, no Node is placed.
Point of By toggling on this option, COGO will place a Node at the end of the curve with the corresponding Node ID
Tangency (PT) and Curve Node Options. If the toggle is off, no Node is placed.
Radius Point By toggling on this option, COGO will place a Node at the center point of the curve with the corresponding
(RP) Node ID and Curve Node Options. If the toggle is off, no Node is placed.
Point of By toggling on this option, COGO will place a Node at the intersection point of the back tangent and
Intersection (PI) forward tangent directions with the corresponding Node ID and Curve Node Options. If the toggle is off, no
Node is placed.
Curve Node This allows you to set Node placement options for the curve Nodes.
Options
For more information, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box, (Figure 1-17 on page 15).
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box

The COGO Curve Node Options dialog box (such as the one shown in Figure 1-17 on page 15) is
accessed from the COGO Place Curves dialog box and controls whether or not the specified Nodes are
placed as well as what the Node ID, Elevation, Field Code and Description will be used. The Nodes to
Place drop list contains the names of the “key” curve points that will be placed by the current command.
What appears in the Description edit field depends on what is set in the Entry Options command. It will
use the default description, the description set within the Field Code or it will be a description in the
context of the command depending on your settings.
14 COGO
By changing your selection in this drop list you may set the individual parameters of the curve points.
Chapter 1: Concepts
Be sure to select the Apply button before changing your selection in the drop list to ensure that your
changes to the parameters are saved.
! The Northing and Easting edit fields are disabled but still show the coordinates of the Node that will be
placed.
Commands that construct spirals use a slightly different “version” of this dialog box. The Nodes to Place
drop list contains “key” spiral points such as Tangent to Spiral (TS), Spiral to Curve (SC), Curve to
Spiral (CS) and Spiral to Tangent (ST).
Figure 1-17 COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Nodes To Place Select the type of Node for which you want to change the individual parameters. Be sure to use the Apply
button prior to changing your selection to save your changes to the parameters.
Place Node Toggle this option on to have a Node placed at the location specified in the Nodes To Place drop list.
Node ID Enter the Node ID you want placed for the option set in the Nodes To Place drop list.
Northing This edit field statically displays the calculated Northing coordinate (Y-coordinate) of the Node to place.
Easting This edit field statically displays the calculated Easting coordinate (X-coordinate) of the Node to place.
Elevation Enter the elevation at which you want the Node placed.
Field Code Set the Field Code to control what symbol and annotation gets placed for the specified Node.
Description The text entered in this edit field will be displayed as the description on the Node when it is placed.
COGO Settings Dialog Box

A COGO Settings dialog box (similar to the one shown in Figure 1-18 on page 16) will display as the
first dialog for every wizard type command in COGO if the Start Procedural Command With Settings
Dialog Box toggle is on in the Entry Options command. The Entry Options command is accessed from
the Settings menu. If it is toggled off, the settings in Entry Options and the options set in the Toggles
command will control the options that are normally displayed on the Settings dialog box.
! Even with this toggle set off, you may use the Back button on the first dialog box of wizard type
commands to access the Settings dialog box.
This dialog box allows you to start recording a Batch file on the commands that support Batch
operations. It also allows you to set what objects (Nodes and/or Lines) you will be placing as the result
of running certain commands as well as controlling the Audit Trail.
! The QuickSteps in COGO illustrate procedural commands as if the Start Procedural Command With
Settings dialog box option is toggled off.
Figure 1-18 COGO Settings Dialog Box
COGO Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Batch This button is available on the commands that allow batch recording. Use it to set up a Batch file to record
Processing your command steps. This dialog box is similar to the Batch File Manager dialog box, however, you cannot
delete or print batch files and you have the Record toggle available.
Toggles Change the drop list to set what type of objects will be placed at the end of a command. The three choices
available are:
" Place Nodes: When the drop list is set to this option, only Nodes will be placed as a result of the
current command.
" Place Objects: When the drop list is set to this option, only lines/arcs will be placed as a result
of the current command. Nodes will not be placed.
" Place Nodes and Objects: When the drop list is set to this option, Nodes and lines/arcs will be
placed as a result of the current command.
Print Audit Trail Toggle this option on to produce a “paper trail” of the commands that have been run. The output of the
Audit Trail is controlled by the Print Setup command found in the Eagle Point File menu. You may send the
Audit Trail directly to your Windows System Printer or to a file.
Scale Z Toggle this option on if you want to apply the scale factor to the elevation also. This is only available for the
(Elevation) Scale Nodes and Translate-Rotate-Scale commands.
For more information about the Scale Nodes command, see Scale Nodes on page 50.
For more information about the Translate-Rotate-Scale command, see Translate-Rotate-Scale on page
98.
COGO Print Options Dialog Box

Many report commands in COGO give you the ability to customize the printout of the report. When a
report can be customized, the Print button on the dialog boxes will launch a Print Options dialog box
(Figure 1-19 on page 17). You can control what data will be printed, column widths, column headers
and the order of the columns. The items listed in the Data To Print column varies depending on the
command that launches the Print Options dialog box.
The Save Settings As Default toggle will save the status of the columns for the various items to print.
16 COGO
Selecting the Print button will then send the report to your Windows System Printer or to a file
Chapter 1: Concepts
depending on the settings in the Print Setup command found in the Eagle Point File menu.
Figure 1-19 Print Options Dialog Box
Print Options Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Data To Print The items that appear in this column are the available items that can be included in the report.
Print Turn on the toggle in this column for the items you wish to see in your report.
Width Set the width of the printed column for the corresponding item.
Column Header This text appears at the top of the columns in the printed report.
Order Set the order in which to organize the columns of the items in the Data To Print column.
Total Printed This displays the total of all of the numbers that are displayed in the Width column for the items that are
Columns Used toggled on to be printed.
Total Printed This is the number of columns that are available to be printed as set by the print setup.
Columns
For more information on print setup, see Print Setup in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Available
Save Settings This allows you to save the Station Offset print options as the defaults so the next time this command is
As Default selected, the print options will be set to what they were when the Save Settings as Defaults toggle was
turned on.
18 COGO
NODES
The Nodes menu contains many commands that allow you to place and
modify Nodes in your project.
CHAPTER
In this chapter:
Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Snap Nodes to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Place Nodes Along Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Resection by 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Resection by 3 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Locate Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2
Zoom to Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Edit Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Match Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Leader Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Renumber/Rename Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Raise/Lower Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Resize Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Clean Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rotate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Scale Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copy Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Erase Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Modify Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 2: Nodes 19
Place Nodes
COG O # NODES # PLACE NODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: placenode
ICON:
The Place Nodes command may be used to place traverse points, property markers, utility symbols or
other control points in the project. The locations that a Node is placed can also be recorded to a batch
file.
For more information on Batch Processing, see Batch Processing on page 4 and Manage Batch Files
on page 56.
! You may enter coordinate values or select a location in the CAD graphic to place a Node or to place a
point object. You specify a Node ID, Elevation, Field Code and Description for the Node before it is
placed. For more information on selecting a point graphically, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on
page 5.
! You may snap to 3-D lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects to inherit the elevations if the entry option
for elevation is set to inherit the elevation of an object selected. For more information on this setting,
see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page 250.
! The Node ID in the edit field will automatically number to the next available Node ID in the project.
Figure 2-1 Place Nodes Dialog Box
Place Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Click on the PIC icon to select a coordinate from the CAD graphic at which to place a Node. This
icon is only available when focus is placed in the Northing or Easting edit fields.
Node ID Type a Node ID. This may be up to seven digits. If alphanumeric Node IDs are being used, you may
also type up to a seven character Node prefix or name.
Northing Type the Northing (Y) coordinate or set focus in the edit field and click on the PIC button to select a
coordinate from the CAD graphic.
Easting Type the Easting (X) coordinate or set focus in the edit field and use the PIC button to select a
coordinate from the CAD graphic.
Elevation Type the elevation value. This will update to the elevation of a selected object if the entry options are
set for the Node to inherit the elevation.
For more information on entry options, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page 250.
20 COGO
Place Nodes Dialog Box Definitions
Field Code This controls what symbol and annotation will appear on the Node when it is placed. The available
Field codes are read from the current Node (Field Code) Library.
Description The text entered in this edit field will be annotated as the description on the Node when it is placed.
QuickSteps
Chapter 2: Nodes
To place a Node, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Place Node.
This displays the Place Nodes dialog box (Figure 2-1 on page 20).
2. Enter the value for the Node ID in the Node ID edit field.
3. Enter the Northing and Easting coordinate values or select them graphically by clicking on
the PIC button and selecting a location in the CAD graphic.
If you select the location graphically, the command automatically places the Node with the
elevation, field code, and description specified. The prompt repeats, allowing you to place
additional Nodes without returning you to the dialog box. Once you are done placing Nodes by
selecting a coordinate location, press Enter in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on your
printing device in MicroStation.
4. Enter the elevation for the Node in the elevation edit field.
5. Select the Field Code to place from the Field Code drop list.
6. Enter the description for the Node in the Description edit field.
7. Click on Apply to place the Node.
The Place Nodes dialog box will remain open, allowing you to place additional Nodes.
Snap Nodes to Objects

COG O # NODES # S NAP TO OBJECTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: snapnode
ICON:
The Snap Nodes to Objects command may be used to place property markers at end points of line
segments or curve and spiral control points automatically by graphically selecting the objects.
The Nodes that are placed and their descriptions may be preset using the Snap options and
Descriptions options, which may be saved for future use. The Nodes may be set for line end points,
curve end points, curve PI points, curve radius points and spiral end points. You may desire to place
Nodes where Nodes already exist; however, these duplicate occurrences are not automatically placed.
New Nodes are placed using the default field code with the CAD settings specified for the field code.
For more information about the default Field Code, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page
250.
You may specify the starting Node ID value for placing the Nodes. This will be defaulted to the next
available Node ID.
Chapter 2: Nodes 21
! The Duplicate Node Tolerance setting eliminates any locations duplicated by connected or concentric
objects in the selection set and also eliminates any locations currently occupied by existing Nodes on
different layers/levels.
! Nodes snapped may inherit the elevations of the objects or they may be set to an absolute elevation
setting using the options described in Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page 250.
Figure 2-2 Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box
Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Node ID You may enter the starting Node ID to use when snapping Nodes to the selected objects.
Do Not Place Toggle this on if you do not want to place duplicate Nodes on the selected objects. If a Node is found
Duplicate Nodes within the Duplicate Node Tolerance, then a Node is not placed. If this is toggled off, or a Node is not found
within the tolerance, then a Node will be placed.
Duplicate Node You may enter the tolerance value to place new Nodes. If a Node already exists within the entered
Tolerance tolerance distance of the snapped Node, then the snapped Node will not be placed.
Snap Options You may select what Nodes to automatically snap, as well as their descriptions. These settings may be
and saved as the default for the next use.
Descriptions For more information, see Snap Options and Descriptions on page 24.
QuickSteps
To Snap Nodes to an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Snap to Object.
2. Choose a selection method and select the lines, arcs and spirals from the CAD graphic to
which the Nodes will be snapped. If you have selected the single or AutoCAD (BricsCad)/
Fence options, you will need to click on the PIC button to select the objects.
3. Click on Apply to accept the objects.
4. Click on Next to move to the next dialog box.
This displays the Snap Nodes to Objects dialog box (above).
5. Type the starting Node ID.
This will be the starting Node of the snapped Nodes. Toggle on the Do Not Place Duplicate Nodes
option if you do not want to place a Node at a location that already has a Node.
6. Modify the Duplicate Node Tolerance, if desired.
7. Click on the Snap Options and Descriptions button.
The Snap Options and Descriptions dialog box (Figure 2-5 on page 24) displays.
8. Select which Nodes to place.
22 COGO
9. Enter the desired descriptions for these locations. Click on OK to accept the changes made
in the Snap Options and Descriptions dialog box.
10. Click on Apply to snap the Nodes to the selected objects.
11. Click on the Repeat button if you want to repeat the command.
Example
This example shows how you might automatically snap control Nodes to an alignment or other complex
object that does not have any Nodes placed along it. You can select the object(s) by any of the CAD
Chapter 2: Nodes
selection methods available.
1. Select Nodes ! Snap to Object.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, choose whether to print an audit trail of the Nodes to be
snapped. Click on Next.
3. Choose Single from the Selection Method drop list and click on the PIC button.
Figure 2-3 Select Alignment to Snap Nodes
4. Select the single alignment from the CAD graphic as shown in the figure above.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Click on Next to display the Snap Nodes to Objects dialog box (Figure 2-2 on page 22).
7. Type the Starting Node ID value to use.
8. Toggle on the Do Not Place Duplicates option and type a tolerance setting of .001.
If any Nodes already exist at the calculated locations, COGO will not place duplicate Nodes at
those locations.
9. Click on the Snap Options and Descriptions button and check all of the locations that you
want to place a Node. Modify the descriptions and click on the Save Settings as Defaults
button so the placement options are saved for the next use.
Chapter 2: Nodes 23
10. Click on OK.
Figure 2-4 Snapped Nodes
11. Click on Apply to snap the Nodes to the selected object(s). The Nodes that are snapped to
the Alignment are shown in the figure above.
! You can also use this command to create all of the lot corners for a subdivision. Modify the Line
Endpoint description and select all of the lot lines in the project.
Snap Options and Descriptions

COG O # NODES # S NAP TO OBJECT # SNAP OPTIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS
The Snap Options and Descriptions dialog box (below) allows you to select which Nodes will be placed
and the description that is placed with the Node. Toggle on the location that you want to place a Node
and enter a description for the Node that will be placed at that location.
The locations that a Node can be placed are Line Endpoints, Curve Start Point, Curve End Point,
Compound Curve Point, Reverse Curve Point, Curve PI Point, Curve Radius Point, Tangent to Spiral
Point, Spiral to Tangent Point, Curve to Spiral Point, Spiral to Curve Point, Spiral to Spiral Point and
Spiral PI Point. The settings may be saved as the defaults by clicking on the Save Settings as Defaults
button.
Figure 2-5 Snap Objects and Descriptions Dialog Box
24 COGO
Snap Objects and Descriptions Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Toggles These allow you to select where you want Nodes placed. When this is toggled on, the description edit field
will be enabled.
Descriptions Enter the description that will be associated with the Node when it is placed at the location specified.
Save Settings as Select this option to save the states of the toggles and descriptions. These will be the defaults for the
Defaults Nodes the next time the command is used.
Chapter 2: Nodes
Place Nodes Along Object
COG O # NODES # PLACE A LONG OBJECT
KEY-IN COMMAND: placealong

The Place Nodes Along Object command may be used to place property markers or other control
points at specific intervals along an object.
You can automatically place Nodes along lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects at a user-defined
interval. Nodes may be placed at a specified distance along the selected entity, at a constant input
distance along the entire length of the entity or at an interval that divides the entity into equal length
segments. The Nodes can be placed all at the same time or they can be placed individually. Placing the
Nodes individually allows you to choose the Node ID, Elevation, Field Code and Description for each
Node that is placed. Placing the Nodes all at the same time will use the same Field Code and
description for each Node.
! Nodes placed may inherit the elevations of the objects or they may be set to an absolute elevation. This
setting can be found in the Entry Options – Node Placement Tab. See Entry Options – Node Placement
Tab on page 250.
Figure 2-6 Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box
Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Distance Toggle this option on to place a Node at a specified distance along the selected object.
Horizontal One of these fields will be enabled if the Distance radio button or Measure radio button is on. This is the
Distance distance from the start point along the object that a Node is placed.
Measure Toggle this option on to place Nodes at a constant distance along the entire length of the object.
Divide Toggle this option on to place Nodes at an equal interval that divides the objects into equal length
segments.
Number of This is enabled if the Divide radio button is on. This is the number of segments into which the object will be
Segments divided. The Nodes will be evenly placed, marking the endpoints and the division of the segments.
Chapter 2: Nodes 25
QuickSteps
To place Nodes along an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Place Along Object.
2. Select the object along which you want to place Nodes.
3. Click on Next.
The Place Nodes Along Object dialog box (Figure 2-6 on page 25) displays.
4. Select the placement method.
The available options are Distance, Measure and Divide.
5. Type the distance or the number of segments to divide the object.
6. Click on Next.
7. Type the starting Node ID, elevation, Field Code and description.
8. Toggle on Apply Place All Nodes to place all of the Nodes simultaneously.
9. Click on Apply to place the Node(s). If you want to place Nodes along another object, click
on the Repeat button.
Example
This example shows how you might automatically place Nodes along an alignment or other object by a
specific distance. Here lot corners are placed along Right-of-Way lines.
1. Select Nodes ! Place Along Object.
placed. Click on Next.
3. Select the Right-of-Way line toward the end by which you want to start placing Nodes. Click
on Next. See the figure below.
Figure 2-7 Select Right-of-Way Line
4. Toggle on the Measure option, type 75 for the horizontal distance and click on Next.
This will place Nodes every 75 feet from the starting point.
5. Type a Node ID and elevation, select an appropriate Field Code and type a description for
the Nodes.
6. Toggle Apply Place all Nodes on and click on Apply.
This will place Nodes every 75 feet along the right-of-way line. See the figure below.
Figure 2-8 Nodes Placed Along Right-of-Way Line
26 COGO
Place Nodes by Station/Offset
COG O # NODES # PLACE BY S TATION/OFFSET
KEY-IN COMMAND: placestaoff

The Place Nodes by Station/Offset command may be used to place property markers, utility symbols or
other control points with a known distance and offset from an object.
You can place Nodes at a station and offset from a selected line, arc, spiral, complex object or
Chapter 2: Nodes
alignment from the CAD graphic. You may type the offset distance or graphically select an object to
obtain an offset value from the selected object or alignment.
! If a station value is entered that does not lie along the selected object or the alignment, COGO displays
the message:
The station is out of range.
COGO remains at this step until a valid station is entered.
Figure 2-9 Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box
Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to graphically select an object to use the length as the offset value. The length of
the object selected is filled in to the Offset edit field.
Station This is the station along the alignment where a Node will be placed. If an object other than an
alignment was selected, the BOP (beginning of project) station will be 0 (zero) and there will not be
any station equations.
Offset This is the offset by which the Node will be placed from the alignment. Enter a negative number for the
left side and a positive number for the right side. Also, you can select an object to have the length of
the object filled in the offset edit field.
Node ID This is the Node ID that will be placed at the station and offset value specified.
Northing This is the calculated Northing (Y) coordinate for the Node to be placed.
Easting This is the calculated Easting (X) coordinate for the Node to be placed.
Elevation This is the elevation at which the Node will be placed.
Field Code From the drop list, select the Field Code which will be placed.
Description Enter the description which will be placed with the Node.
Multiple This allows you to place multiple Nodes offset from an alignment over a given range of stations. The
offset can be a constant offset or follow an object you select from the CAD graphic.
For more information, see Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset on page 29.
Chapter 2: Nodes 27
QuickSteps
To place a Node at a specified station and offset value from an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Place by Station/Offset.
2. Select the alignment to offset or click on the PIC button and graphically select an object.
3. Click on Next.
This will display the Place Nodes by Station/Offset dialog box (Figure 2-9 on page 27).
4. Type the station value at which you want to place the Node.
5. Type the offset distance.
A positive value looking upstation is to the right, a negative value is to the left.
6. Click on Apply to place the Node. If you want to place additional Nodes, enter a new station
and offset value.
Example
This example shows how you might place a Node at a specific station and offset using a selected
alignment.
! You may select any line, arc, spiral or complex object to place a Node using this command.
A Node representing a fire hydrant is placed at station 10+00 and at an offset of 22 feet to the left.
1. Select Nodes ! Place by Station/Offset.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, you may choose to write the Nodes to a batch file and
print an audit trail. Click on Next.
3. Graphically select the alignment as shown in the figure below. Click on Next.
Figure 2-10 Select Alignment
4. Type the station value of 1000.

! You could also type 10+00 for the station value.
5. Type the offset value of -22.
This will place the fire hydrant at an offset of 22 feet to the left.
6. Type the desired elevation for the fire hydrant in the Elevation edit field.
7. Select the Field Code that will be placed with the Node.
8. Type Fire Hydrant as the description for the Node.
9. Click on Apply to place the Node.
28 COGO
The Node that is placed is shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-11 Place Fire Hydrant at 10+00
Chapter 2: Nodes
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset
COG O # NODES # PLACE BY S TATION/OFFSET # M ULTIPLE
The Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset option allows you to place multiple Nodes offset from an
alignment over a given rage of stations. Specify a station range and interval for the Nodes to follow
along with an offset. You can specify the placement interval to use on even stations or at a distance
from the beginning station and the offset can either be a constant offset or can follow an object you
select from the CAD graphic. The command then uses this information to calculate the Node
locations. In addition to the stations calculated, the Beginning Station and Ending Station locations
have Nodes placed at the specified offset.
The Nodes are all placed with the Field Code, Description and Elevation specified. The exception
to this would be if your COGO - Entry Options - Node Placement is set to Inherit for Elevation and
you have selected to follow a CAD object that is 3D.
For more information on Node Placement Entry options, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab
on page 250.
Figure 2-12 Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Beginning Enter the beginning station for the Nodes to be placed. The stationing is in reference to the alignment
Station selected at the beginning of the command. By default, this displays the beginning station of the alignment.
Ending Station Enter the ending station for the Nodes to be placed. The stationing is in reference to the alignment
selected at the beginning of the command. By default, this displays the ending station of the alignment.
Starting Node ID This displays the first Node ID to be placed by station and offset. The Node ID is incremented for each
subsequent Node placed. If a Node ID already exists within the project, the next available Node ID will be
used.
Chapter 2: Nodes 29
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Elevation This is the elevation of the Nodes placed. When using the Follow CAD Object option, the Node can inherit
the elevation of the selected CAD object. To inherit the elevation of the selected object, the Node
Placement option for elevation needs to be set to Inherit. For more information about Node Placement
settings, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page 250.
Field Code This controls what symbol and annotation will appear on the Nodes when they are placed. The available
Field Codes are read from the current Node (Field Code) Library. For more information, see Node (Field
Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Description The text entered in this edit field will be annotated as the description on the Nodes when placed.
Even Station Select this interval option to place the Nodes on an even interval along the alignment. For example, if the
Beginning Station is 10+23.54, ending station is 12+76.5 and the Placement Interval is set to 50, the
stations that will get a Node placed at are 10+23.54, 10+50, 11+00, 11+50, 12+00, 12+50 and 12+76.5.
Distance from Select this interval option to place the Nodes a specified distance along the alignment. For example, if the
Beginning Beginning Station is 10+23.54, ending station is 12+76.5 and the Placement Interval is set to 50, the
stations that will get a Node placed at are 10+23.54, 10+73.54, 11+23.54, 11+73.54, 12+23.54, 12+73.54
and 12+76.5.
Placement This is used to determine where Nodes are placed along the alignment. When the Interval Option is set to
Interval Even Stations, this value is the station interval. When the Interval Option is set to Distance from Beginning,
this value is the distance interval.
Constant Offset Select this option if you want the Nodes to be placed at a constant offset from the selected alignment. A
positive value will be an offset to the right and a negative value will be an offset to the left. A value of zero
will place the Nodes along the alignment.
Follow CAD Select this option if you want the Nodes to be placed with a variable offset from the selected alignment.
Object Nodes that are placed along this object can inherit the elevation of the object when the Node Placement
options for elevation is set to inherit.
For more information on Node Placement settings, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page
250.
Offset This is the constant offset the Nodes are placed from the alignment. This option is only available when the
Offset Option is set to Constant Offset.
Resection by 2 Points
COG O # NODES # RESECTION BY 2 POINTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: 2pntres

The Resection by 2 Points command may be used to solve for an occupied survey control point using
two references. This command can also be recorded to a batch file.
You can solve for the location of the occupied station point based on the observation to two other
points. Using horizontal distances to two known points and the angle turned between the two points, the
occupied station point can be calculated.
Enter or graphically select a Node or point for the first known point. Enter the distance from the
occupied station to the first known point. Enter or graphically select a Node or point for the second
known point. Enter the angle turned between the occupied station, the first known point and the second
known point. Enter the distance from the occupied station to the second known point. The angle
entered and calculated will be displayed. Enter the Node ID to be placed.
on page 56. For more information on selecting a Node or point, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on
page 5.
For more information on distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more
information about placing a Node, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.
30 COGO
! The resection Node will be placed at the distance-distance intersection point. The comparison of the
observed angle to the computed angle will also be displayed.
QuickSteps
To place a Node using the Resection by 2 Points command, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Resection by 2 Points.
2. Select the first known point. Type the Node ID, coordinate values or set focus to the
appropriate edit field, click on the PIC button and graphically select the Node or point from
Chapter 2: Nodes
the CAD graphic. Click on Next.
3. Enter the distance to the first known point. Type the horizontal distance, click on the PIC
button and graphically select an object to get a distance, or select one of the other distance
options. Click on Next.
4. Select the second known point. Type the Node ID, coordinate values or set focus to the
5. Type the angle between the first and second point.
6. Enter the distance to the second known point. Type the horizontal distance, click on the PIC
button and graphically select an object to get a distance, or select one of the other distance
The entered angle and the calculated angle display.
7. Click on Next.
8. Type the Node ID and Elevation for the resection Node. Select the Field Code and type a
description that will be associated with the Node.
9. Click on Apply to place the resection Node.
Example
This example outlines the Resection by 2 Points command. Points 1 and 2 are known points. The
distances to these points from the occupied station is known and the angle between the occupied
station and point 1 and 2 was turned. This command will place a Node at the occupied station.
2. Select the first known point as shown in Figure 2-13 on page 32. Click on Next.
3. Enter the distance from the occupied station to the first known point. Click on Next.
4. Select the second known point as shown in Figure 2-13 on page 32. Click on Next.
5. Enter the angle between the occupied station, first known point and second known point as
shown in Figure 2-13 on page 32. Click on Next.
6. Enter the distance from the occupied station to the second known point. Click on Next.
The angle entered in step 5 and the calculated angle will be shown.
7. Click on Next.
8. Enter the desired Node options for the resection Node and click on Apply.
Chapter 2: Nodes 31
See the figure below for the resection point.
Figure 2-13 Resection by 2 Points
Resection by 3 Points
COG O # NODES # RESECTION BY 3 POINTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: 3pntres

The Resection by 3 Points command may be used to solve for an occupied survey control point using
three references. This command can also be recorded to a batch file.
You can solve for the location of an occupied point based on three known points or coordinates and two
angles. The angles are recorded between the first and second observations and the second and third
observations, respectively.
Enter or graphically select a Node or point for the first known point, then for the second known point,
and then the third. Enter the angle turned between occupied station, first known point and second
known point. Enter the angle turned between the occupied station, second known point and third point.
Enter the Node ID to be placed.
on page 56. For more information on selecting a Node or point, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on
page 5. For more information about placing a Node, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.
! There is no possible solution by resection if the occupied survey control point lies on the circle defined
by the three known points and is between the first two points or between the second and third points.
QuickSteps
To place a Node using the Resection by 3 Points command, complete the following steps:
2. Select the first known point. Type the Node ID, coordinate values or set focus to the
3. Select the second known point. Type the Node ID, coordinate values or set focus to the
4. Select the third known point. Type the Node ID, coordinate values or set focus to the
5. Type the angle between the occupied station, first and second known points.
6. Type the angle between the occupied station, second and third known points.
32 COGO
7. Type the Node ID and Elevation for the resection Node. Select the Field Code and type a
description that will be associated with the Node.
8. Click on Apply to place the resection Node.
Example
This example outlines the Resection by 3 Points command. Points 1, 2 and 3 are known points that
angles were turned to from the occupied station. This command will place a Node at the occupied
station.
Chapter 2: Nodes
2. Select the first known point as shown below. Click on Next.
3. Select the second known point as shown below. Click on Next.
4. Select the third known point as shown below. Click on Next.
5. Enter the angle turned between the occupied station and the first and second known points
as shown in the figure below. Click on Next.
6. Enter the angle turned between the occupied station and the second and third known points
as shown in the figure below. Click on Next.
7. Enter the desired Node options for the Resection Node and click on Apply.
See the figure below for the location at which the resection Node is placed.
Figure 2-14 Resection by 3 Points
Locate Lost Point

COG O # NODES # LOCATE LOST POINT
KEY-IN COMMAND: lostpoint

The Locate Lost Point command may be used to solve for a survey control point using two other known
points along the same line of sight.
You can solve for the location of an unknown point between two known points based on recorded
distances from these points to the lost point. The new Node location is along the line between the two
known points at a distance based on a single proportionate measurement.
Chapter 2: Nodes 33
QuickSteps
To locate a lost point between two known points, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Locate Lost Point.
2. Select the first known point. Type the Node ID and coordinate values, or set focus to the
For more information on selecting a Node or point, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
3. Select the second known point. Type the Node ID and coordinate values, or set focus to the
4. Enter the distance from the first known point. Type the horizontal distance, click on the PIC
button and graphically select an object to get a distance or select one of the other distance
For more information on distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
5. Enter the distance from the second known point. Type the horizontal distance, click on the
PIC button and graphically select an object to get a distance or select one of the other
distance options. Click on Next.
6. Enter the Node ID and the elevation for the lost point Node. Select the Field Code and enter
a description that will be associated with the Node.
7. Click on Apply to place the lost Node.
Example
This diagram shows two known points. A third point will be placed at given distances from each known
point.
Figure 2-15 Solve for Lost Point
The distances are entered and the ‘lost’ point is placed at proportionate distances directly between the
two known points.
Figure 2-16 Lost Point Calculated
34 COGO
Zoom to Node
COG O # NODES # ZOOM TO NODE
KEY-IN COMMAND: zoomnode

The Zoom to Node command may be used when you want to zoom in on a specific Node in the CAD
graphic.
You can select a Node ID to center on the CAD display screen. The Node ID may be zoomed in on or
Chapter 2: Nodes
out on by setting the size of window.
! You may keep this command on the screen to continuously zoom from one Node ID to another.
Figure 2-17 Zoom To Node Dialog Box
Zoom To Node Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Node ID Type the Node ID value to zoom to in the CAD graphic.
Size of Window Type the height of the screen in working units (i.e. feet or meters).
QuickSteps
To zoom to a Node, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Zoom to Node.
2. Type the Node ID to which you want to zoom in the Node ID edit field.
3. Type the size of the window for the viewing screen in the current working units (feet or
meters).
4. Click on Apply to Zoom in on the Node.
Edit Nodes
COG O # NODES # EDIT
KEY-IN COMMAND: editnode

The Edit Node command allows you to modify a Node so that it has the correct Node ID value,
coordinates, elevation, Field Code and description.
By selecting a different Field Code, you can modify the symbol, CAD properties or the attributes defined
on the Node. The attributes displacement about the symbol, justification, rotation angle, text height,
CAD properties and values can all be modified by selecting the appropriate Field Code.
Chapter 2: Nodes 35
See Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Figure 2-18 Edit Nodes Dialog Box
Edit Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to graphically select a Node to edit or to select the Northing (Y) and Easting (X)
coordinates for the Node to be placed.
Node ID This is the Node that you are modifying. You can enter the ID in the edit field or select it graphically.
Northing Type a Northing (Y) coordinate value or click in this edit field and then click on the PIC button to
select a new coordinate location from the CAD graphic.
Easting Type an Easting (X) coordinate value or click in this edit field and then click on the PIC button to
select a new coordinate location from the CAD graphic.
Elevation Type the new elevation value for the Node in the edit field.
Field Code Select the Field Code from the drop list of Field Codes for the current Node (Field Code) Library of
which you want the selected Node to inherit the properties.
Description Type the new description of the Node in the edit field.
New Node ID This is the ID that will be assigned to the selected Node.
QuickSteps
To edit the parameters of a Node, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Edit.
This displays the Edit Nodes dialog box (above).
2. Click on the PIC button and select a Node from the CAD graphic or type the Node ID of the
Node to edit.
3. Press the Tab key to update the Node parameters.
4. Edit the Node by changing any of the values in any of the edit fields and click on Apply to
make the changes to the selected Node.
Match Nodes
COG O # NODES # M ATCH
KEY-IN COMMAND: matchnode

The Match Nodes command allows you to set the Field Code for several Nodes or match the Field
Code to that of another Node.
36 COGO
Select the Nodes that do not have the correct Field Code.
Select a Node graphically to set the Field Code or select the Field Code from the drop list that you want
the incorrect Field Codes matched to. Toggle on if you want to keep the descriptions of the selected
Nodes about to be changed or if you want the descriptions to use the description of the Field Code to
be matched.
! The Nodes that are selected to be changed will have the attributes and CAD settings matched to the
Field Code specified in the drop list. For more information about the Node (Field Code) Library, see
Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Chapter 2: Nodes
Figure 2-19 Match Nodes Dialog Box
Match Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select a Node graphically to use its Field Code as the Field Code to be
matched. This will set the Field Code in the Field Code drop list.
Field Code This is the Field Code that will be used as the match. The Nodes that were selected to be changed
will be matched to the Field Code set in this drop list.
For more information about Field Codes, see Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu
manual.
Hold all Toggle this on if you do not want the descriptions of the Nodes modified. If this is off, the Nodes being
existing modified will have their descriptions set to the description of the Field Code being matched.
descriptions
QuickSteps
To change the Field Codes of Nodes to a different Field Code, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Match.
2. Choose a selection method to select the Nodes to modify.
For more information on Node Selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
3. Select the Nodes to modify and click on Apply.
4. Click on Next.
This displays the Match Nodes dialog box (above).
5. Click on the PIC button and select a Node to match the properties of or select a Field Code
from the drop list.
6. Click on Apply.
Example
To modify the Field Code of a group of Nodes so they match the properties of an existing Node,
complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Match.
Chapter 2: Nodes 37
2. Choose a selection method to select the Nodes that need to be modified.
For more information on selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
3. Click on Next after the Nodes have been selected.
The figure below shows the Nodes that are selected to be changed.
Figure 2-20 Select Node to Match
4. To select a Node to match in the CAD graphic, click on the PIC button and graphically select
a Node.
See the figure above for the Node to be matched.
5. Click on Apply to make the changes to the selected Nodes.
See the figure below for the finished results.
Figure 2-21 Nodes Matched Diagram
Leader Attributes
COG O # NODES # LEADER A TTRIBUTES
KEY-IN COMMAND: leaderatt

The Leader Attributes command allows you to leader the attributes of a Node away from the Node. This
allows you to better view each Nodes attributes when several Nodes are in close proximity to each
other. The leader line will be drawn from the center of the Node to a selected location. A tail can be
placed at the end of the leader line also.
! If you do not want a leader line drawn, toggle off the Draw Leader option. This will place the attributes
relative to the point selected for the end of the leader, but will not construct the leader line.
38 COGO
QuickSteps
To leader attributes away from a Node, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Leader Attribute.
2. Enter the Node ID in the edit field or graphically select it. Click on Next.
For more information on selecting a Node, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
3. Specify whether you want to draw a leader line from the center of the Node to a selected
location by turning on the toggle.
Chapter 2: Nodes
4. If you want a tail placed at the end of the leader line, turn on the Draw Tail toggle.
5. Graphically select the location for the end of the leader line.
6. Click on Apply to place the leader line. If you want to select a different location for the leader
line, click on the PIC button and select a new location.
Example
This example shows a bench mark Node (BM) surrounded by a grove of trees. To leader the attributes
of the Node, the Node is selected by entering the Node ID of 10 in the Node ID edit field of the dialog
box. See the figure below for the bench mark Node and tree Nodes.
Figure 2-22 Leader Attributes of BM Node
Select the location of the end of the leader. The attributes of the Node are leadered away from the
Node as shown in the figure below. Also, a tail was used in this example.
Figure 2-23 Attributes Placed at New Location
Chapter 2: Nodes 39
Renumber/Rename Nodes
COG O # NODES # RENUM BER/RENAM E
KEY-IN COMMAND: renumnode

The Renumber/Rename Nodes command allows you to modify the Node ID values for a large group of
Nodes.
You can renumber a set of Nodes to start at a different value. If you are using alpha-numeric Node IDs,
the alpha prefix may be modified for the Nodes selected. All selected Nodes can then be renumbered
and/or renamed.
! You may choose to rename Nodes instead of renumbering Nodes to keep the same numeric values.
Figure 2-24 Renumber/Rename Nodes Dialog Box
Renumber/Rename Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Renumber/ This allows you to select if you want to renumber the Nodes, rename the Nodes or renumber and rename
Rename Options the Nodes. If you have your Node Format set to Numeric, the only option that is available is the renumber
Nodes.
For more information on Node Formats, see Nodes Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Number to Add/ You may type the number to add or subtract to the selected Nodes.
Subtract
Current Letters You may type the letter prefix of the Nodes you want to rename in this edit field.
New Letters Type the letter prefix to change selected Node IDs with the current letters.
QuickSteps
To renumber or rename Node IDs, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Renumber/Rename.
2. Choose a selection method to select the Nodes.
For more information on selecting Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
3. Select the Nodes to renumber/rename and click on Apply. Click on Next.
This displays the Renumber/Rename Nodes dialog box (above).
4. Select a renumber/rename option.
5. Type the number to add/subtract and/or the letters to change and click on Next.
The Nodes that will be renumbered/renamed will be displayed.
40 COGO
6. Click on Apply to renumber/rename the Nodes.
Raise/Lower Nodes
COG O # NODES # RAISE/LOWER
KEY-IN COMMAND: raisenode
Chapter 2: Nodes
The Raise/Lower Nodes command allows you to modify the elevation of Nodes in the project.
You can modify the elevation of selected Nodes in the project by setting the absolute elevation or
displacing the Nodes by a relative elevation. Enter a negative number to lower the Nodes or a positive
number to raise the Nodes when using the Relative option. The relative option is typically used if your
Nodes are placed using an assumed elevation.
! The selected Nodes will automatically update their elevation attributes in the CAD graphic.
QuickSteps
To change the elevation of Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Raise/Lower.
For more information on the available selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on
page 7.
3. Select the Nodes to raise/lower and click on Apply. Click on Next.
4. Select a relative or absolute elevation change.
5. Type the elevation value and click on Next.
The Nodes that will be raised/lowered will be displayed.
6. Click on Apply to raise/lower the Nodes.
Resize Nodes
COG O # NODES # RESIZE
KEY-IN COMMAND: resizenode

The Resize Nodes command allows you to change the size of Nodes to the proper scale.
Chapter 2: Nodes 41
The Nodes are scaled about their insertion point by a relative scale factor. The attributes of the Nodes
may be scaled with the symbol, displaced from the scaled symbol or ignored by the Resize command.
Any positive value can be used for the relative scale factor.
Figure 2-25 Resize Nodes Dialog Box
Resize Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Displace Toggle this option on if you do not want to change the size of the attributes but you do want to move the
Attributes attributes relative to the symbol.
Scale Attributes Toggle this option on if you want the relative scale factor applied to the attributes as well as the Node
symbol.
Do Not Change Toggle this option on if you do not want to change the attributes size or location. The attributes will remain
Attributes the same relative distance from the insertion point on the Node.
Relative Scale Enter a scale factor relative to its current size. The symbol most likely already has had some scale factor
Factor applied to the original block/cell. This command applies a scale factor to the current scale factor. For
example, if the current scale factor is 10, putting in a relative scale factor of 2.5 will result in the scale factor
being 25.
QuickSteps
To change the size of the Node, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Resize.
For more information about selecting Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
3. Select the Nodes to resize and click on Apply. Click on Next.
This will display the Resize Nodes dialog box (above).
4. Select a resize option. The available options are Displace Attributes, Scale Attributes and
Do Not Change Attributes.
5. Type the relative scale factor and click on Next.
The Nodes that will be resized will be displayed.
6. Click on Apply to resize the Nodes.
Example
You may resize the Nodes based on three different methods shown in this section. The three methods
are Displace Attributes, Scale Attributes and Do Not Change Attributes.
42 COGO
The figure below shows is an example of an oak tree Node that had the symbol scaled larger to better
represent the tree size. The attributes were displaced to fit around the larger symbol.
Figure 2-26 Displace Attributes
Chapter 2: Nodes
The figure below is an example of a fire hydrant Node that had been scaled along with other Nodes in
the project so that they plotted correctly at a different scale. The attributes are scaled with the symbol.
Figure 2-27 Scale Attributes
The figure below shows an example of a control point Node that had the symbol enlarged, but it wasn’t
necessary to displace the attributes.
Figure 2-28 Do Not Change Attributes
Swivel Nodes
COG O # NODES # S WIVEL
KEY-IN COMMAND: swivelnode

The Swivel Nodes command allows you to rotate Nodes about their insertion point. You can rotate the
Nodes by an absolute angle or by a relative angle. This command is typically used when your CAD
graphic is rotated to fit on a plot, but you don’t want the Nodes rotated with the plot.
! To reset the original rotation of the Nodes, set the absolute rotation to zero.
QuickSteps
To swivel Nodes about their insertion point, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Swivel.
3. Select the Nodes to swivel and click on Apply. Click on Next.
Chapter 2: Nodes 43
4. Choose between typing an absolute (geometric) rotation angle or a relative rotational angle.
5. Type the rotational angle and click on Next.
The Nodes that will be swiveled will be displayed.
6. Click on Apply to swivel the Nodes about their insertion point by the angle specified.
Example
The figure below shows a portion of a project after it has been rotated to fit within a border for plotting.
The Nodes need to be adjusted so their attributes are horizontal.
Figure 2-29 CAD Graphic Before Swivel Nodes
The figure below shows the swiveled Nodes by either a relative rotation angle of 45° clockwise, or a
geometric direction of 315°.
Figure 2-30 CAD Graphic After Swivel Nodes
44 COGO
Clean Nodes
COG O # NODES # CLEAN
KEY-IN COMMAND: cleannode

The Clean Nodes command allows you to clean objects that cross through the Node’s symbol at
locations such as lot corners. The objects that can be trimmed are lines, arcs, spirals and complex
objects.
Chapter 2: Nodes
When cleaning up the objects that pass through a Node symbol, you can select whether or not to trim
intelligent objects. An intelligent object is defined as any object that has Eagle Point Data associated
with it. Some examples of intelligent objects are alignments, spirals, lots and lines and arcs that have
been annotated with Drafting. If you choose not to change intelligent objects, the intelligent objects will
not be trimmed. If you choose to trim intelligent objects, all association to Eagle Point will be lost. Any
annotation will be converted to CAD text and will no longer be dynamic when the object is modified.
Alignments and lots will be converted into simple line and arc segments. Spirals will be converted into a
series of small arcs.
% If a line segment has been trimmed between Nodes, you will not want to annotate the line. This
would not give you the distance between the Nodes, but the length of the line. To have the
distance between the Nodes annotated, use the points option when annotating the line. For
more information on annotating lines by points, see Annotate Lines by Points in the Drafting
manual.
QuickSteps
To trim objects that cross through a Node’s symbol, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Clean.
3. Select the Nodes to clean the objects that cross through the symbol and click on Apply.
Click on Next.
4. Select whether you want to clean intelligent objects or not. If you don’t want to clean
intelligent objects, toggle on the Do Not Change Intelligent Objects option. Read the
warning provided so you are aware of what will happen to intelligent objects. Click on Next.
The Nodes that will have objects trimmed if they cross through the symbol will be displayed.
5. Click on Apply to clean the objects passing through the Nodes.
Chapter 2: Nodes 45
Example
The figure below shows three Nodes that have lines extending through the symbol.
Figure 2-31 Lot Corners to be Cleaned
The lines have been cleaned from the inside of the symbol by trimming a radius around the symbol as
shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-32 Cleaned Nodes
Move Nodes
COG O # NODES # M OVE
KEY-IN COMMAND: movenode

The Move Nodes command allows you to move Nodes to a new location. The Nodes will be moved
based on two base points that are selected.
For more information on selecting Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7. For more
information on selecting locations for the base points, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
! Nodes with coordinate annotation will automatically update to reflect the new coordinate location when
a Node is moved.
QuickSteps
To move Nodes to a new location, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Move.
3. Select the Nodes to move and click on Apply. Click on Next.
4. Select the first point of displacement. Click on Next.
For more information on selecting a location for the base point, refer to COGO Pick Point Dialog
Box on page 5.
46 COGO
5. Select the second point of displacement. Click on Next.
The Nodes that will be moved will be displayed.
6. Click on Apply to move the Nodes.
Rotate Nodes
COG O # NODES # ROTATE
Chapter 2: Nodes
KEY-IN COMMAND: rotatenode
The Rotate Nodes command may be used to rotate Nodes to their correct orientation. The original
orientation of the Nodes may have been based on an assumed direction, or the original orientation may
have been based on a different datum or coordinate system.
You can rotate the selected Nodes using several methods. You may enter a rotation angle that is
relative to the orientation of the Nodes selected. You may also specify a reference direction or a
direction that can be derived from the Nodes being rotated, and a new direction that can be derived
from any other point that is not being rotated. The reference directions can be established by specifying
a direction point, two points, bearing, azimuth, geometric, a backsight and a turned angle, or by
selecting a line segment to report a direction.
! The selected Nodes will automatically update their coordinate attributes in the CAD graphic.
Figure 2-33 Rotate Nodes Dialog Box
Rotate Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Rotation Method This allows you to specify how you want the Nodes rotated. You can either rotate by an absolute rotation
angle or a reference angle.
" Rotation Angle: Enter the rotation angle and specify the direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise).
" Reference: Enter the Reference Direction and the New Direction. The clockwise and
counterclockwise rotation angles will be calculated and displayed. You can define these
directions with any of the available direction options.
For more information about direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Reference This is used as the starting direction of the Nodes. The resulting angle is calculated as the angle between
Direction the New Direction and the Reference Direction.
New Direction This is used as the ending direction at which the Nodes are rotated. The resulting angle is calculated as
the angle between the New Direction and the Reference Direction.
Direction This displays a dialog box with all of the available direction options.
Options For more information about all the direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Chapter 2: Nodes 47
The calculated rotation angle is reported in the dialog box when the Reference Rotation Method is
used.
QuickSteps
To rotate Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Rotation.
2. Choose a selection method to select Nodes.
3. Select the Nodes to rotate and click on Apply. Click on Next.
4. Select the base point for the rotation. Type the Node ID and coordinate values or click in the
appropriate edit field and click on the PIC button to select a Node/point in the CAD graphic.
Click on Next.
5. Select the rotation method. Choose between typing the rotation angle or determining the
new direction based on a referenced direction.
6. Type the rotational angle or enter the reference direction information and click Next.
This displays the Nodes that will be rotated.
7. Click on Apply to rotate the Nodes.
Example
This example shows how you might rotate traverse and sideshot Nodes that were recorded using an
assumed azimuth and processed through Data Collection or entered through one of the COGO
traverse commands.
Nodes 107 and 112 are two control points in the local grid system that will be used to establish the new
backsight orientation for the traverse.
Figure 2-34 Local Grid Coordinates
1. Select Nodes ! Rotate.

rotated. Click on Next.
48 COGO
3. Graphically select the traverse Nodes as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 2: Nodes
Figure 2-35 Traverse Nodes to Rotate
4. Click on Next.
This will display the Rotate Nodes dialog box (Figure 2-33 on page 47).
5. Select the base Node or point about which to rotate the Nodes. In this example, Node 107 is
the initial setup point of the traverse and will be used as the base point to rotate the traverse
Nodes. Type the Node ID and click on Next.
6. You may type the rotation angle and direction if this is known.
In this example, the assumed direction of the backsight and two grid control points are known.
Select Reference from the drop list for the rotation method.
7. Type the reference direction into the edit field.
The direction format is established in the system settings. In this example, the backsight was
assumed to be a North Azimuth of 90 degrees.
For more information on system settings, see Formats in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
! You may establish the reference direction using any of the COGO standard methods of direction by
clicking on the Direction Options button.
For more information on direction options see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
8. You may establish the new direction by typing the new direction value. In this example, the
new direction will be established by selecting two of the local grid points.
9. Click on the Direction Options button and select the Two Points method from the Direction
Options drop list.
Figure 2-36 Select New Direction Points
10. Type 107 in the First Point Node ID edit field and 112 in the Second Point Node ID edit field
as shown in the figure above. Click on OK.
Chapter 2: Nodes 49
11. View the rotation angle at the bottom of the dialog box and click on Next.
This displays the Nodes that will be rotated.
12. Click on Apply to rotate Nodes.
The figure below shows the rotated Nodes.
Figure 2-37 Rotated Nodes
Scale Nodes
COG O # NODES # SCALE
KEY-IN COMMAND: scalenode

The Scale Nodes command allows you to adjust the scale and distance between Nodes while
maintaining their relative displacement.
You can scale selected Nodes by selecting a base point and entering the scale factor or computing a
scale factor by entering two distances. The distances may be determined by typing a horizontal
distance or by a distance to a point, distance between two points, a slope distance from the established
point or by graphically selecting a line segment. The ratio of the two distances entered will determine
the scale factor and will be reflected in static text in the dialog box. The scale factor will be evaluated
from the second distance divided by the first distance.
! You have an option to scale the Z (elevation) when changing from one unit to another, or to hold the Z
elevation for doing coordinate transformations.
! The selected Nodes will automatically update their coordinate and elevation attributes in the CAD
graphic or project.
QuickSteps
To scale Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Scale.
3. Select the Nodes to scale and click on Apply. Click on Next.
4. Select the base point from which to scale the Nodes.
50 COGO
5. Select the Scale method. Choose between typing a scale factor or determining the scale
factor by entering two distances.
6. Type the scale factor or enter the two distances to determine the scale factor and click on
Next.
This will display the Nodes that will be scaled.
7. Click on Apply to scale the Nodes.
Copy Nodes
Chapter 2: Nodes
COG O # NODES # COPY
KEY-IN COMMAND: copynode

The Copy Nodes command allows you to place a copy of a Node at a new location. The Nodes will be
copied based on two base points that are selected.
For more information on selecting Nodes see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7. For more
information on selecting locations for the base points, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
! The selected Nodes will automatically update their coordinate attributes and renumber with the next
available Node IDs that are available in the CAD graphic or project.
QuickSteps
To copy Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Copy.
3. Select the Nodes to copy and click on Apply. Click on Next.
4. Select the first point of displacement. Click in the Northing edit field, then click on the PIC
button and select a point in the CAD graphic. Click on Next.
For more information on selecting Nodes or points, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
5. Select the second point of displacement. Click in the Northing edit field, then click on the
PIC button and select a point in the CAD graphic. Click on Next.
The Nodes that will be copied will be displayed.
6. Click on Apply to copy the Nodes.
Erase Nodes
COG O # NODES # ERASE
KEY-IN COMMAND: erasenode

The Erase Nodes command allows you to remove Nodes from the project. The Nodes can also be
removed from the project if they are placed in the CAD graphic using CAD commands.
Chapter 2: Nodes 51
This allows you to enter Node IDs without having to know where they are in the CAD graphic. If the
Nodes are in the External Node Database only, the Nodes are erased using this command.
For more information on the External Node Database, see External Node Database in the Eagle Point
Menu manual.
QuickSteps
To erase Nodes from your project, complete the following steps:
1. Select Nodes ! Erase.
3. Select the Nodes to erase and click on Apply. Click on Next.
This will display the Nodes that will be erased.
4. Click on Apply to erase the Nodes.
Modify Nodes
COG O # NODES # M ODIFY
KEY-IN COMMAND: modifynode

The Modify Nodes command gives you the ability to edit the attributes or symbol of a selection set of
Nodes. Using the standard selection methods, you are able to build your selection set by Range of
Node IDs, Elevation Range, CAD, Description, Block/Cell, Field Code, or X-Y proximity. After selecting
the Nodes, you are able to change CAD properties such as layer/level, color, text style/font, text size
and rotation, as well as attribute displacement from the symbol and the block/cell name itself. You are
also able to perform modifications on multiple attributes at one time by selecting them using a left
button mouse click in conjunction with the Ctrl or Shift keys.
Figure 2-38 Modify Nodes – Select Nodes Dialog Box
52 COGO
Chapter 2: Nodes
Figure 2-39 Modify Nodes Dialog Box
Modify Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Attribute listing This lists the available attributes that can be edited. They include the Symbol, Number, Description,
Northing, Easting, Elevation, Station/Offset, Station, and Offset.
Value When this option is toggled on, you are allowed to select a symbol for the Node. The Symbol drop list will
display all of the symbol names from the current Field Code Library.
See Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
Delta X When this option is toggled on, you can modify the offset distance in the X direction for the selected
attributes. The distance entered will be between the insertion point of the Node and the justification point
of the text.
Delta Y When this option is toggled on, you can modify the offset distance in the Y direction for the selected
attributes. The distance entered will be between the insertion point of the Node and the justification point
of the text.
Justification This is the text justification for the attribute selected. The text justification can be set to Top Left, Middle
Left, Bottom Left, Top Center, Middle Center, Bottom Center, Top Right, Middle Right and Bottom Right.
Text Style/Font Toggle on this option if you want to modify the text style/font for the selected attributes. The available
styles/fonts are displayed in the drop list.
Layer/Level You can specify the layer/level upon which the attribute is to be placed by entering a value in this edit field.
Color Toggle on this option to specify the color of the selected attributes. You can either type the number of the
color in the edit field or select the color by clicking the color icon to the right of the edit field. This allows
you to select a color from the Color Selection dialog box.
Thickness/ When you toggle on this option, you can change the weight construction of the text.
Weight
Rotation Toggling on this option allows you to modify the text rotation. The text is rotated about the text justification
point.
Text Size Toggling on this option allows you to modify the text size of the selected attributes as displayed in CAD.
Select Nodes When you select this option, the Select Nodes dialog box displays, allowing you to choose additional
Nodes.
See COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7 for more information.
QuickSteps
To modify the parameters of a Node, complete the following steps.
1. Select Nodes ! Modify.
The Modify Nodes – Select Nodes dialog box (Figure 2-38 on page 52) displays.
2. Select the Nodes that you want to modify. Click on the Apply button after the Nodes have
been selected in CAD or the Nodes have been specified in the edit field.
Chapter 2: Nodes 53
3. Click on the OK button.
The Modify Nodes dialog box (Figure 2-39 on page 53) displays.
4. Modify the Node by selecting any of the attributes in the listing and toggling on the
appropriate options to edit. You can select multiple attributes to edit by holding down the
Ctrl key and clicking on multiple attributes in the listing.
5. Click on the OK button to make the change.
The selected Nodes’ parameters are modified as you specified.
54 COGO
SURVEY
The Survey menu contains several commands that would be routinely
used by a surveyor. Depending upon which traverse command you select,
CHAPTER
you may have a traverse loop, boundary survey or you may input an
alignment using information from a map, legal descriptions or field notes.
Traverse information can be recorded to a file which allows for greater
control of the information. This is especially useful for recording and
editing large boundary or topographical surveys that need to be entered
from field notes or a plat map. You can use the batch processor to isolate
objects that were placed through the file and show only those objects in
the CAD graphic. You can display the file using the SDMS Editor. From
within the editor, you can alter descriptions, angles and elevations or add
additional information to the file. The file can be replayed into the project,
automatically erasing and reestablishing all of the objects in the project.
You can also take the file and bring it directly into the Survey Adjustment
3
module, from which you can run an angle balance, run one of several
types of adjustments and print out reports of the entered information.
After processing the traverse, you can alter the base point location, rotate
and scale the traverse to match the correct orientation or coordinate
system established in the project by using the Translate-Rotate-Scale
command.
In this chapter:
Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Chapter 3: Survey 55
Manage Batch Files
COG O # SURVEY # M ANAG E BATCH FILES
KEY-IN COMMAND: batchman
ICON:
The Manage Batch Files command allows you to manage files that record data that was entered while
using commands in COGO. You may create a new batch file, modify the description, copy, delete or
print any of the selected files.
The commands that can be recorded to a batch file are:
" Place Nodes (see Place Nodes on page 20)
" Places Nodes by Station/Offset (see Place Nodes by Station/Offset on page 27)
" Resection by 2 Points (see Resection by 2 Points on page 30)
" Resection by 3 Points (see Resection by 3 Points on page 32)
" Alignment Traverse (see Alignment Traverse on page 58)
" Boundary Traverse (see Boundary Traverse on page 73)
" Field Data Traverse (see Field Data Traverse on page 85)
Figure 3-1 Manage Batch Files Dialog Box
Manage Batch Files Dialog Box Definitions

Number This is the number of the batch file. Each time a new batch file is created it is given the next
available number from the list of batch files.
Description This is the entered description of the batch file. This may be up to 128 characters in length.
Edited This shows if the batch file has been edited or not. If the batch file has been edited and saved
after the file was added to the batch manager, then it will say “yes” in this column.
Linked This shows if a link exists to the file from the project. If the file is not linked, the functions in the
Edit Batch File command will not work.
File Name This is the name of the batch file in the project folder.
Size This is the size of the batch file in kilobytes (KB).
Date This is the date and time the file was created or last updated.
New Batch File Click on this icon to create a new batch file. Type the new batch file description and click on OK.
Modify Batch Click on this icon to modify the name of a batch file that was created. Type the new name of the
File selected batch file and click on OK.
56 COGO
Manage Batch Files Dialog Box Definitions
Copy Batch File Click on this icon to copy the currently highlighted batch file to a new file. Use this option to make
changes or corrections to the batch file while still maintaining the original. Type the name of the
copied batch file and click on OK.
Delete Batch File Click on this icon to delete the highlighted batch file.
Print Batch File Click on this icon to print the selected batch file to a file or to the printer.
Active Batch File This is the file that may be copied, modified, deleted or printed. If batch recording is on, the active
batch file will be appended to as a command is recorded.
Edit Batch File

COG O # S URVEY # EDIT BATCH FILE
Chapter 3: Survey
KEY-IN COMMAND: editbatch
ICON:
The Edit Batch File command allows you to edit and replay batch files that were created by commands
in COGO that record to a batch file. You can also erase, select, show and unlink the objects for the
selected batch file.
Figure 3-2 Edit Batch File Dialog Box
Edit Batch File Dialog Box Definitions

Batch File This drop list displays all of the batch files that have been created for the project. Select a batch file
from the drop list of files in the project. Click on the Manage Batch Files icon to create, modify,
copy, delete or print a batch file.
For more information on managing batch files, see Manage Batch Files on page 56.
Erase You may erase any objects in the CAD graphic that are linked to the currently highlighted batch file.
The batch file itself will not be deleted. You can restore the objects to the CAD graphic by clicking
on the Replay button.
Select You may select all of the objects that are linked to the selected batch file. This selection may be
used in conjunction with other commands.
Show Only This allows you to display only the objects for the selected batch file. The Show Only command can
be used before the Unlink, Erase and Replay commands so you can verify the objects that will be
affected by running these commands. This will not alter the data in the CAD graphic. To return the
screen to its prior state, refresh or redraw the view in CAD.
Unlink You may remove the link that the selected batch file has with the objects in the CAD graphic. If the
batch file is replayed, no objects will be deleted or changed in the CAD graphic.
Edit Batch File Dialog Box Definitions
Edit You may edit the selected batch file by clicking on the Edit button. This will display the SDMS Editor
from which you can edit the selected batch file.
For more information see SDMS Editor in Data Collection.
Replay After you have edited the file, you may replay the batch file into the CAD graphic. This will replace
the objects into the CAD graphic as they were edited. If the Auto-Erase toggle is set on, all of the
objects that were originally placed by the command in the batch file will be erased from the project
before the objects are placed back in the CAD graphic.
Auto-Erase When this is checked on, all objects that are linked with the selected batch file are removed before
the objects are placed back into the CAD graphic.
Re-compute If you change the angle of one traverse leg, from that point forward, all side shots and/or traverse
BS legs update based on the turned angle. When the Re-compute BS option is toggled on, any turned
angles in the batch file will be computed using the previously occupied station as the backsight. All
coordinates used to calculate a direction from a backsight are ignored, except for the initial starting
coordinates of the traverse. When this option is toggled off, any turned angles in the batch file will
be computed using the coordinate values (XC, XX, YC, and YY data tag values) in the file. Any
changes to a horizontal angle (HZ data tag) will only affect the immediate shot changed and will not
carry through to the next setups. If at any point during the traverse you have entered a backsight
direction from a point other than the one previously occupied (excluding the initial setup backsight
direction), you must toggle this option off.
! If an object was modified graphically first and then the Replay button is selected, the graphical changes
will be lost because graphical modifications are not written to the batch file.
QuickSteps
To edit a batch file, complete the following steps:
1. Select Survey ! Edit Batch File.
2. Select the Batch file from drop list that you want to edit.
3. Click on the Edit button to display the SDMS Editor. Edit the batch file as necessary and
close the editor.
For information on using the SDMS Editor, refer to SDMS Editor in the Data Collection manual.
4. Toggle on the Auto-Erase option, if needed.
5. Click on the Replay button to update the CAD graphic.
If Auto-Erase is on, objects in the batch file will be removed from the CAD graphic and replaced
with the edited batch file objects.
Alignment Traverse
COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE
KEY-IN COMMAND: aligntrav

The Alignment Traverse command may be used to input the geometry and control points for a
traversed or design alignment. Any combination of tangent, arc, transition and combining spiral
segments may be placed along the alignment. Known station equations may also be applied before the
traverse is entered.
You may enter the traverse by any of the standard direction and distance methods available in COGO.
58 COGO
See COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9 or COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more
information.
The alignment may be used to generate stakeout and station/offset reports within COGO. There is an
Undo option to back up in the traverse if you enter the wrong information. You may also record the
information to a batch file as you enter it. The information may be edited to change Field Codes or
descriptions, or to make corrections to the directions, angles and distances. The changes may be
reprocessed into the project with the modifications applied.
See Batch Processing on page 4 for more information.
There are several different types of legs that can be added to the Alignment Traverse. The icons for the
different leg types can be found on a series of Alignment Traverse dialog boxes and are shown in the
following table.
Alignment Traverse Icons
Tangent leg See Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg on page 64 for more information.
Sideshot See Alignment Traverse Sideshot on page 66 for more information.
Chapter 3: Survey
Curve leg See Alignment Traverse Curve Leg on page 67 for more information.
Spiral In leg See Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg on page 70 for more information.
Spiral Out leg See Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg on page 70 for more information.
Combining Spiral leg See Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg on page 71 for more information.
Undo This allows you to back up a step in the traverse. The Undo command will remove the
line, arc, spiral and/or Node that was placed on the most recently entered traverse leg.
This option is not available when placing sideshots.
To start entering an alignment traverse, you will need to type the name of the alignment so the
information can be stored with the alignment. The alignment name will be defined for the project to
which it is being added and may be selected from a list of defined alignments when using other
commands that utilize alignments.
Figure 3-3 Alignment Traverse Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Alignment Name Type the name of the alignment to be traversed. You must enter a name before continuing. The alignment
will be added to the list of defined alignments for the project.
Defined This button displays all of the defined alignments within the project.
Alignments
Beginning You may type the starting station for the alignment.
Station
Station Data Click on this button to add a station equation to the alignment.
For more information on station data, see Station Data on page 64.
Example
This is an example of laying out a road centerline as an addition to a new subdivision. The initial starting
location is established from control points already planned in the subdivision.
1. Verify that you are using the correct working units (feet or meters). This example was done
using feet as the base unit.
2. Set the angular units to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for the system. Set the Angular
Category to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
3. Set the stationing format to +00.
For more information, see Stationing Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
4. Establish the Entry Options for Direction and Node placement. Select Settings ! Entry
Options.
The Entry Options dialog box (Figure 8-1 on page 248) displays.
For more information on entry options, see Entry Options on page 248.
5. Click on the Defaults Tab and select Absolute for the Direction Type.
6. Toggle on the Start Procedural Commands With Settings Dialog Box option so at the start of
the command, settings such as Batch Processing, Audit Trail and placement options may
be established.
For more information, see Batch Processing on page 4 and COGO Settings Dialog Box on page
15.
7. Click on the Node Placement tab and select Use Command Default from the Description
drop list. Click on OK to save the changes.
8. Select Survey ! Alignment Traverse.
9. To record this information to a batch file, click on the Batch Processing button.
10. Click on the New button to add a batch file.
11. Type Main Alignment in the Description edit field and click on OK.
12. Toggle on the Batch Record option. Click on Close.
13. Click on Next after selecting all of the settings.
14. Type Main Alignment in the Alignment Name edit field. The name may be used to select
the alignment while using other commands.
15. Type the beginning station of the alignment. In this example, the alignment is based on
existing stationing. Type 200 in the edit field for a starting station value of 2+00.
60 COGO
16. Select the start point for the alignment. Type the following coordinates for the starting
location of the alignment traverse:
Starting Location Coordinates
Northing: 7993.2951
Easting: 14189.6359
! You do not need to have Nodes in the project to use the Alignment Traverse command. Points or
directions may be obtained by selecting points or objects from the CAD graphic.
17. Click on Next.

You are not going to place a Node at the starting location.
18. Click on Next.
19. Click on the Tangent Leg icon in the lower left corner of the dialog box.
! Tangent leg is the default when starting the command.
Chapter 3: Survey
Figure 3-4 Tangent to Station 4+00
20. Type the tangent direction of 90 in the edit field and press the Tab key.
This is a North azimuth of 90°.
For more information, see Horizontal Direction Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual and see
COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
21. Enter a tangent distance of 200 in the Tangent edit field and click on Apply to place a line
segment in the CAD graphic.
For more information, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
22. To place a Node at the endpoint of the tangent section, type 1001 in the Node ID edit field.
23. Type a Node description of P.C. and click on OK to place the Node.
! If you have incorrectly entered information into the project through the Alignment Traverse command,
you may click on the Undo icon to remove the lines and Nodes placed. You may then re-enter the
correct information.
Figure 3-5 Curve to Station 6+00
24. The next section of the alignment is a curve section. Click on the Curve Leg icon in the
lower left corner of the dialog box.
25. The current tangent direction is listed in the dialog box. To complete the curve information,
a degree of curve value or a radius is needed along with one other curve parameter to
complete the curve. In this example, the curve segment has a radius of 250 feet and the next
PT station is 6+00. Press the Tab key or click in the Radius edit field and type 250.
26. Set the curve direction to be clockwise.
27. Press the Tab key to the Station at PT edit field and type 600. Tab through to the next edit
field to update all of the edit fields. Click on Apply to place the curve segment.
The Place Curve Nodes dialog box will display.
28. Mark each of the check boxes by the Nodes that you want to place in the project. In this
example, mark only the Point of Tangency (PT). Enter the Node ID of 1002 in the Node ID edit
field. Click on Apply to accept the Nodes.
See COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14 for more information.
Figure 3-6 Tangent to 6+50
29. The next section of the alignment is a tangent leg. Click on the Tangent Leg icon in the lower
left corner of the dialog box.
30. The tangent distance is 50 feet, or station 6+50. Type 50 in the Tangent Distance edit field.
The station value will automatically update to station 6+50.
31. Click on Apply to place the tangent leg in the CAD graphic.
32. Enter the Node ID of 1003 and a description of PC. Click on OK to place the Node at the start
of another curve.
Figure 3-7 Curve to Station 8+50
33. The next leg of the alignment is a curve section. Click on the Curve Leg icon in the lower left
corner of the dialog box.
34. The current tangent direction is listed in the dialog box. The curve segment has a radius of
250 feet and the next PT station is 8+50. Press the Tab key or click in the Radius edit field
and type 250.
35. Set the curve direction to counterclockwise.
36. Press the Tab key to go to the Station at PT edit field and type 850.
37. Click on Apply to place the curve leg in the CAD graphic.
62 COGO
38. Mark only the Point of Tangency (PT). Enter the Node ID of 1004 in the Node ID edit field.
Click on Apply to place the PT Node.
Figure 3-8 Tangent to Station 10+00
39. The last leg is a tangent section. Click on the Tangent Leg icon in the lower left corner of the
dialog box.
40. The current tangent direction is listed in the dialog box. Press the Tab key through to the
Tangent Distance edit field.
41. The tangent distance is 150 feet, or station 10+00. Type 150 in the Tangent Distance edit
field. The station value will automatically update to station 10+00.
42. Click on Apply to place the tangent leg in the CAD graphic.
Chapter 3: Survey
43. Place the end of the project Node. Type a Node ID of 1005. Click on the Node Description
edit field and type E.O.P. Click on OK to place the EOP Node.
44. Click on Close to end the Alignment Traverse command.
Summary of Alignment Traverse Example
B.O.P. Station Northing Easting Description
2+00 7993.2951 14189.6359 B.O.P.
Tangent Leg Station Node ID Tan. Direction Distance Elevation Description
4+00 1001 NA 90°00'00" 200 0.00 P.C.
Curve Leg PT Station Node ID Radius Arc Length Direction Description
6+00 1002 250 200 Clockwise P.T.
6+50 1003 135°00'00" 50 0.00 P.C.
Curve Leg PT Station Node ID Radius Arc Length Direction Description
8+50 1004 250 200 C- Clockwise P.T.
10+00 1005 NA 90°00'00" 150 0.00 E.O.P.
Station Data
COG O # S URVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # STATION DATA
The Station Data command allows you to enter station equations for the alignment. You can add, insert,
modify and delete station equations for the alignment.
Figure 3-9 Station Data Dialog Box
Station Data Dialog Box Definitions

Beginning This displays the BOP (beginning of project) station for the alignment. This is displayed for
Station informational purposes when you are entering station equations for the alignment.
Station Back This is the back station for the station equation. This is the true station value for the location of the
station equation.
Station Ahead This is the ahead station for the station equation. This is the new station value that will be assigned
to the location of the station equation.
New Station This icon allows you to enter a new station equation for the alignment. You are able to define the
Equation station back and station ahead values for the alignment. This will add the station equation to the end
of the list.
Insert Station This icon allows you to insert a station equation above the station equation that is highlighted. You
Equation are able to define the station back and station ahead values for the alignment.
Modify Station This icon allows you to change the station back or station ahead value for the station equation that
Equation is highlighted.
Delete Station This icon allows you to remove the highlighted station equation from the list.
Equation
Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg

COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # TANG ENT LEG
ICON:
You may type the tangent direction, graphically select a line segment or click on the Direction Options
button to determine the tangent direction from any of the standard COGO direction methods.
See COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9 for more information.
You may also type the tangent distance, graphically select a line segment, type the station to the next
point or click on the Distance Options button to determine the horizontal distance from any of the
standard COGO distance methods.
64 COGO
If you make an error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the
traverse, and re-enter the traverse leg without needing to exit the command.
Figure 3-10 Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Depending upon what edit field your cursor was last in, you may click on the PIC icon and graphically
select a line segment near the beginning to set a direction or a distance, or you may graphically
select an arc segment to report an arc length.
Chapter 3: Survey
information.
Tangent Type the tangent direction, graphically select a line segment or press the Direction Options button to
Direction determine the tangent direction from any of the standard COGO methods.
You may type the direction using the standard prefixes available. For example, *142.23 for a North
East bearing of 42 degrees and 23 minutes, or NA174 for a North Azimuth of 174 degrees.
See Horizontal Direction Formats in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
Direction This displays the COGO Direction Options dialog box.
Options See COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9 for more information.
Tangent Type the horizontal distance, graphically select a line segment or press the distance Options button to
Distance determine the horizontal distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods. This will update
the station value to the next point.
See COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information.
Station of Type the station value for the next station in the edit field. This will update the tangent distance edit
Next Point field with the appropriate information.
Distance This displays the COGO Distance Options dialog box.
Options
Tangent Leg Click on this icon to place a tangent leg. By default, this icon is already depressed in this dialog box.
Sideshot Click on this icon to place a sideshot.

See Alignment Traverse Sideshot on page 66
Curve Leg Click on this icon to place a curve leg.

See Alignment Traverse Curve Leg on page 67.
Spiral In Leg Click on this icon to place a transition spiral leg into a curve leg.
See Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg on page 70.
Spiral Out Click on this icon to place a transition spiral leg out of a curve leg.
Leg
Combining Click on this icon to place a combining spiral between two curve legs.
Spiral Leg
See Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg on page 71.
Undo After entering a leg of the traverse, you may click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the traverse.
Undo will remove the line, arc, spiral and/or Node that was placed on the previously entered traverse
leg.
For an example of how to create an alignment traverse, see the example for Alignment Traverse on
page 60.
Alignment Traverse Sideshot

COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # S IDESHOT
ICON:
You may type the sideshot direction, graphically select a line segment or click on the Direction Options
button to determine the sideshot direction from any of the standard COGO direction methods.
You may also type the sideshot distance, graphically select a line segment or click on the Distance
Options button to determine the horizontal distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods.
You may decide whether or not to draw lines to the entered sideshots by checking the Draw Line option.
Figure 3-11 Alignment Traverse Sideshot Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Sideshot Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Depending upon what edit field your cursor was last in, you may click on the PIC button and
graphically select a line segment near the beginning to get a direction or a distance, or you may
graphically select an arc segment to report an arc length.
information.
Sideshot Type the sideshot direction, graphically select a line segment or press the Direction Options button
Direction to determine the tangent direction from any of the standard COGO direction methods.
Options
Sideshot Type the horizontal distance, graphically select a line segment or press the Distance Options button
Distance to determine the horizontal distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods.
Options
Draw Line Check this box If you want to draw lines to the recorded sideshots.
66 COGO
Alignment Traverse Sideshot Dialog Box Definitions
Tangent Leg Click on this icon to place a tangent leg.
See Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg on page 64.
Sideshot Click on this icon to place a sideshot. By default, it is already depressed in this dialog box.

See Alignment Traverse Curve Leg below.
Spiral Out Leg Click on this icon to place a transition spiral leg out of a curve leg.
Combining Click on this icon to place a combining spiral between two curve legs.
Spiral Leg
Undo will remove the line, arc, spiral and/or Node that was placed on the previously entered
Chapter 3: Survey
traverse leg.
page 60.
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg

COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # CURVE LEG
ICON:
You may modify the tangent, radial or the chord direction coming into the curve. This may be
determined by using any of the standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction
Options button.
Solve for the rest of the curve using the radius or the degree of curve using either the chord or radial
definitions, a curve direction (clockwise or counterclockwise), and either the delta angle, tangent length,
length of curve, length of chord, station at PT, station at PI, external or middle ordinate. All of the
remaining edit fields will update with the computed data when you tab through the fields. If you make an
error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the traverse and re-
enter the traverse leg without needing to exit the command.
! To enter curve data into the Alignment Traverse dialog box (below), you need to enter three portions of
information.
Figure 3-12 Alignment Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box Definitions

graphically select a line segment near the beginning to get a direction or a distance, or you may
information.
Direction of Curve This will display the current direction of the alignment. You may establish a different direction by
first selecting how the direction is calculated. You may enter the tangent, radial or the chord
direction of the curve.
The curve direction options are shown in the figure below.
The direction may be determined using any of the standard COGO methods for direction by
selecting the Direction Options button.
Direction Options This displays the COGO Direction Options dialog box.
For more information, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curvature for the curve based on an arc definition. The
(Arc) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
For curve parameter definitions, see Curves on page 3.
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curvature for the curve based on a chord definition. The
(Chord) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
68 COGO
Radius This allows you to enter the radius for the curve. The degree of curve (arc), degree of curve
(chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the icon or word to change the direction of
Counterclockwise the curve.
Delta Angle This allows you to enter the delta angle for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length of
curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered
for the curve.
Tangent Length This allows you to enter the tangent length for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
of curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered
for the curve.
Length of Curve This allows you to enter the length of curve for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
for the curve.
Chapter 3: Survey
Station at PT This allows you to enter the station value at the PT (point of tangency). The delta angle, tangent
length, length of curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle ordinate
must be entered for the curve.
Station at PI This allows you to enter the station value at the PI (point of intersection). The delta angle,
tangent length, length of curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle
ordinate must be entered for the curve.
Length of Chord This allows you to enter the chord length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length of
curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered
for the curve.
External This allows you to enter the external length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
for the curve.
Middle Ordinate This allows you to enter the middle ordinate length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length,
length of curve, station at PT, station at PI, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be
entered for the curve.

See Alignment Traverse Sideshot on page 66.
Curve Leg Click on this icon to place a curve leg. By default, this icon is depressed in this dialog box.
Combining Spiral Click on this icon to place a combining spiral between two curve legs.
Leg
Undo After entering a leg of the traverse, you may click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the
traverse. Undo will remove the line, arc, spiral and/or Node that was placed on the previously
entered traverse leg.
page 60.
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg

COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # SPIRAL IN LEG
ICON:
You may modify the tangent direction coming into the spiral. This may be determined by using any of
the standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction Options button.
Solve for the rest of the spiral using the radius or the degree of curve using either the chord or radial
definitions, a curve direction (clockwise or counterclockwise), and either the length of spiral or the spiral
to curve (or the curve to spiral) station. If you make an error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on
the Undo icon to back up a step in the traverse and re-enter the traverse leg without needing to exit the
command.
! To enter spiral data into the Alignment Traverse dialog box (below), you need to enter three portions of
information.
Figure 3-13 Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg Dialog Box Definitions

graphically select a line segment near the beginning to get a direction or a distance or you may
information.
70 COGO
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg Dialog Box Definitions
Tangent Direction This will display the current direction of the alignment. You may establish a different direction by
first selecting how the direction is calculated. The direction may be changed by using any of the
standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction Options button.
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curve based on the arc definition for the spiral. The
(Arc) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the spiral.
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curve based on the chord definition for the spiral. The
(Chord) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the spiral.
Radius This allows you to enter the radius for the spiral. The degree of curve (arc), degree of curve
(chord) or radius must be entered for the spiral.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the spiral. Click on the icon or word to change the direction of
Counterclockwise the spiral.
Length of Spiral Type the horizontal length of the spiral. This will update the spiral station value to the next point.
Spiral Curve Type the station value for the endpoint of the spiral. This will be for a spiral to curve (SC station)
Chapter 3: Survey
Station/Spiral to or a spiral to tangent (ST station). This will update the length of spiral value.
Tangent Station
Spiral Information This will show the calculated spiral parameters including the spiral angle, X, Y, P, K, long
tangent and short tangent values.
For more information on spiral parameters, see Spirals on page 3.


Spiral In Leg Click on this icon to place a transition spiral leg into a curve leg. By default, this icon or the
Spiral Out Leg icon will be depressed in this dialog box.
Spiral Out Leg Click on this icon to place a transition spiral leg out of a curve leg. By default, this icon or the
Spiral In Leg icon will be depressed in this dialog box.
Combining Spiral Click on this icon to place a combining spiral between two curve legs.
Leg See Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg, below.
page 60.
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg

COG O # SURVEY # A LIG NM ENT TRAVERSE # COM BINING SPIRAL LEG
ICON:
You may modify the tangent direction coming into the spiral. This may be determined by using any of
the standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction Options button.
Solve for the rest of the spiral using the radius or the degree of curve using either the chord or radial
definitions of both curves that are being combined, a curve direction coming out of the first curve
(clockwise or counterclockwise), and either the length of spiral or the spiral to curve station. If you make
an error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the traverse and
re-enter the traverse leg without needing to exit the command.
! To enter combining spiral data into the Alignment Traverse dialog box (below), you need to enter four
portions of information.
Figure 3-14 Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg Dialog Box
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg Dialog Box Definitions

information.
Tangent Direction This will display the current direction of the alignment. You may establish a different direction by
first selecting how the direction is calculated. The direction may be changed by using any of the
standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction Options button.
Starting Curve This is the curve information for the start of the combining spiral. The information that is
Data displayed is the degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) and radius.
" Degree of Curve (Arc): This allows you to enter the starting degree of curve based on
the arc definition for the combining spiral. The degree of curve (arc), degree of curve
(chord) or radius must be entered for the combining spiral.
" Degree of Curve (Chord): This allows you to enter the starting degree of curve based
on the chord definition for the combining spiral. The degree of curve (arc), degree of
curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the combining spiral.
" Radius: This allows you to enter the starting radius for the combining spiral. The
degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the
combining spiral.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the icon toggle or word to change the
Counterclockwise direction of the curve.
72 COGO
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg Dialog Box Definitions
Ending Curve This is the curve information for the end of the combining spiral. The information that is
Data displayed is the degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) and radius.
" Degree of Curve (Arc): This allows you to enter the ending degree of curve based on
the arc definition for the combining spiral. The degree of curve (arc), degree of curve
(chord) or radius must be entered for the combining spiral.
" Degree of Curve (Chord): This allows you to enter the ending degree of curve based
on the chord definition for the combining spiral. The degree of curve (arc), degree of
curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the combining spiral.
" Radius: This allows you to enter the ending radius for the combining spiral. The
degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the
combining spiral.
Length of Spiral Type the horizontal length of the combining spiral. This will update the spiral station value to the
next point.
Spiral to Curve Type the station value for the endpoint of the combining spiral. This will be for the spiral to curve
Station (SC) station. The value entered will update the length of the spiral.
Chapter 3: Survey

Combining Spiral Click on this icon to place a combining spiral between two curve legs. This icon is depressed by
Leg default.
page 60.
Boundary Traverse
COG O # SURVEY # BOUNDARY TRAVERSE
KEY-IN COMMAND: boundtrav
ICON:
The Boundary Traverse command may be used to input boundary survey information from field notes,
legal descriptions, record maps or other sources. This survey information may include traverse legs
comprised of tangent and non-tangent arc sections that are typical of most residential lots. You may
also display a report with the closure data for the traverse. The information displayed in the report
includes the total area, perimeter, closing course direction and length, departure in the X and Y
directions and the error of closure ratio.
You may enter traverses using any of the standard direction and distance methods available in COGO.
information.
There is an Undo option allowing you to back up in the traverse if you enter the wrong information. You
may also record the information to a batch file that records the information as you have entered it. The
information may be edited to change Field Codes, or descriptions or to make corrections to the
directions, angles and distances. The changes may be reprocessed into the project with the
modifications applied.
The batch file may also be added as a COGO Batch File in Survey Adjustment for processing angle
balances, closing the traverse and printing out reports.
When you have finished entering the traverse, click on the Display Closure Data button to display a
static-text dialog box that will report the closure data for the traverse.
Figure 3-15 Boundary Traverse Closure Data Dialog Box
Boundary Traverse Closure Data Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Closed Area This is the calculated area of the boundary traverse. If the area created is not geometrically closed, COGO
will automatically calculate an area defined by the boundary traverse by closing the region. This is
displayed in both square feet and acres in an English project or square meters and hectares in a Metric
project.
Closed This is the total horizontal length of the closed boundary traverse.
Perimeter
Total Length This is the total horizontal length entered for the boundary traverse. This does not include the length of the
segment to close the boundary traverse.
Closing This is the direction calculated from the last leg of the boundary traverse to the initial occupied point.
Direction
Closing This is the length of the horizontal line segment that would join the last leg of the boundary traverse to the
Distance initial occupied point.
Departure in X This is the total change in the X (Easting) direction from the beginning point to the ending point.
(Easting)
Departure in Y This is the total change in the Y (Northing) direction from the beginning point to the ending point.
(Northing)
Error of Closure This is the ratio of the Closing Distance to the Total Length of the traverse.
You may add a tangent leg or a curve leg or undo a segment of a traverse by clicking the following
icons on the Boundary Traverse dialog boxes.
Boundary Traverse Icons
Tangent Leg See Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg on page 80 for more information.
74 COGO
Boundary Traverse Icons
Curve Leg See Boundary Traverse Curve Leg on page 82 for more information.
Display This will display the closed area, closed perimeter, total length, closing course direction and
Boundary distance, departure in the X and Y directions and the error of closure ratio.
Closure Data
Undo This allows you to back up a step in the traverse. The Undo command will remove the line,
arc and/or Node that was placed on the most recently entered traverse leg.
Example
This is an example that demonstrates how information from a record plat map may be entered into the
Boundary Traverse command. This traverse contains azimuth and distance information for an existing
lot in a subdivision. The initial starting location is a known coordinate value and the remainder of the
information will be entered from that location. Upon completion, the entered traverse information may
be taken into Survey Adjustment to process an angle balance or apply necessary corrections to the
traverse.
Chapter 3: Survey
1. Verify that you are using the correct working units (feet or meters).
This example will use meters as the working unit.
2. Set the Angular units to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for the system.
3. Set the horizontal direction to be North Azimuth for the system.
For more information, see Horizontal Direction Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
4. Establish the entry options for direction and Node placement. From COGO, Select Settings
! Entry Options.
The Entry Options dialog box (Figure 8-1 on page 248) displays.
For more information, see Entry Options on page 248.
5. Click on the Defaults tab and select Absolute for the direction type.
6. Toggle on the Start Procedural Commands With Settings Dialog Box option so at the start of
the command, settings such as Batch Processing, Audit Trail and placement options may
be established.
See Batch Processing on page 4 for more information and COGO Settings Dialog Box on page 15.
7. Click on the Node Placement tab and type 400 in the Use Next Node ID edit field.
8. Click on the Field Code drop list and select 65 CIR or an appropriate Field Code to represent
a property or boundary corner.
9. Select Use Command Default from the Description drop list.
10. Type Lot Corner in the Use Command Default Description edit field. Click on OK to save
your changes.
11. Select Boundary Traverse from the Survey menu.
12. Enter the settings for the command. To record this information to a batch file, click on the
Batch Processing button.
13. Click on New to add a batch file.
14. Type Control Survey in the Description edit field and click on OK.
15. Toggle the Batch Record option on. Click on Close.
16. Click on Next after selecting all of the settings.
17. Select the start point for the traverse. Type the following coordinates for the starting
location for the boundary traverse:
Starting Location Coordinates
Northing: 7836.723
Easting: 15320.976
! You do not need to have Nodes in the project to use the Boundary Traverse command. Points or
directions may be obtained by selecting points or objects from the CAD graphic.
18. Since you are placing a Node that did not exist in the project, you will also need to enter/
accept information for the elevation, Field Code and description of the Node. Type the
following additional Node information:
Starting Node Details
Node ID: 400
Elevation: 0.0
Field Code: 65
Description: Lot Corner
19. Click on Apply to place the Node. Click on Next.

20. To place the first course of the boundary traverse, click on the Tangent icon in the lower left
corner of the dialog box. The Tangent option is the starting default of the command.
Figure 3-16 Start of Boundary Traverse
21. Type 0.0 in the Tangent Direction edit field and press the Tab key twice.
This makes the first course of the traverse a North azimuth of 0°00'00".
For more information, see Horizontal Direction Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual, and
COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9 of this manual.
76 COGO
! If you are entering information based on a backsight direction, click on the Direction Options button and
select the appropriate option.
22. Type a horizontal distance of 167 for the first course in the Tangent Distance edit field and
click on Apply to place a line segment in the CAD graphic.
This will place the first course of the traverse 167 m in a direction of North azimuth 0°00'00".
23. The Place Node dialog box displays. To place a Node at this location, type 401 for the Node
ID, select the 65 CIR Field Code from the drop list of Field Codes, type Lot Corner for the
description and click on OK.
! If you have incorrectly entered information into the project through the Boundary Traverse command,
you may click on the Undo icon to remove the lines and Nodes placed. You may then re-enter the
correct information.
Chapter 3: Survey
Figure 3-17 Continue Traverse
24. The next course is a North Azimuth of 90°00'00". Type 90.0 in the Tangent Direction edit
field and press the Tab key twice.
25. The distance to the next point is 112.00. Type 112.0 in the Tangent Distance edit field and
click on Apply.
26. Type 402 for the Node ID and click on OK.
27. Continuing along the traverse, the next course is a North Azimuth of 120°04'07". Type
120.0407 in the Tangent Direction edit field and press the Tab key twice.
click on Apply.
Figure 3-18 Back Side of Traverse
30. Heading down the backside of the boundary, the next course is a North Azimuth of
187°21'40". Type 187.2140 in the Tangent Direction edit field and press the Tab key twice.
click on Apply.
33. The next course of the boundary is a curve section. Click on the Curve Leg icon in the lower
portion of the dialog box.
Figure 3-19 First Curve on Traverse
34. For this curve segment, the known curve components are chord direction, radius, curve
direction and delta (or internal) angle. First, change the direction drop list option from
Tangent Direction to Chord Direction.
35. The chord direction of this curve is a North Azimuth of 298°58'04". Type 298.5804 in the
Chord Direction edit field and press the Tab key.
36. Continue to press the Tab key until you are in the Radius edit field. Type 64.0078 and press
the Tab key.
37. Set the curve direction to clockwise.
38. Press the Tab key into the Delta Angle edit field and type 60. Tab to the next edit field to
update all of the curve information. Click on Apply to place the curve.
The Place Curve Nodes dialog box displays.
39. Turn the Radius Point (RP) and the Point of Tangency (PT) on. Type 406 for the Node ID for
the RP and 405 for the PT.
40. Click on the Curve Node Options button to display the Curve Node Options dialog box. Type
Lot Corner for the description of the PT Node. You may also modify the elevation and Field
Code of each Node placed. Click on OK to change the description of the PT Node. Click on
OK to place the Nodes.
78 COGO
Figure 3-20 Final Leg of Traverse
41. The final segment of the boundary traverse is another curve segment placed in a
counterclockwise direction. For this curve segment, the same curve components are known
from the previous curve. Select Chord Direction from the direction drop list.
Chapter 3: Survey
42. The chord direction is a North Azimuth of 296°13'19". Type 296.1319 in the Chord Direction
edit field and press the Tab key.
43. Continue to press the Tab key until you are in the Radius edit field. Type 74.686 and press
the Tab key.
44. Change the curve direction to counterclockwise.
45. Press the Tab key into the Delta Angle edit field and type 60. Tab to the next edit field to
update all of the curve information. Click on Apply to place the curve.
The Place Curve Nodes dialog box will display.
46. Turn the Radius Point (RP) on. Click on Apply to place the radius point Node.
47. Click on the Display Boundary Closure Data button to display the closure error of the
traverse.
48. Click on Close when you are finished with the traverse.
This completes the traverse. You may want to take the batch file created into Survey Adjustment to
balance the angles, process an adjustment or generate a report on the traverse information.
See Survey Adjustment for more information.
Summary of Boundary Traverse Example
Start Point Northing Easting Node ID Description
7836.723 15320.976 400 Lot Corner
Direction Distance Node ID Description
NA 0°00'00" 167.00 401 Lot Corner
NA 90°00'00" 112.00 402 Lot Corner
NA 120°04'07" 43.91 403 Lot Corner
NA 187°21'40" 210.74 404 Lot Corner
Chord Direction Radius Delta Angle Node ID Description
NA 298°58'04" 64.0078 60 406 RP
Node ID Description
405 Lot Corner
Chord Direction Radius Delta Angle Node ID Description
NA 296°13'19" 74.686 60 407 RP
Resultant Calculated Coordinates

These coordinate values may be determined by selecting Nodes from the Report menu. See Report
Nodes on page 210 for more information.
Node ID Northing Easting Description

400 7836.7230 15320.9760 Lot Corner
401 8003.7230 15320.9760 Lot Corner
402 8003.7230 15432.9760 Lot Corner
403 7981.7225 15470.9769 Lot Corner
404 7772.7193 15443.9763 Lot Corner
405 7803.7194 15387.9764 Lot Corner
406 7836.7167 15442.8232 RP
407 7762.1957 15325.8976 RP
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg

COG O # S URVEY # BOUNDARY TRAVERSE # TANG ENT LEG
ICON:
You may type the tangent direction, graphically select a line segment or click on the Direction Options
button to determine the tangent direction from any of the standard COGO direction methods.
80 COGO
You may also type the tangent distance, graphically select a line segment or click on the Distance
Options button to determine the horizontal distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods.
If you make an error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the
traverse and reenter the traverse leg without needing to exit the command.
Figure 3-21 Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog Box
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 3: Survey
information.
Tangent Type the tangent direction, graphically select a line segment or click on the Direction Options button
Direction to determine the tangent direction from any of the standard COGO direction methods.
Tangent Type the horizontal distance, graphically select a line segment or click on the Distance Options
Distance button to determine the horizontal distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods.
Options See COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information.
Tangent Leg Click on this icon to place a tangent leg. By default, this icon is already depressed in this dialog box.

For more information, see Boundary Traverse Curve Leg on page 82.
Display Clicking on this icon displays the closed area, closed perimeter, total length, closing course direction
Boundary and distance, departure in the X and Y directions, and the error of closure ratio.
Closure Data For more information, see Boundary Traverse on page 73.
Undo will remove the line, arc and/or Node that was placed on the previously entered traverse leg.
For an example of how to create a boundary traverse, see the example for Boundary Traverse on
page 75.
QuickSteps
To place a tangent leg in the Boundary Traverse command, complete the following steps:
1. Select Survey ! Boundary Traverse.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, choose whether to print an audit trail or record the
traverse information to a batch file. Click on Next.
See COGO Settings Dialog Box on page 15 for more information on the Settings dialog box and
when it displays.
3. Select a starting point for the traverse by typing a Node ID or by tabbing into the Northing
edit field, clicking on the PIC button and selecting a point in CAD. Click on Next.
4. If you are placing a new Node, click on Apply. Click on Next if you are not placing a new
Node.
5. Click on the Tangent Leg icon for the boundary leg.
This is the default when starting the command.
6. Enter the direction or select the Direction Options button to specify a new course direction.
7. Enter the horizontal distance or select the Distance Options button to enter a distance.
8. Click on Apply to place the line.
If you want to place a Traverse Node, click on OK.
9. Repeat the steps until finished.
10. Click on the Display Boundary Closure Data icon to view the closure report. When finished,
click on Close.
11. Click on Close to end the command.
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg

COG O # SURVEY # BOUNDARY TRAVERSE # CURVE LEG
ICON:
You may enter the tangent, radial or the chord direction coming into the curve. This may be determined
by using any of the standard COGO methods for direction by selecting the Direction Options button.
Solve for the rest of a curve using the radius or the degree of curve using either the chord or radial
definitions, a curve direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) and either the delta angle, tangent length,
length of curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate.
All of the remaining edit fields will update with the computed data when you tab through the fields. If you
make an error in placing a traverse leg, you can click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the traverse
and reenter the traverse leg without needing to exit the command.
82 COGO
! To enter curve data into the Boundary Traverse dialog box (below), you need to enter three portions of
information.
Chapter 3: Survey
Figure 3-22 Boundary Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box Definitions

information.
Direction of Curve This will display the current direction of the traverse. You may establish a different direction by
first selecting how the direction is calculated. You may enter the tangent, radial or the chord
direction of the curve.
See Figure 3-23 on page 84 for a diagram of the curve direction options.
The direction may be determined using any of the standard COGO methods for direction by
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curvature for the curve based on an arc definition. The
(Arc) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
Degree of Curve This allows you to enter the degree of curvature for the curve based on a chord definition. The
(Chord) degree of curve (arc), degree of curve (chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
Radius This allows you to enter the radius for the curve. The degree of curve (arc), degree of curve
(chord) or radius must be entered for the curve.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the icon or word to change the direction of
Counterclockwise the curve.
Delta Angle This allows you to enter the delta angle for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length of
curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered for the curve.
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box Definitions
Tangent Length This allows you to enter the tangent length for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
of curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered for the curve.
Length of Curve This allows you to enter the length of curve for the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
Length of Chord This allows you to enter the chord length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length of
curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered for the curve.
External This allows you to enter the external length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length, length
Middle Ordinate This allows you to enter the middle ordinate length of the curve. The delta angle, tangent length,
length of curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate must be entered for the curve.
For more information, see Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg on page 80.
Curve Leg Click on this icon to place a curve leg. By default, this icon is already depressed in this dialog
box.
Display Boundary Clicking on this icon displays the closed area, closed perimeter, total length, closing course
Closure Data direction and distance, departure in the X and Y directions, and the error of closure ratio.
For more information, see Boundary Traverse on page 73.
traverse. Undo will remove the line, arc and/or Node that was placed on the previously entered
traverse leg.
Figure 3-23 Curve Direction Options Diagram
QuickSteps
To place a curve leg in the boundary traverse command, complete the following steps:
1. Select Survey ! Boundary Traverse.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, choose whether to print an audit trail or record the
traverse information to a batch file. Click on Next.
when it displays.
3. Select a starting point for the traverse by typing a Node ID or by tabbing into the Northing
edit field, clicking on the PIC button and selecting a point in CAD. Click on Next.
4. If you are placing a new Node, click on Apply. Click on Next if you are not placing a new
Node.
5. Click on the Curve Segment icon for the boundary leg.
84 COGO
6. Select the type of direction in which the curve will be entered. Select either Tangent, Radial
or Chord direction from the drop list.
7. Enter the direction of the curve by typing the direction or by clicking on the PIC button and
selecting a line or arc segment from the CAD graphic. You may also determine a direction by
clicking on the Direction Options dialog box.
8. Enter either the radius or the degree of curve using either the arc or chord definitions.
9. Choose clockwise or counterclockwise for the curve direction.
10. Enter one more curve parameter (delta angle, tangent length, length of curve, length of
chord, external or middle ordinate) and click on Apply.
See Curves on page 3 for more information on curve parameters.
11. Click on Apply to place the curve.
If you are placing Nodes, the Place Node dialog box will display. See COGO Place Node Dialog
Box on page 6.
12. To place Curve Nodes, click on OK.
13. Repeat the steps until finished.
Chapter 3: Survey
14. Click on the Display Boundary Closure Data icon to view the closure report. When finished,
click on Close.
15. Click on Close to end the command.
Field Data Traverse

COG O # S URVEY # FIELD DATA TRAVERSE
KEY-IN COMMAND: fieldtrav
ICON:
This command may be used to input topographical survey information from field notes, raw survey
printouts or other sources. You may also construct the basic geometry of a sewer network, establish
benchmarks or other control points or process route survey information with both traverse and sideshot
information into the project.
You may configure the direction, angle, distance and elevation entry options of the Field Data Traverse
command for easier data entry. There is an Undo option to back up in the traverse if you enter the
wrong information. You may also record the information to a batch file that records the information as
you have entered it.
The information may be edited to change Field Codes or descriptions or to make corrections to the
directions, angles and distances. The changes may be reprocessed back into the project with the
The batch file may also be added as a COGO Batch File in Survey Adjustment for processing angle
balances, closing the traverse and printing out reports.
Figure 3-24 Field Data Traverse Dialog Box
Field Data Traverse Dialog Box Definitions

PIC Select a Node graphically by clicking on the PIC button and selecting a Node from the CAD graphic.
Occupied Type the Starting Node ID for the traverse or click on the PIC button and graphically select the
Node ID starting traverse Node from the CAD graphic.
Backsight Depending on how the Field Data Traverse Entry Options are set for this command, you may need
Node ID/ to enter the following:
Backsight
" Backsight Node ID: Type the Backsight Node ID for the next point or click on the PIC
Direction/ button and graphically select the backsight Node from the CAD graphic. This will be
Direction available when your direction type is set to Backsight Node and Angle in the entry options.
Node ID
" Backsight Direction: Type the backsight direction or click on the PIC button and
graphically select a line from the CAD graphic to establish the backsight direction. This
will be available when your direction type is set to Backsight Direction and Angle in the
entry options.
" Direction Node ID: Type the Direction Node ID for the next point or click on the PIC
button and graphically select the Node from the CAD graphic. This will be available when
your direction type is set to Direction Node ID in the entry options.
For more information on entry options, see Field Data Traverse Entry Options on page 96.
Direction or Depending on how the Field Data Traverse Entry Options are set for this command, you may need
Angle Type to enter the following:
" Bearing: Type the bearing to the next point or click on the PIC button and graphically
select a line from the CAD graphic to get a bearing. This will be available when your
direction type is set to Bearing in the entry options.
" North or South Azimuth: Type the azimuth to the next point or click on the PIC button
and graphically select a line from the CAD graphic to get an azimuth. This will be available
when your direction type is set to North or South Azimuth in the entry options.
" Geometric: Type the geometric direction to the next point or click on the PIC button and
graphically select a line from the CAD graphic to get a geometric angle. This will be
available when your direction type is set to Geometric in the Entry options.
" Angle Right, Angle Left, Deflection Right or Deflection Left: Type the angle to the next
point. This will be available when your direction type is set to Backsight Node ID and
Angle or Backsight Direction and Angle in the entry options.
86 COGO
Horizontal Depending on how the Field Data Traverse Entry Options are set for this command, you may need
Distance or to enter the following distance values.
Slope
" Horizontal Distance: Type the horizontal distance to the next point or click on the PIC
Distance
button and graphically select a line from the CAD graphic to get a distance. This will be
available when your distance option is set to Horizontal Distance in the entry options.
" Slope Distance: Type the slope distance to the next point or click on the PIC button and
graphically select a line from the CAD graphic to get a distance. This will be available
when your distance option is set to Slope Distance in the entry options.
Node ID Type the Node ID for the next point.
Delta If the Elevation option is set to Slope Distance for the Field Data Traverse Entry Options, you may
Elevation/ need to enter one of the following:
Grade/Slope
" Delta Elevation: Type the change in elevation from the occupied Node to the next point.
Ratio/Ratio/
This will be available when your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the elevation
Vertical Angle option is set to Delta Elevation.
" Grade: Type the change in elevation from the occupied Node to the next point. This will
be available when your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the elevation option is
set to Grade.
Chapter 3: Survey
" Slope Ratio (H/V): Type the ratio of the horizontal distance component over the vertical
distance component from the occupied Node to the next point. This will be available when
your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the elevation option is set to Slope (H/
V).
" Slope Ratio (V/H): Type the ratio of the vertical distance component over the horizontal
distance component from the occupied Node to the next point. This will be available when
your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the elevation option is set to Slope (V/
H).
" Ratio (Rise/Run): Type the ratio (rise/run) slope from the occupied Node to the next
point. This will be available when your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the
elevation option is set to Ratio (Rise/Run).
" Zenith Angle: Type the vertical angle from the occupied Node to the next point in the
zenith format. This will be available when your distance option is set to Slope Distance
and the elevation option is set to Zenith Angle.
" Horizon Angle: Type the vertical angle from the occupied Node to the next point in the
horizon format. This will be available when you distance option is set to Slope Distance
and the elevation option is set to Horizon Angle.
" Nadir Angle: Type the vertical angle from the occupied Node to the next point in the Nadir
format. This will be available when your distance option is set to Slope Distance and the
elevation option is set to Nadir Angle.
Instrument If you are entering vertical angle information (Zenith, Horizon or Nadir angles), you may need to
Height enter the instrument height. Type the height of the instrument at the occupied Node.
Target Height If you are entering vertical angle information (Zenith, Horizon or Nadir angles), you may need to
enter the target height. Type the staff, target or rod height at the point being recorded.
Absolute This displays the calculated elevation of the point being recorded. It is not necessary to edit this
Elevation value unless you know the elevation of the point being recorded.
Field Code Select a Field Code from the drop list of Field Codes in the current Node (Field Code) Library to
place the point being recorded.
See Node (Field Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Node Type the Node description for the point being recorded.
Description
Entry Options You may configure the direction, angle, distance and elevation entry options of the Field Data
Traverse command for easier data entry.
Batch You may record the information to a batch file that records the information as you have entered it.
Recording The information may be edited to change Field Codes or descriptions or to make corrections to the
directions, angles and distances. The changes may be reprocessed back into the project with the
Undo After entering the first leg of the traverse, you may click on the Undo icon to back up a step in the
traverse. Undo will remove the line and/or Node that was placed on the previously entered traverse
leg or sideshot.
Next Leg Click on this button to advance to the next point using the information entered in the Field Data
Traverse dialog box. This will update the occupied and backsight Node ID information (if applicable)
for the next station.
Side Shot Click on this button to place a sideshot using the information entered in the Field Data Traverse
dialog box. This will not advance the occupied Node ID value.
QuickSteps
To create a traverse using the Field Data Traverse command, complete the following steps:
1. Select Survey ! Field Data Traverse.
2. Click on the Entry Options button to configure the input methods to be used during this
command. You may configure the direction, angle, distance and elevation options for easier
data entry.
For more information, see Field Data Traverse Entry Options on page 96.
3. For common entry settings of field notes, configure the following settings: select the
Backsight Node ID and Angle option from the Direction Type drop list.
4. Select the Angle Right option from the Angle Type drop list.
5. Select the Slope Distance option from the Distance Options drop list.
6. Select the Zenith Angle option from the Elevation Options drop list.
7. Toggle the Instrument/Target Height option on and click on OK to save your changes.
8. Type a starting Node ID in the Occupied Node ID edit field or click on the PIC button and
graphically select the starting Node.
9. Press the Tab key or click in the Backsight Node ID edit field and type the backsight Node ID
or click on the PIC button and graphically select the backsight Node.
10. Press the Tab key twice or click in the Angle Right edit field and type an angle.
11. Press the Tab key or click in the Slope Distance edit field and type a slope distance.
12. Press the Tab key or click in the Node ID edit field and type the Node ID of the point being
recorded.
13. Press the Tab key or click in the Zenith Angle edit field and type a vertical angle.
14. Press the Tab key or click in the Instrument Height edit field (if enabled) and type the height
of instrument.
15. Press the Tab key or click in the Target Height edit field (if enabled) and type the staff or
prism height.
16. Press the Tab key or click on the Field Code drop list and select a Field Code from the
current Node (Field Code) Library.
17. Press the Tab key or click in the Node Description edit field and type a description for the
point being recorded.
88 COGO
18. Click on the Next Leg button to place a traverse leg and advance to the point recorded or
click on the Sideshot button to maintain at the same occupied station.
19. When you are finished creating the traverse, click on Close.
Example
This is an example that demonstrates how information from field notes may be entered into the Field
Data Traverse command. This traverse contains sideshots that were used to record the location of
certain topographical features. Upon completion, the entered traverse information may be taken into
Survey Adjustment to process an angle balance or apply necessary corrections to the traverse.
1. First, verify that you are using the correct working units (feet or meters). This example will
use feet as the working unit.
2. Set the angular units to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for the system.
3. Set the Nodes Format category to an ID format of Alphanumeric for the system.
For more information, see Nodes Format in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Chapter 3: Survey
4. This example is going to start from two known Nodes in the project. From COGO, select
Place Node from the Nodes menu.
See Place Nodes on page 20 for more information on placing Nodes.
Place the following Nodes using the information provided:
Starting Backsight Node
Node ID: 453
Northing: 8583.7222
Easting: 14189.636
Elevation: 722.64
Starting Occupied Station
Node ID: 1000
Northing: 7993.2951
Easting: 14189.6359
Elevation: 723.39
! You must have Nodes in the project to use the Field Data Traverse command for the Occupied Node
ID, Direction Node ID and Backsight Node ID edit fields.
5. Select Survey ! Field Data Traverse.

6. To establish the entry method used to enter the traverse, click on the Entry Options button.
7. This example will proceed from a known occupied station and backsight that are Nodes in
the project. To use these Nodes, select the Backsight Node ID and Angle option from the
Direction Type drop list.
8. Select the Angle Right option from the Angle Type drop list.
9. Select the Slope Distance option from the Distance Options drop list.
10. Select the Zenith Angle option from the Elevation Options drop list.
11. Toggle the Instrument/Target Height on and click on OK to save your changes.
12. To record this information to a batch file, click on the Batch Processing button.
13. Click on the New button to add a batch file.
14. Type Topo Survey in the Description edit field and click on OK.
15. Toggle the Batch Record option on. Click on Close.
Figure 3-25 Start Traverse on Node 1000
16. Click in the Occupied Node ID edit field and type 1000.
17. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Backsight Node ID edit field and type 453.
18. Press the Tab key until focus is in the Angle Right edit field and type 76.2327.
An angle right of 76°23'27" will be turned to the next point.
19. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Slope Distance edit field and type 796.573.
20. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node ID edit field and type 3000 for the Node
ID of the next occupied station.
21. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Zenith Angle edit field and type 89.4514.
22. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Instrument Height edit field and type 5.0.
23. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Target Height edit field and type 5.0.
24. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Field Code drop list and select 67 TRI as the
Field code. You may select any Field Code that represents a survey control point.
25. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node Description edit field and type
Control Point.
26. Click on the Next Leg button to place the traverse leg in the project.
27. Verify that the Backsight Node ID is set to 1000.
An angle right of 37°57'12" will be turned to a tree as a sideshot.
30. Press the Tab key into the Node ID edit field and type T300 for the Node ID of the sideshot.
33. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Target Height edit field; keep the value of
5.0.
34. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Field Code drop list and select 100 DTREE as
the Field Code.
90 COGO
35. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node Description edit field and type 24" Oak
Tree.
Figure 3-26 Field Data Traverse Dialog Box
Chapter 3: Survey
36. Click on the Sideshot button to place the sideshot Node in the CAD graphic.
Figure 3-27 Trees Located from Node 3000
37. Add the next two sideshots as oak trees that need to be located.
Sideshot T301
Angle Right: 189.0824
Slope Distance: 237.1
Node ID: T301
Zenith Angle: 90.1152
Instrument Height: 4.5
Target Height: 5.0
Field Code: 100 DTREE
Description: 18" Oak Tree
Sideshot T302
Node ID: T302
Sideshot T302
Target Height: 5.0
To place the next traverse Node in the project, proceed through the following steps:
Figure 3-28 Traverse to Node 3000

An angle right of 218°50'41" will be turned to the next point.
41. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node ID edit field and type 3001 for the Node
ID of the next occupied station.
5.0.
45. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Field Code drop list and select 67 TRI as the
Field Code.
46. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node Description edit field and type
Control Point.
47. Click on the Next Leg button to place the traverse Node in the CAD graphic.
92 COGO
48. Proceed to enter the next traverse leg to Node 3002 by entering the following information:
Traverse Node 3002
Node ID: 3002
Target Height: 5.0
Field Code: 67 TRI
Description: Control Point
49. Click on the Next Leg button to place the traverse Node in the CAD graphic.
Chapter 3: Survey
50. Proceed to enter the next traverse leg to Node 3003 by entering the following information:
Traverse Node 3003
Node ID: 3003
Target Height: 5.0
Field Code: 67 TRI
Description: Control Point
From Node 3003, two more trees were located.
Figure 3-31 Trees Located from Node 3003
To enter the information, continue through the following steps:

An angle right of 147°00'53" will be turned to a tree as a sideshot.
53. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Slope Distance edit field. Type 141.2.
54. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node ID edit field and type T303.
5.0.
58. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Field Code drop list and select 100 DTREE as
the Field Code.
59. Press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Node Description edit field and type 28" Oak
Tree.
60. Click on the Sideshot button to place the sideshot Node in the CAD graphic.
61. Enter the following information to add the last sideshot of the traverse:
Sideshot Node T303
Node ID: T304
Target Height: 5.0
94 COGO
The last leg of the traverse will be returning to the original occupied station of the traverse. For the
purpose of taking the file and performing an adjustment using the Survey Adjustment module, the
Node placed back at the start of the traverse will have a different Node ID value. This Node will then be
used to close on the closing Node 1000.
Figure 3-32 Traverse Back to Origin
62. Enter the following information and click on the Next Leg button to add the last traverse leg:
Chapter 3: Survey
Traverse Node 3004
Node ID: 3004
Target Height: 5.0
Field Code: 67 TRI
Description: Closing Point
The traverse has been completed. You may click on Close to end the command.
Summary of Field Data Traverse Example
Station Backsight Inst. Height
1000 453 5.0
Angle Right Slope Foresight Zenith Angle Target Height Type

Distance
AR 76.2327 DS 796.573 3000 VT 89.4514 5.0 TRAVERSE
3000 1000 4.5

Distance
AR 37.5712 DS 187.2 T300 VT 89.3523 5.0 SIDESHOT
AR 218.5041 DS 717.576 3001 VT 90.5948 5.0 TRAVERSE
Summary of Field Data Traverse Example
3001 3000 4.7

Distance
AR 303.3119 DS 347.489 3002 VT 89.1412 5.0 TRAVERSE
3002 3001 5.2

Distance
AR 216.5234 DS 520.3340 3003 VT 89.4444 5.0 TRAVERSE
3003 3002 4.5

Distance
AR 196.3048 DS 656.7721 3004 (1000) VT 89.4443 5.0 TRAVERSE
Resultant Calculated Coordinates

These coordinate values may be determined by selecting Nodes from the Report menu.
See Report Nodes on page 210 for more information.
Node ID Northing Easting Elevation
3000 8180.725 14963.837 726.812
3001 7874.839 15612.831 713.830
3002 7694.626 15315.761 718.159
3003 7745.705 14797.946 720.670
3004 7993.295 14189.636 723.090
Field Data Traverse Entry Options

COG O # S URVEY # FIELD DATA TRAVERSE # ENTRY OPTIONS
The Field Data Traverse Entry Options command allows you to configure the direction, angle, distance
and elevation entry options of the Field Data Traverse command for easier data entry.
These settings allow you to choose to enter the angle information using a backsight Node ID and angle,
backsight direction and angle, bearing, azimuth, geometric or direction Node ID.
96 COGO
You may also enter the elevations of your recorded points using several different methods including
absolute elevation, delta elevation, grade, slope, ratio or Zenith, Horizon, or Nadir angles.
Figure 3-33 Field Data Traverse Entry Options Dialog Box
Field Data Traverse Entry Options Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Direction Type This allows you to specify the type of direction to enter. The available options are Backsight Node ID and
Angle, Backsight Direction and Angle, Bearing, North Azimuth, South Azimuth, Geometric and Direction
Node ID.
Chapter 3: Survey
" Backsight Node ID and Angle: This direction option allows you to select a Node for the initial
backsight and enter a turned angle value.
" Backsight Direction and Angle: This direction option allows you to specify the initial backsight
direction by typing the direction or selecting a line graphically to get a direction and entering a
turned angle value.
" Bearing: You may enter all directions using bearing values. These values may be entered using
the standard valid inputs for bearings.
" North Azimuth: You may enter all directions using North Azimuth values. Each value entered is
assumed to be a North Azimuth.
" South Azimuth: You may enter all directions using South Azimuth values. Each value entered is
assumed to be a South Azimuth.
" Geometric: You may enter all directions using Geometric values. Each value entered is
assumed to be a geometric direction.
" Direction Node ID: You may type the Node ID to get the direction to that point or click on the
PIC button and graphically select the Direction Node ID from the CAD graphic.
Angle Type If you have selected either the Backsight Node ID and Angle or Backsight Direction and Angle for the
Direction Type, you may specify what Angle Type you would like to use as the default. Select from the
following four angle types:
" Angle Left
" Angle Right
" Deflection Left
" Deflection Right
Distance You may select between entering horizontal or slope distance values.
Options " Horizontal Distance: Type the horizontal distance or click on the PIC button and select a line or
arc segment to get a distance value.
" Slope Distance: Type the slope distance or click on the PIC button and select a line or arc
segment to get a distance value.
Field Data Traverse Entry Options Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Elevation If you have selected Slope Distance as the Distance Option, you may specify the Elevation option.
Options " Absolute Elevation: Select this option to enter the elevation of each point being recorded.
" Delta Elevation: Select this option to enter the change in elevation from the occupied Node to
the point being recorded.
" Grade: Select this option to enter the percent change in grade from the occupied Node to the
" Slope (H/V): Select this option to enter the ratio of the horizontal distance component versus
the vertical distance component from the occupied Node to the point being recorded.
" Slope (V/H): Select this option to enter the ratio of the vertical distance component versus the
horizontal distance component from the occupied Node to the point being recorded.
" Ratio (Rise/Run): Select this option to enter the ratio (rise/run) slope from the occupied Node to
the point being recorded.
" Zenith Angle: Select this option to enter the Zenith angle from the occupied Node to the point
being recorded.
" Horizon Angle: Select this option to enter the Horizon angle from the occupied Node to the
" Nadir Angle: Select this option to enter the Nadir angle from the occupied Node to the point
being recorded.
Instrument/ Toggle this option on if you want to enter the heights of the instrument and the prism target during the
Target Height command.
Draw Lines for Toggle this on if you want to draw lines when a sideshot is placed. If this is toggled off, a line will not be
Sideshots drawn to the sideshot Node.
Translate-Rotate-Scale
COG O # S URVEY # TRANSLATE-ROTATE-SCALE
KEY-IN COMMAND: trs
ICON:
The Translate-Rotate-Scale command allows you to modify the coordinates, rotation and scale factor of
selected Nodes and objects in the CAD graphic. You may modify downloaded or imported survey
information that was created using a different basis of bearing, datum, coordinate system or combined
scale factor.
There is an option to scale the Z (elevation) for changing units in the CAD graphic or to hold the Z
elevation for doing coordinate transformations. The translate, rotate and scale features are all included
in one command to allow for easier and faster manipulation of the data, all while retaining a high degree
of precision. You do not have to perform all three operations (translate, rotate and scale) to the selected
objects.
Translate
This part of the Translate-Rotate-Scale command will translate the selected Nodes and objects from
one location to another by utilizing existing Nodes or selected coordinate pairs from the CAD graphic.
Select the Nodes that you want to have translated to a new location. You are not required to select
Nodes to be translated.
Select the objects that you want to have translated to a new location. You can select the objects using
the following methods: Single, AutoCAD (BricsCad)/Fence and All.
98 COGO
You are not required to select any objects unless you have not selected any Nodes. After you have
selected the Nodes and objects to be translated, you will need to select the location to translate from
and to.
For more information on the Node selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
For more information on selecting Node or coordinate locations, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on
page 5.
Rotate
This part of the Translate-Rotate-Scale command allows you to correct the rotation angle due to the
original orientation being an assumed direction or the original orientation being based on a different
datum or coordinate system. You can enter an absolute rotation angle and direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise) or you can establish a reference direction by entering a reference direction and a
new direction. The reference direction can be established by specifying a direction point, two points,
bearing, azimuth, geometric, a backsight and a turned angle or by selecting a line segment to report a
direction.
For more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
The rotation of the Nodes and objects is optional. If you do not want to rotate the Nodes and objects,
Chapter 3: Survey
enter a rotation angle of 0.00.
Figure 3-34 Translate-Rotate-Scale Reference Direction Dialog Box
Translate-Rotate-Scale Reference Direction Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Rotation Method You may select to enter a rotation angle or a reference direction based on other points in the project.
Reference This is used as the starting direction that the Nodes and objects are at. The resulting angle is calculated as
Direction the angle between the new direction and the reference direction. The calculated rotation angle is reported
in the dialog box when the reference rotation method is used.
New Direction This is used as the ending direction that the Nodes and objects are rotated. The resulting angle is
calculated as the angle between the new direction and the reference direction.
Scale
The Scale part of the Translate-Rotate-Scale command allows you to scale the Nodes and objects by
typing in a relative scale factor or by solving for the scale factor using a ratio of two distances. The
distances may be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by a distance to a point, distance
between two points, a slope distance from the established point or by graphically selecting a line
segment. The ratio of the two distances entered will compute the scale factor and will be reflected in
static text in the dialog box.
The scaling of the Nodes and objects is optional. If you do not want to scale the Nodes and objects,
enter a scale factor of 1.00.
Figure 3-35 Translate-Rotate-Scale Scale Factor by Distance Dialog Box
Translate-Rotate-Scale Scale Factor by Distance Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Scale Method You may choose to enter a scale factor or determine a scale factor based on two known distances.
Existing Type the existing distance, or click on the Distance Options button to determine the horizontal distance
Distance from any of the standard COGO distance methods.
Options
Target Distance Type the target distance, or click on the Distance Options button to determine the horizontal distance from
any of the standard COGO distance methods.
Scale Factor This displays the calculated scale factor. This was determined by dividing the Target Distance by the
Existing Distance.
QuickSteps
To translate, rotate and scale Nodes and objects, complete the following steps:
1. Select Survey ! Translate-Rotate-Scale.
3. Select the Nodes to modify.
For more information on Node selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
A. In AutoCAD/BricsCad, press the Enter key after you have selected the Nodes.
B. In MicroStation, click on the Reset button on your pointing device after you have
selected the Nodes from CAD.
4. Click on Apply to accept the selected Nodes. Click on Next.
5. Choose a selection method to select objects.
6. Select the objects to modify.
A. In AutoCAD/BricsCad, press the Enter key after you have selected the objects.
B. In MicroStation, click on the Reset button on your pointing device after you have
selected the objects from CAD.
7. Click on Apply to accept the selected objects. Click on Next.
100 COGO
8. Select a base point from which to translate the Nodes and objects. Type the Node ID and/or
coordinate values or click in the appropriate edit field, click on the PIC button and
graphically select a Node/point in CAD. Click on Next.
9. Select a point to which you will translate the selected Nodes and objects. Click on Next.
10. Select a rotation method (this is optional). Choose between typing the rotation angle or
determining the new direction based on a referenced direction.
11. Type the rotational angle or enter the reference direction information and click on Next.
! Entering a rotation angle is optional. If you do not want to rotate the Nodes and objects, enter a rotation
angle of 0.00.
12. Select a scale method (optional). Choose between typing the scale factor or determining the
scale factor by entering two distances.
13. Type the scale factor or enter the two distances to determine the scale factor and click on
Apply to make the modifications to the selected Nodes/ Objects.
! Entering a scale factor is optional. If you do not want to scale the Nodes and objects, enter a scale
factor of 1.00.
Chapter 3: Survey
Example
This example shows how you might align and scale a traverse comprised of Nodes, lines, arcs, etc. that
was input using an assumed azimuth, ground or assumed coordinates or a different coordinate system.
Nodes 107 and 112 are two control points in the local grid system that will be used to establish the new
backsight orientation for the traverse.
1. Verify that you are using the correct working units (feet or meters). This uses feet as the
base unit.
2. Set the angular units to Degrees, Minutes, Seconds for the system.
3. Set the horizontal direction to North Azimuth for the system.
Figure 3-36 Local Grid Coordinates
4. Select Survey ! Translate-Rotate-Scale.

5. If you want to scale the elevation, toggle on the Scale Z (Elevation) option.
In this example, the elevation will not be scaled.
6. Choose the method to select the Nodes of the traverse. Click on Next after the Nodes have
been selected.

7. Choose the method to select the objects of the traverse and click the PIC button to select
them from the CAD graphic. Click on Next when you have selected the objects.
Figure 3-37 Traverse Objects to Modify
8. Select the base point to translate from. Type 1000 in the Node ID edit field or click on the PIC
button and graphically select the Node. Click on Next to continue.
9. Select the point to transfer to. Type 107 in the Node ID edit field or click on the PIC button
and graphically select the Node. Click on Next to continue.
10. You may type the rotation angle and direction if this is known. In this example, the assumed
direction of the backsight and two grid control points are known. Select Reference from the
drop list as the rotation method.
11. Type the reference direction into the edit field. In this example, the backsight was an
assumed North Azimuth of 90 degrees. Type 90 in the Reference Direction edit field and
press the Tab key or click in the New Direction edit field.
You may establish the reference direction using any of the COGO standard methods of direction by
12. You may establish the new direction by typing the new direction value. In this example, the
new direction will be established by selecting two of the local grid points. Click on the
Direction Options button and select the Two Points method from the drop list.
Figure 3-38 Select New Direction Points
13. Type 107 for the Node ID of the first point and 112 for the Node ID of the second point (see
the figure above). Click on OK to accept the selected Nodes. Click on Next to accept the
rotational information.
102 COGO
14. You may type the scale factor if this is known. This factor may be based on elevation or sea
level, projection grid scale factor or an “overall” combination scale factor. In this example,
the scale factor is known to be .99982. Type 0.99982 in the Scale Factor edit field and click
on Apply to perform the modification.
Figure 3-39 Modified Objects
Chapter 3: Survey

104 COGO
CONSTRUCT
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Tangent Distance . . . 113
Construct Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Construct Polar Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Construct Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4
Construct Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Construct Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Construct Curve Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Construct Inscribed Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Construct Spiral Tangent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Construct Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Chapter 4: Construct 105

Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT
COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PC,POC,PT
KEY-IN COMMAND: pcpocpt

The Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT command allows you to construct a curve with a known PC
(beginning of curve), POC (point on curve) and PT (end of curve).
Enter or graphically select the locations of the PC, POC and PT for the curve. The Calculated Curve
Values can be accepted for the curve or you can change the arc length, chord length or delta angle. If
you change any of the calculated curve values, the PC and radius will be held resulting in the PT no
longer being placed at the selected location. Select which Nodes you want to place for the curve and
the ID that will be assigned to them. If you want to change any of the parameters for the Nodes, click on
the Curve Node Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option
to continue with the same curve from the PT or to repeat the command.
For more information on how to select a Node ID or coordinate, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on
page 5. For more information on the Nodes you can place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box
on page 14. For more information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog
Box on page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PC, POC and the PT of the curve, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PC, POC, PT.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PC of the curve. Click on Next.
For more information on how to select a Node ID or coordinate, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box
on page 5.
3. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the POC. Click on Next.
on page 5.
4. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PT of the curve. Click on Next.
on page 5.
5. The calculated values of the curve will be displayed. If you want to change the arc length,
chord length or delta angle, toggle on the Change Calculated Value option. Select the value
that you want to change and enter the new value. Click on Next.
6. Toggle on the locations at which you want to place a Node and enter the Node ID for the
location. The available locations are Point of Curvature (PC), Point of Tangency (PT), Radius
Point (RP) and Point of Intersection (PI).
For more information, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14.
7. If you want to change any of the Node options for the locations, click on the Curve Node
Options button.
This allows you to change the field code and description for each location.
8. Click on Apply to place the curve and Nodes. If you want to continue the curve from the PT
point, click on the Continue Curve button. If you want to repeat the command and construct
a new curve, click on the Repeat button.
106 COGO
Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using the PC, POC and PT. The PC, POC and PT
points where selected. The calculated values for the curve were used.
Figure 4-1 Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT
Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT

COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PC,PI,PT
KEY-IN COMMAND: pcpipt

The Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT command allows you to construct a curve with a known PC
(beginning of curve), PI (point of intersection) and PT (end of curve).
Enter or graphically select the locations of the PC, PI and PT for the curve. The Calculated curve values
Chapter 4: Construct
can be accepted for the curve or you can change the arc length, chord length or delta angle. If you
change any of the calculated curve values, the PC and radius will be held resulting in the PT no longer
being placed at the selected location. Select which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID
that will be assigned to them. If you want to change any of the parameters for the Nodes, click on the
Curve Node Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to
continue with the same curve from the PT or to Repeat the command.
page 5. For more information, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For more
information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PC, PI and PT of the curve, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PC, PI, PT.
on page 5.
3. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PI. Click on Next.
on page 5.
4. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PT of the curve. Click on Next.
on page 5.
The calculated values of the curve will be displayed.

5. If you want to change the arc length, chord length or delta angle, toggle on the Change
Calculated Value option. Select the value that you want to change and enter the new value.
Click on Next.
location.
The available locations are Point of Curvature (PC), Point of Tangency (PT), Radius Point (RP) and
Point of Intersection (PI).
Options button.
For more information, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.
Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using PC, PI and PT. The PC, PI and PT points
where selected. The calculated values for the curve were used.
Figure 4-2 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT
This is an example that used the PC, PI and PT to define the curve, but the calculated values for the
curve were not used. The Continue Curve option was also used to create the two curves shown.
Figure 4-3 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT – Continue Curve Option Used
108 COGO
Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve Direction
COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PC,RP,CURVE DIRECTION
KEY-IN COMMAND: pcrpcdir

The Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve Direction command allows you to construct a curve with a
known PC (beginning of curve), RP (radius point) and curve direction.
Enter or graphically select the locations of the PC and RP. Enter the arc length, chord length or delta
angle and the curve direction of clockwise or counterclockwise. Select which Nodes you want to place
for the curve and the ID that will be assigned to them. If you want to change any of the parameters for
the Nodes, click on the Curve Node Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You
also have the option to continue with the same curve from the PT or to repeat the command.
page 5. For more information on placing curve Nodes, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on
page 14. For more information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box
on page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PC, RP and curve direction, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PC, RP, Curve Direction.
on page 5.
3. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the RP. Click on Next.
on page 5.
4. Enter the value for the Arc Length, Chord Length or Delta Angle. Also, specify whether the
curve is a clockwise or counterclockwise curve. Click on Next.
location.
Options button.

Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using the PC, RP and curve direction. The PC and
RP points were selected. The arc length was entered and the curve direction of clockwise was
selected.
Figure 4-4 Construct Curves by PC, RP and Curve Direction
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Dc

COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PC,BACK TANG ENT,DC
KEY-IN COMMAND: pcbtdoc

The Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Dc command allows you to construct a curve with a known
PC (beginning of curve), back tangent direction and degree of curvature.
Enter or graphically select the location of the PC. Enter the direction of the back tangent. Enter the
degree of curve arc or chord definition. Enter the arc length, chord length, or delta angle and the curve
direction of clockwise or counterclockwise. Select which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the
ID that will be assigned to them. You may also change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking
on the Curve Node Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the
option to continue with the same curve from the PT or to repeat the command.
page 5. For more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9. For
more information on placing curve Nodes, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For
more information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PC, back tangent direction and degree of curve, complete the following
steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PC, Back Tangent, Dc.
on page 5.
3. Enter the direction of the back tangent of the curve. Click on Next.
4. Enter the value for the degree of curve arc or chord definition. Click on Next.
5. Enter the value for the arc length, chord length or delta angle. Also, specify if the curve is
clockwise or counterclockwise.
110 COGO
location.
Options button.
Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using the PC, Back Tangent and Degree Of
Curvature command. The PC was selected, the direction of the back tangent was entered and the
degree of curvature – arc definition was entered. The arc length was entered and the curve direction of
clockwise was selected.
Figure 4-5 Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Dc
Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Radius

COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PC,BACK TANG ENT,RADIUS
KEY-IN COMMAND: pcbtrad

The Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Radius command allows you to construct a curve with a
known PC (beginning of curve), back tangent direction and radius distance.
Enter or graphically select the location of the PC, enter the direction of the back tangent and the
distance to the radius.
Enter the arc length, chord length or delta angle and the curve direction of clockwise or
counterclockwise. Select which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID that will be assigned
to them. You may also change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking on the Curve Node
Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to continue with
the same curve from the PT or to repeat the command.
more information on distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.

For more information on the Nodes you can place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page
14. For more information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on
page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PC, back tangent direction and radius, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PC, Back Tangent, Radius.
on page 5.
For more information about the available options to define the direction of the back tangent, see
4. Enter the distance for the radius. Click on Next.
For more information about defining lengths, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
5. Enter the value for the Arc Length, Chord Length or Delta Angle. Also specify if the curve is
a clockwise or counterclockwise curve. Click on Next.
location.
Options button.
This allows you to change the Field Code and description for each location.
Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using the PC, Back Tangent and Radius command.
The PC was selected, the direction of the back tangent was entered and the radius distance was
entered. The arc length was entered and the curve direction of clockwise was selected.
Figure 4-6 Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent, Radius
112 COGO
Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Tangent
Distance
COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # PI,TANG ENT DIR,TANG ENT DIST
KEY-IN COMMAND: pitantan

The Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Tangent Distance command allows you to construct a
curve with a known PI (point of intersection), both tangent directions and the tangent length.
Enter or graphically select the location of the PI. Enter the direction of the back and forward tangents,
as well as the length of the tangent. The Calculated curve values can be accepted for the curve or you
can change the arc length, chord length or delta angle. If you change any of the calculated curve
values, the PC and radius will be held resulting in the PT no longer being placed along the forward
tangent. Select which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID that will be assigned to them.
You may also change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking on the Curve Node Options
button.
The curve is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to continue with the same curve
from the PT or to repeat the command.
more information on distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more
information on the Nodes you can place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For
QuickSteps
To construct a curve by the PI, tangent direction and tangent distance, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curves ! PI, Tangent Dir, Tangent Dist.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PI of the curve. Click on Next.
on page 5.
For more information on the available options to define the direction of the back tangent, see
4. Enter the direction of the forward tangent of the curve. Click on Next.
For more information on the options to define the direction of the tangent, see COGO Direction
Dialog Box on page 9.
5. Enter the length for the tangent and click on Next.
For more information about defining lengths, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
The calculated values of the curve will be displayed.
6. If you want to change the arc length, chord length or delta angle, toggle on the Change
Calculated Value option. Select the value that you want to change and enter the new value.
Click on Next.
location.

Options button.
Example
This is an example of a curve that was constructed using the PI, Tangent Direction and Tangent
Distance. The PI was selected, the direction of the back and forward tangents were entered and the
tangent length was entered. The calculated values of the curve were used when the curve was placed.
Figure 4-7 Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Tangent Distance
Construct Best Fit Line

COG O # CONSTRUCT # BEST FIT LINE
KEY-IN COMMAND: fitline

The Construct Best Fit Line command allows you to select a group of Nodes numerically or graphically
through which a best fit horizontal line is placed. A least squares iteration is used to produce the best fit
horizontal line. The results of the best fit line are displayed before the line is constructed. The
information displayed is the starting and ending coordinates of the line, direction of the line, length of
the line, correlation coefficient and the number of Nodes/points used for the best fit line.
For more information about the selection of Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
QuickSteps
To construct a best fit line through Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Best Fit Line.
2. Select the Nodes or points that you want included. Click on Next.
For more information about the selection options, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
The results of the best fit line display. The information that displays is the starting and ending
coordinates of the best fit line. The direction of the line, length of the line, correlation coefficient and
a number of Nodes and points that have been selected also display.
114 COGO
3. Click on Apply to place the best fit line. If you want to construct another best fit line, click on
the Repeat button.
Example
Below is an example of how to draw a best fit line through a series of Nodes.
1. Select Construct ! Best Fit Line.
2. Toggle on the Select option for the Selection Method.
For this example, the Selection Method of All was used.
This selection method will select all of the Nodes in the project.
Figure 4-8 Select Nodes for Best Fit Line
3. Click on Apply to select the Nodes. Click on Next.

4. Click on Apply to place the best fit line for the Nodes selected.
COGO will draw a best fit line through the Nodes that were selected. The line is perpendicular to
imaginary planes extending from the extreme end points. The line will not extend past the
imaginary planes.
Figure 4-9 Best Fit Line Placed
Construct Polar Line

COG O # CONSTRUCT # POLAR LINE
KEY-IN COMMAND: polarline

The Construct Polar Line command allows you to place a Node and line at a specified direction and
distance from a starting point. You may enter or graphically select the location of the starting point.
Enter the direction of the polar line, the distance of the polar line and the desired Node settings for the
Node that will be placed. The polar line is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to
repeat the command.
You may create a 2-D polar line at a specific elevation or a 3-D polar line that inherits the elevations of
the Nodes placed.
For more information on the type of line that is constructed, see Toggles on page 253.
more information on distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more
information about placing Nodes, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.

QuickSteps
To construct a polar line, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Polar line.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the starting point of the polar line.
Click on Next.
on page 5.
3. Enter the direction for the polar line. Click on Next.
For more information on the available options to define the direction of the polar line, see COGO
Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
4. Enter the distance for the polar line. Click on Next.
For the available options to define the length of the polar line, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on
page 11.
5. Enter the Node ID to be placed along with the remaining Node parameters.
For more information about the parameters that can be set when placing a Node, see COGO Place
Node Dialog Box on page 6.
6. Click on Apply to place the polar line. If you want to place another polar line, click on the
Repeat button.
Example
This shows the procedure of creating a polar line.
1. Select Construct ! Polar Line.
2. Select a Node or point from which to start the polar line.
3. Specify the direction of the line.
4. Specify the distance of the polar line.
Figure 4-10 Construct Polar Line
The figure below shows the results from the Construct Polar Line command.
Figure 4-11 Construct Polar Line Results
116 COGO
Construct Feature Line
COG O # CONSTRUCT # FEATURE LINE
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgfeatline

The Construct Feature Line command allows you to develop structure outlines such as building pads
and pond bottoms based on two known points. You may draw lines from the previously defined
direction at either 45 degrees, 90 degrees or continuing on in the same direction as the previous line
segment. This command can also place Nodes at the ends of each of the segments.
You may create a 2-D feature line at a specific elevation or a 3-D feature line that inherits the elevations
of the Nodes placed.
You may enter or graphically select the location of the starting point of the feature line. Enter the
direction and distance of the feature line and the desired Node settings for the Node that will be placed.
To place additional segments for the feature line, enter the directions and distances to those segments.
page 5. For more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
information about the parameters that can be set when placing a Node, see COGO Place Node Dialog
Box on page 6.
Figure 4-12 Construct Feature Line Dialog Box
Construct Feature Line Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Direction This allows you to specify which direction the feature line will be placed for the next segment. The
available options are Deflection Right 90°, Deflection Left 90°, Deflection Right 45°, Deflection Left 45°
and Continue Direction.
" Deflection Right 90° (+): Select this option to place the next segment of the feature line to the
right 90° at the specified distance
" Deflection Left 90° (-): Select this option to place the next segment of the feature line to the left
90° at the specified distance.
" Deflection Right 45° (/): Select this option to place the next segment of the feature line to the
right 45° at the specified distance.
" Deflection Left 45° (\): Select this option to place the next segment of the feature line to the left
45° at the specified distance.
" Continue Direction (| (Shift + \)): Select this option to continue in the same direction at the
specified distance.

Construct Feature Line Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Distance This allows you to enter the distance for the next segment of the feature line. If you enter only a numeric
value, it will go in the direction specified in the Direction drop list. You can, however, enter the symbol in
the parentheses for the direction followed by the distance to override the direction that is set in the
Direction drop list. For example, if you enter +75, the next segment will go 75 units to the right; -80
indicates 80 units to the left; /50 indicates a 45° angle to the right 50 units; \100 indicates a 45° angle to
the left 100 units; and |55 will cause the segment to continue in the same direction 55 units.
Line Type to This allows you to specify how you want the feature line constructed. The available options are simple,
Draw Complex 2D and Complex 3D.
" Simple: This constructs individual segments for the feature line at the elevations specified.
" Complex 2D: A two-dimensional polyline/complex chain will be placed to represent the
calculated feature line. The feature line will be placed at the starting elevation of the feature
line.
" Complex 3D: A three-dimensional polyline/complex chain will be placed to represent the
calculated feature line. The feature line will inherit the elevations specified by the Nodes that
were used or created during the placement of the feature line.
Close Feature Select this option to close the feature line to the starting location. This option is only available if two
Line segments have been constructed.
Undo Feature Select this option if you want to undo the last segment of the feature line.
Line
QuickSteps
To create a feature line, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Feature Line.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the starting point of the feature
line. Enter the desired elevation and click on Next.
on page 5.
3. Enter the direction for the feature line. Click on Next.
For more information on the available options to define the direction of the feature line, see COGO
4. Enter the distance for the feature line. Click on Next.
For more information to define the length, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
5. Enter the Node ID to be placed along with the remaining Node parameters.
6. Click on Apply to place the first segment of the feature line. Click on Next.
The Construct Feature Line dialog box (Figure 4-12 on page 117) displays.
7. Select the desired option from the Direction drop list.
The available options are Deflection Right 90 (+), Deflection Left 90 (-), Deflection Right 45 (/),
Deflection Left 45 (\) and Continue Direction (|).
8. Enter the distance for the segment of the feature line.
9. Set the line type to draw to the desired option.
The available options are Simple, Complex 2D and Complex 3D. This will not be taken into account
until the command is closed. When the command closes, the feature line will be constructed
according to the option set.
10. Click on Apply to place the segment of the feature line. You will need to enter the Node ID to
be placed along with the remaining Node parameters. Click on Apply after the Node
parameters have been set.
118 COGO
11. Enter additional segments to the feature line or click on the Close Feature Line button to
close the feature line back to the starting point. If you have made a mistake in the feature
line, click on the Undo Feature Line button.
This undoes the last segment of the feature line.
12. Click on Close.
This converts the feature line according to the Line Type to Draw option and closes the command.
Example
The Construct Feature Line command is used to draw regularly shaped objects, such as building pads.
This example is starting on a Node that is located at one corner of a building.
1. Select Construct ! Feature Line.
2. Select the starting location of the feature line either by graphically selecting a point from the
CAD graphic or by typing the Node ID.
In this example, Node 1 was selected (see Figure 4-13 below).
3. Enter the first direction of the feature line by using any of the COGO standard direction
methods.
This example places the first course at a southwest bearing of 60°.
4. Enter the distance of the first leg of the feature line.
This example places the second corner 30 feet away.
5. Place a Node at the building corner.
Here, Node 2 was placed at the second corner.
Figure 4-13 Start Feature Line Diagram
6. To continue the feature line around the building pad, select the Direction method and type a
distance or enter the direction and distance simultaneously by entering a symbol before the
distance to establish the direction.
Type +30 to turn a deflection angle of 90° to the right and to advance 30 ft.
! You may also just enter 30 because the default direction is a deflection angle of 90° to the right.
7. Place the line and Node 3 at this location.
See Figure 4-14 on page 120.
! If you had made a mistake placing the feature line, you could simply click on the Undo Feature Line
button to back up one step at a time.

8. To finish the rest of the 10 line building pad, use the following table.
Direction/Distance Node ID
36 4
4 5
-18 6
24 7
16 8
4 9
-8 10
The feature line that results from the Direction/Distance/Node ID table is shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-14 Continuing Feature Line Diagram
9. When you complete the last entry, press the Close Feature Line button to produce a closed
complex object.
Figure 4-15 Finished Feature Line Diagram
10. Select Complex 2D for the line type to draw.

When placing the complex object in 2-D, the elevation will be obtained from the start point of the
feature line.
11. Click on Close to dismiss the Construct Feature Line dialog box and convert the feature line
to the line type specified (Simple, Complex 2D, or Complex 3D).
120 COGO
Construct Offset
COG O # CONSTRUCT # OFFSET
ICON:
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgoffset
The Construct Offset command allows you to create an offset line from any line, arc, spiral, complex
object or alignment in the project. You can specify whether you want the offset object to the left, right or
both, as well as the distance for the offset. The offset lines will be constructed at the same elevation of
the object being offset.
QuickSteps
To offset an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Offset.
2. Select the object that you want to offset by clicking on the PIC button and selecting an
object or by clicking on the Defined Alignments button and selecting an alignment from the
list.
3. From the Offset drop list, select the side to which you want the object offset.
The options are Both, Left and Right.
4. Enter the distance by which you want to offset the object.
5. Click on Apply to offset the object. If you want to offset the same object a different distance,
enter the distance and click on Apply. If you want to offset a new object, click on the PIC
button.
This resets the command and allows you to select a new object.
! The offset lines that are created will be placed according to the current CAD settings. Also, the offset
lines will be constructed at the same elevation of the object being offset.
Example
The Construct Offset command is used to offset objects in the CAD graphic. This example shows the
offsetting of a centerline to create curb and right of way lines.
1. Select Construct ! Offset.

2. Select a defined alignment by picking the Defined Alignments button or select a valid object
from the CAD graphic to offset.
Figure 4-16 Select Alignment or Object to Offset Diagram
3. Select Both for the offset type.

4. Type the offset distance of 13 and click on Apply.
A 13 ft offset creates the curb lines in this example.
Figure 4-17 Offset Curb Lines Diagram
5. Lines are placed at 13 ft offsets on both sides of the centerline with the current CAD
settings.
6. Type the offset distance of 25 and click on Apply.
Lines are placed at 25 ft offsets on both sides of the centerline with the current CAD settings.
Figure 4-18 Offset Right of Way Lines Diagram
122 COGO
Construct Through Nodes
COG O # CONSTRUCT # THROUG H NODES
ICON:
KEY-IN COMMAND: thrunode
The Construct Through Nodes command allows you to place lines, arcs or complex objects through
selected Nodes. The options that are available to be used to construct objects through Nodes are Line
by Start and End Points; Curve by Start, Point of Intersection, End; Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End;
Curve by Start, Radius Point, End; and Curve by Start, Radius Length, End. You can enter or
graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for these locations.
page 5.
You can specify a range through which to construct a simple line or a complex object by selecting the
Range option. This will construct a line through each Node ID within the range consecutively.
Figure 4-19 Construct Through Nodes Dialog Box
Construct Through Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select a Node ID or Northing and Easting coordinates from the CAD
graphic.
Choose Nodes Select the option for entering or selecting Node IDs or coordinates to construct lines, arcs or
and Options to complex objects through. The available options are: Line by Start and End Points; Curve by
Draw Through Start, Point of Intersection, End; Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End; Curve by Start, Radius
Point, End; Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
If the option is set to line, you will need to enter or graphically select two points.
If the option is set to a curve option containing Point of Intersection, Point on Curve or Radius
Point, you need to enter or graphically select three points.
If the option is set to Radius Length for the curve option, you need to enter or select two points
graphically, enter a radius length and specify if the direction of the curve is clockwise or
counterclockwise.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the icon or the word to change the direction
Counterclockwise of the curve. This is only available if the construction option is set to Curve by Start, Radius
Point, End, or Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
Radius This is the radius length of the curve. This will only be available if the construction option is set
to Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
Node ID This allows you to enter or graphically select an existing Node. You can select it for the start of
line, end of line, start of curve, point of intersection, point on curve, radius point and end of
curve.

Construct Through Nodes Dialog Box Definitions
Northing/Easting This allows you to enter or graphically select the Northing and Easting coordinates. You can
select them for the start of line, end of line, start of curve, point of intersection, point on curve,
radius point and end of curve.
Elevation This displays the elevation for the Node ID or coordinate location that was selected. You can
accept this value or change it.
Range This allows you to enter a starting Node ID and an Ending Node ID to construct a simple or
complex line through. This draws the lines through each Node in order.
Line Type This allows you to select which type of objects can be constructed through the Nodes. The
available options are Simple, Complex 2D, Complex 2D at zero elevation, and Complex 3D.
" Simple: This will construct individual segments between the Nodes at the elevations
specified.
" Complex 2D: This will construct a two-dimensional polyline/complex chain. The
complex object will be constructed at the elevation of the first Node or point selected.
" Complex 2D at zero elevation: This option allows you to force the elevation of the
constructed line/arc to an elevation of zero, regardless of the elevation of the first
Node/point selected. The resulting line will be drawn as a polyline/complex chain at
zero elevation.
" Complex 3D: This will construct a three-dimensional polyline/complex chain. The
complex object will inherit the elevations specified by the Nodes or points that were
used.
QuickSteps
To construct a simple object through Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Through Nodes.
2. Set the Construction Option to Line by Start and End Points.
3. Click in one of the edit fields in the Start of Line column. Enter or graphically select the Node
ID or coordinates for the start of the line. Enter the desired Elevation.
on page 5.
4. Click in one of the edit fields in the End of Line column. Enter or graphically select the Node
ID or coordinates for the end of the line. Enter the desired Elevation.
on page 5.
5. Set the Line Type drop list to be simple and click on Apply.
This draws a line through the two points that you have defined and advances the information from
the End of Line column to the Start of Line column.
6. Set the Construction Option to Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End.
This changes the heading on the middle column to P.O.C. and the last column to End of Curve.
7. Click in one of the edit fields in the P.O.C. column. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or
coordinates for the point on the curve. Enter the desired elevation.
on page 5.
8. Click in one of the edit fields in the End of Curve column. Enter or graphically select the
Node ID or coordinates for the end of the curve. Enter the desired elevation.
on page 5.
9. Click on Apply.
This draws a curve through the points that you have defined and advances the information from the
End of Curve column to the Start of Curve column.
124 COGO
10. If you want to continue, follow the steps just listed. If you are finished constructing the
simple object, click on Close.
Example
This diagram shows a portion of a boundary survey on a cul-de-sac.
Figure 4-20 Construct Through Nodes Diagram
To construct simple lines and arcs through these Nodes, complete the following steps with the
Construct Through Nodes command:
1. Select Construct ! Through Nodes.
2. Set the Construct Option to be Line by Start and End Point.
3. Enter the Node ID of 12 in the Start of Line Node ID edit field.
4. Enter the Node ID of 11 in the End of Line Node ID edit field.
5. Set the Type of Line to be Simple and click on Apply.
6. Enter the Node ID of 22 in the End of Line Node ID edit field and click on Apply.
9. Set the Construction Option to be Curve by Start, Radius Point, End.
10. Click in the Northing edit field in the Radius Point column and click on the PIC button. You
will be prompted in CAD to pick a point. Graphically select the RP point that is above and
between Nodes 66 and 68.
11. Enter the Node ID of 66 in the End of Curve Node ID edit field and click on Apply.
12. Click in the Northing edit field in the Radius Point column and click on the PIC button. You
will be prompted in CAD to pick a point. Graphically select the RP point that is below and
between Nodes 12 and 66.
13. Enter the Node ID of 12 in the End of Curve Node ID edit field and click on Apply.
14. Click on Close when you are finished.

Construct Best Fit Curve
COG O # CONSTRUCT # BEST FIT CURVE
KEY-IN COMMAND: fitcurve

The Construct Best Fit Curve command allows you to select a group of Nodes numerically or
graphically through which a best fit horizontal curve is placed. You may want to establish an arc
segment using the raw surveyed points of a centerline, edge of pavement or property line.
For more information about the selection of Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
A least squares iteration is used to produce the best fit horizontal curve. The results of the best fit curve
display before the curve is constructed. The information displayed is the coordinates for the PC
(beginning of curve), PT (ending of curve) and RP (radius point) and the number of Nodes/points used
for the best fit curve.
Radial lines from the center of the circle through the points and extending to the curve determines
where the curve is trimmed. The arc with the largest central angle between these radial lines subtends
is trimmed.
QuickSteps
To construct a best fit curve through Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Best Fit Curve.
2. Select the Nodes or points that you want included. Click on Next.
For more information about the selection of Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page
7.
The results of the best fit curve display. The information that displays includes the coordinates for
the PC (beginning of curve), PT (ending of curve), RP (radius point), and how many Nodes/points
have been selected.
3. Click on Apply to place the best fit curve. If you want to construct another best fit curve,
click on the Repeat button.
Example
Following is an example of how to draw a best fit curve through a series of Nodes.
1. Select Construct ! Best Fit Curve.
2. Toggle on the Select option for the selection method.
For this example, the selection method of All is used. This selection method will select all of the
Nodes in the current project.
126 COGO
3. Click on Apply to select the Nodes. Click on Next.
Figure 4-21 Selected Nodes for Best Fit Curve Diagram
4. Click on Apply to place the best fit curve for the Nodes selected.
COGO draws a best fit curve through the Nodes that were selected.
Figure 4-22 Best Fit Curve Placed Diagram
Construct Curve Tangent
COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVE TANG ENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: curvetan

The Construct Curve Tangent command allows you to place a curve at the end of a line, arc, spiral or
complex object that is tangent to the selected object.
Select the object to which you want to place a curve tangent. Enter the degree of curve or the radius
length. You can select from various options to define the radius length. Enter the direction of the curve
(clockwise or counterclockwise). Enter an additional curve parameter for one of the following: Delta
Angle, Tangent Length, Length of Curve, Length of Chord, External or Middle Ordinate. Select which
Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID that will be assigned to them. If you want to change
any of the parameters for the Nodes, click on the Curve Node Options button. The curve is placed when
you click on Apply. You also have the option to repeat the command.
For more information on the Degree of Curve or the Radius Length parameters, see Curves on page 3.
information on curve parameters, see Curves on page 3. For more information on the Nodes you can
place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For more information on the curve Node
options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.

QuickSteps
To construct a curve tangent to a selected object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Curve Tangent.
2. Select the object near the end of which you want to construct a curve tangent. Click on Next.
3. Enter the Degree of Curve (arc or chord definition) or the Radius Length. You can select
from various options to define the radius length. Select the direction of the curve (clockwise
or counterclockwise) and click on Next.
4. Enter the Delta Angle, Tangent Length, Length of Curve, Length of Chord, External or Middle
Ordinate. Click on Next.
5. Toggle on the locations where you want to place a Node and enter the Node ID for the
location.
Options button.
7. Click on Apply to place the curve and Nodes. If you want to repeat the command and
construct a new curve, click on the Repeat button.
Example
This example constructs a curve tangent to a line.
1. Select Construct ! Curve Tangent.
2. Select the line near the end that you want to construct a curve from and click on Next.
3. Enter the Radius of 100 feet, set the curve direction to clockwise and click on Next.
4. Enter 100 for the Length of Curve. Click on Next.
5. Toggle off all of the curve Nodes since no Nodes are desired for the curve. Click on Apply. If
you want to repeat the command, click on the Repeat button.
This diagram shows the resulting curve that was constructed tangent to the line selected.
Figure 4-23 Construct Curve Tangent Diagram
128 COGO
Construct Inscribed Curve
COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # INSCRIBED CURVE
KEY-IN COMMAND: inscribec

The Construct Inscribed Curve command allows you to place a curve between two tangents. The
tangent lines do not have to be present for this command, but you do have to establish the directions of
the back tangent and forward tangent from the PI (Point of Intersection). You can also hold a key point
for the curve to use. The available key points that can be used are Point of Curvature (PC), Point of
Tangency (PT), Radius Point (RP) and Point on Curve (POC). This command can be useful to fit a
horizontal design curve into a surveyed alignment.
Enter or graphically select the location of the PI and enter the direction of the back and forward
tangents. Specify whether to use a key point for the curve. Enter the degree of curve (arc or chord
definition), tangent length, radius, length of curve, length of chord, external or middle ordinate. Select
which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID that will be assigned to them. If you want to
change any of the parameters for the Nodes, click on the Curve Node Options button. The curve is
placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to repeat the command.
more information on the curve parameters, see Curves on page 3.
page 14.
Figure 4-24 Inscribed Curve Dialog Box
Inscribed Curve Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select a Node ID or Northing and Easting coordinates from the CAD
graphic.
Use Key Point Toggle this on if you want the inscribed curve to use a key point. The available options are Point of
on Curve Curvature (PC), Point of Tangency (PT), Radius Point (RP) and Point on Curve (POC).
Node ID This will be enabled when the Use Key Point on Curve option is toggled on. This allows you to
enter or graphically select the location of the key point.
Northing This will be enabled when the Use Key Point on Curve option is toggled on. This allows you to
enter or graphically select the coordinate of the key point.
Easting This will be enabled when the Use Key Point on Curve option is toggled on. This allows you to
enter or graphically select the coordinate of the key point.

QuickSteps
To construct an inscribed curve, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Inscribed Curve.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PI of the curve. Click on Next.
on page 5.
For more information on the available options to define the direction of the back tangent, see
4. Enter the direction of the forward tangent of the curve. Click on Next.
For more information on direction options for the forward tangent, see COGO Direction Dialog Box
on page 9.
5. Toggle on Use Key Point on Curve if you want to use a key point for the curve. If you toggle
this on, set the key point drop list and enter or select the location for the key point. Click on
Next.
on page 5.
6. Enter the degree of curve (arc or chord definition), tangent length, radius, length of curve,
length of chord, external or middle ordinate. Click on Next.
For more information on these parameters, see Curves on page 3.
location.
Options button.
inscribe another curve, click on the Repeat button.
Example
The Construct Inscribed Curve command is used to place a curve at the PI when both tangent
directions are known. This example shows the inscribed curve along a traversed alignment.
1. Select Construct ! Inscribed Curve.
130 COGO
2. Select the PI location as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4-25 Select PI Point Diagram
3. Establish the known back tangent and forward tangent directions.

For more information on defining directions, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
4. Toggle on the Use Key Point option, select Point on Curve from the drop list and enter or
select the POC.
on page 5.
Figure 4-26 Select Key Point Diagram
5. Enter the Degree of Curve (Arc) for the curve.
location.
Options button.
inscribe a new curve, click on the Repeat button.
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves

COG O # CONSTRUCT # CURVES # INSCRIBED REVERSE CURVES
KEY-IN COMMAND: inscriberc

The Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves command allows you to place a reverse curve between two
parallel lines. You can create the reverse curves by their radius, degree of curve, transition length or by
end point. This command can be useful when laying out a subdivision or to place the geometry for a
passing lane.

Select the first and second parallel lines to construct the reverse curves between. Enter or graphically
select the location on the first parallel line selected from which to start the reverse curves. Choose how
you want to define the reverse curves and the direction of the curve. Depending on the option selected,
you will need to enter the radius for the two curves, degree of curve for the two curves, length to
transition the curves between, or the ending location of the curves. Select the direction of the first curve
(clockwise or counterclockwise), which Nodes you want to place for the curve and the ID that will be
assigned to them. You may change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking on the Curve Node
Options button. The curve is placed when you click on Apply. Select the segments that you want to trim.
You also have the option to repeat the command.
page 5. For more information on the Nodes you can place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box
on page 14. For more information on the curve Node options, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog
Box on page 14.
Figure 4-27 Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves Dialog Box
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves Dialog Box Definitions

Define Reverse Toggle this on if you want to define the two curves by entering the length of the radius. When Next
Curve by is selected on this dialog box, you will be prompted for the radius of the first curve and then the
Radius radius of the second curve. The first curve will be placed from the first parallel line selected at the
direction specified.
Define Reverse Toggle this on if you want to define the two curves by the degree of curve (arc or chord definition).
Curve by When Next is selected on this dialog box, you will be prompted for the degree of curve for the two
Degree of curves. The first curve will be placed from the first parallel line selected at the direction specified.
Curve
Define Reverse Toggle this on if you want to define the two curves by a transition length. This is the length from
Curve by the start of the first curve to the end of the second curve. When Next is selected on this dialog box,
Transition you will be prompted to enter the transition length. The first curve will be placed from the first
Length parallel line selected at the direction specified.
Define Reverse Toggle this on if you want to define the two curves by entering or selecting a location for the
Curve by End second curve to end at. When Next is selected on this dialog box, you will be prompted for the
Point location of the ending point of the second curve. The first curve will be placed from the first parallel
line selected at the direction specified.
First Curve This is the direction that the first curve will be constructed in. The available options are clockwise
Direction and counterclockwise.
Offset Between This displays the distance between the two parallel lines that were selected to inscribe the reverse
Lines curves between.
QuickSteps
To construct inscribed reverse curves, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Inscribed Reverse Curves.
132 COGO
2. Select the first of two lines between which you want to inscribe the reverse curves. Click on
Next.
3. Select the second of two lines between which you want to inscribe the reverse curves. Click
on Next.
4. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the starting point of the reverse
curves. Click on Next.
This point must lie on the first line that was selected in step 2.
on page 5.
5. Select the desired option to define the reverse curves. The available options are by radius,
degree of curve, transition length and end point. Select the direction for the first curve and
click on Next.
6. Depending on the option selected in step 5, you will need to enter the radius for the two
curves, degree of curve for the two curves, length within which to transition the curves, or
the ending location of the curves. Click on Next after entering the required information.
location.
The available locations are Point of Curvature (PC), Curve 1 Radius Point (RP), Point of Reverse
Curvature (PRC), Curve 2 Radius Point (RP) and Point of Tangency (PT).
Options button.
9. Click on Apply to place the curve and Nodes. You will be prompted to specify whether you
want to trim the objects. If you select No, the command finishes. If you choose to trim the
objects, you will be prompted to select the segments you want to remove. Select the
segments that you want to remove and click on Next.
10. If you want to repeat the command and inscribe more reverse curves, click on the Repeat
button.
Example
In this example, reverse curves are inscribed between two parallel lines for the layout of a turning lane.
The figure below shows two parallel lines that were selected to inscribe reverse curves between.
Figure 4-28 Select Two Line Segments Diagram
1. Select the first parallel line to start the reverse curves from as shown in the figure above.
Click on Next.
2. Select the second parallel line that the reverse curves will end at as shown in the figure
above. Click on Next.

3. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the starting point of the reverse
curve. This point must lie on the first line that was selected in step 2. Click on Next.
4. Select transition length and clockwise for the first curve direction. Click on Next.
Figure 4-29 Enter Transition Length Diagram
5. Enter the transition length of 100 feet. Click on Next.

6. Select Yes to trim the segments. Graphically select the segments to be trimmed and click on
Next.
7. Place Nodes at the PC, PT and PRC (point of reverse curvature).
Figure 4-30 Place Reverse Curve Nodes Diagram
Construct Spiral Tangent

COG O # CONSTRUCT # S PIRAL TANG ENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: spiraltan

The Construct Spiral Tangent command allows you to place a transitional spiral at the end of a line, arc,
spiral or complex object that is tangent to the selected object. Select the object to which you want to
place a spiral tangent. Enter the Degree of Curve or the Radius Length for the end of the spiral. You can
select from various options to define the radius length. Enter the direction of the curve (clockwise or
counterclockwise) and the length for the spiral. Select which Nodes you want to place for the spiral and
the ID that will be assigned to them. You can place Nodes for the Tangent to Spiral (TS), Spiral to Curve
(SC) and the Point of Intersection (PI).
You can change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking on the Spiral Node Options button.
The spiral is placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to repeat the command.
For more information on the degree of curve or the radius length parameters, see Curves on page 3.
information on the Nodes you can place, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For
QuickSteps
To construct a spiral tangent to a selected object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Spiral Tangent.
2. Select the object near the end to which you want to construct a spiral tangent. Click on Next.
134 COGO
3. Enter the Degree of Curve (arc or chord definition) or the Radius Length. You can select
from various options to define the radius length. Select the direction of the curve (clockwise
or counterclockwise) and click on Next.
4. Enter the length of the spiral and click on Next.
location.
The available locations are Tangent to Spiral (TS), Spiral to Curve (CS) and Point of Intersection
(PI).
6. If you want to change any of the Node options for the locations, click on the Spiral Node
Options button.
7. Click on Apply to place the spiral and Nodes. If you want to repeat the command and
construct a new spiral, click on the Repeat button.
Example
This example constructs a spiral tangent to a line.
1. Select Construct ! Spiral Tangent.
2. Select the line near the end that you want to construct a transitional spiral from and click on
Next.
3. Enter the Radius of 100 feet. This will be the radius at the end of the spiral or the radius of
the curve. Click on Next.
4. Enter the spiral length of 100 feet. This will create a 100-foot transitional spiral. Click on
Next.
5. Toggle off all of the spiral Nodes since no Nodes are desired for the spiral. Click on Apply. If
you want to repeat the command, click on the Repeat button.
The figure below shows the resulting transitional spiral that was constructed tangent to the line
selected.
Figure 4-31 Construct Spiral Tangent Diagram

Construct Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral
COG O # CONSTRUCT # INSCRIBED SPIRAL-CURVE-SPIRAL
KEY-IN COMMAND: inscribescs

The Construct Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral command allows you to place a transitional spiral on both
tangents and a circular curve between the two spirals. The tangent lines do not have to be present for
this command, but you do have to establish the directions of the back tangent and forward tangent from
the PI (Point of Intersection) point.
Enter or graphically select the location of the PI. Enter the direction of the back and forward tangents.
Enter the degree of curve (arc or chord definition) or radius for the curve and the length of the spirals.
Select which Nodes you want to place for the spirals and curve and the ID that will be assigned to them.
You may change any of the parameters for the Nodes by clicking on the Node Options button. The
curve and spirals are placed when you click on Apply. You also have the option to repeat the command.
page 5. For more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
page 14.
QuickSteps
To construct an inscribed spiral-curve-spiral, complete the following steps:
1. Select Construct ! Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral.
2. Enter or graphically select the Node ID or coordinates for the PI. Click on Next.
on page 5.
3. Enter the direction of the back tangent. Click on Next.
For more information on available options to define the direction of the back tangent, see COGO
4. Enter the direction of the forward tangent. Click on Next.
For more information on the available options to define the direction of the tangent, see COGO
5. Enter the Degree of Curve (arc or chord definition) or Radius for the curve. Click on Next.
For more information on these parameters, see Curves on page 3.
6. Enter the Length of Spiral for the two spirals. Click on Next.
location.
The available locations are Tangent to Spiral (TS), Spiral to Curve (SC), Radius Point (RP), Curve
to Spiral (CS) and Spiral to Tangent (ST).
8. If you want to change any of the Node options for the locations, click on the Node Options
button.
136 COGO
9. Click on Apply to place the spirals, curve and Nodes. If you want to repeat the command and
inscribe another spiral-curve-spiral, click on the Repeat button.
Example
The Construct Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral command is used to place a spiral-curve-spiral at the PI
when both tangent directions are known. This example shows the inscribed spiral-curve-spiral along a
traversed alignment.
1. Select Construct ! Spiral-Curve-Spiral.
2. Select the PI location as shown in the figure below.
on page 5.
Figure 4-32 Select PI Point Diagram
3. Establish the known back tangent and forward tangent directions as shown in the figure
above.
4. Enter the Degree of Curve (Arc) for the curve.
5. Enter the length for the two spirals.
6. Toggle on the Spiral to Curve (SC) and Spiral to Tangent (ST) options.
7. If you want to change any of the Node options for the locations, click on the Node Options
button.
8. Click on Apply to place the spirals, curve and Nodes. If you want to repeat the command and
inscribe another spiral-curve-spiral, click on the Repeat button.
Figure 4-33 Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral

138 COGO
INTERSECT
The Intersect commands allow you to establish Nodes or locations based
on existing Nodes or locations using directions, offsets, distances,
CHAPTER
stationing and turned angles.
In this chapter:
Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Intersect Distance-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5
Intersect Direction-Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Intersect 3-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 5: Intersect 139

Intersect Direction-Direction
COG O # INTERSECT # DIRECTION-DIRECTION
KEY-IN COMMAND: dirdir
ICON:
The Intersect Direction-Direction command allows you to select two known points to use as a base for
the directions. The direction may be determined by specifying a direction point, two points, bearing,
azimuth, geometric or a backsight and a turned angle. The directions may also be offset at a horizontal
distance so that a known base line may be used, even though the base line does not intersect the point
being calculated. The offset may be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by a distance to a
point, distance between two points or a slope distance from the established point.
See COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9 for more information on direction options. See COGO
Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information on distance options.
You have the option to draw lines to the intersection, place a Node at the intersection or print an audit
trail.
! If one or both of the directions points away from the intersection point, an intersection will be calculated
by reversing the direction of one or both direction points.
QuickSteps
To find the intersection of two directions, complete the following steps:
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Direction.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, choose whether to print an audit trail and what objects to
place in the project.
See COGO Settings Dialog Box on page 15 for more information.
3. Click on Next.
4. Select the first point by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button and graphically select a
Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab key to move your
cursor to the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a point in the CAD
graphic.
5. Click on Next to enter the first direction.
6. Click in the Direction edit field and type a direction. Click on the PIC button and select a line
segment to report a direction or use one of the standard COGO methods to determine the
direction.
7. Click on Next and enter the offset distance.
8. Type a negative value to offset the direction to the left, a positive value to offset to the right
or 0.0 for no offset.
9. Click on Next and select the second point.
10. Type a Node ID or click on the PIC button and graphically select a Node from the CAD
graphic. To select a coordinate pair, tab into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button
and select a point in the CAD graphic.
11. Click on Next to enter the second direction.
140 COGO
direction.
15. Click on Next to display the Place Intersection Node dialog box.
16. Type the desired Node ID value and click on Apply to place the Node.
Example
In this example, two control points and two directions are known. The Intersect Direction-Direction
command is used to find the intersection of the two directions.
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Direction.
3. Click on Next.
Figure 5-1 Intersect Direction-Direction Example
4. Select the starting point for the first direction. In this example, the control point 2052 was
Chapter 5: Intersect
used as the first direction start point. Type 2052 in the Node ID edit field.
6. Select Direction Point from the Options drop list to define the direction to Lot Corner 112.
Type 112 in the Node ID edit field.
In this example, a negative offset distance was entered.
8. Click on Next and select the second point for the second direction.
In this example, the control point 2056 was used as the second point.
9. Click on Next to enter the second direction.
10. Select Direction Point from the Options drop list to define the direction to control point
2020. Type 2020 in the Node ID edit field.

12. In this example, an offset will not be used from the second line. Type 0.0 as an offset
distance.
Figure 5-2 Intersection Direction-Direction Example
13. Click on Next to display the place intersection Node dialog box.
Intersect Direction-Distance
COG O # INTERSECT # DIRECTION-DISTANCE
KEY-IN COMMAND: dirdist
ICON:
The Intersect Direction-Distance command allows you to select two known points to use as control
points. The direction is established from the first point, and distance is established from the second
point. The direction may be determined by specifying a direction point, two points, bearing, azimuth,
geometric or a backsight and a turned angle. The direction may also be offset at a horizontal distance
so that a known base line may be used, even though the base line does not intersect the point being
calculated. The offset may be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by a distance to a point,
distance between two points, or a slope distance from the established point. The distance from the
second point may also be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by a distance to a point,
distance between two points or a slope distance from the established point.
Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information on distance options.
trail.
Figure 5-3 Intersect Direction-Distance Dialog Box
142 COGO
Intersect Direction-Distance Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to graphically select the intersection location. This is only available when the
Select Intersection Point Graphically option is selected.
North, East, Select the direction of the desired intersection. For example: if you have two possible intersections
South, West and the desired intersection is located North of the other intersection, click on the North button.
Both To identify both intersections with a line and/or Node, click on the Both button.
Select To select the intersection graphically, click on this button, click on the PIC button and select a point
Intersection near the desired intersection in the CAD graphic.
Point
Graphically
QuickSteps
To find the intersection of a direction and a distance, complete the following steps:
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Distance.
3. Click on Next.
4. Select the direction start point by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button and graphically
select a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab key to move
your cursor to the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a point in the CAD
graphic.
5. Click on Next to enter the direction.
direction.
9. Click on Next and select the second point.
10. Type a Node ID or click on the PIC button and graphically select a Node from the CAD
graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab key to move your cursor into the Northing
edit field, click on the PIC button and select a point in the CAD graphic.
11. Click on Next to enter a distance from the second point.
12. Click on the Distance edit field and type a horizontal distance, click on the PIC button and
select a line segment to report a distance or use one of the standard COGO methods to
determine the direction.
13. Click on Next to select the correct intersection.
14. The CAD graphic will display a direction line that crosses a circle. The intersection may be
selected as being the North, East, South or West crossing of the circle and the line, as Both
crossings or you may graphically select the intersection. If you are selecting the
intersection graphically, click on the PIC button and select the correct intersection.
15. Click on Next to display the place intersection Node(s) dialog box.

16. Click on the Intersection Node Options button to display the Intersection Node Options
dialog box. You may change the Node ID, elevation, Field Code and description of each
Node placed.
See COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14 for more information.
17. Click on Apply to make changes to each Node and click on OK when you are finished
making changes.
18. Place the intersection Nodes. Check the Nodes that you want placed. Set the Node IDs to the
desired values and click on Apply to place the Nodes.
Example
In this example, two control points, a direction and a distance are known. the Intersect Direction-
Distance command is used to find the intersection of the direction and distance.
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Distance.
3. Click on Next.
Figure 5-4 Intersect Direction-Distance Example
4. Select the direction start point. In this example, the control point 2052 was used as the
direction start point. Type 2052 in the Node ID edit field.
6. Select Direction Point from the Options drop list to define the direction to lot corner 112.
7. Click on Next and enter the offset distance. In this example, no offset is desired. Type 0.0 in
the Offset edit field.
8. Click on Next and select the distance start point. In this example, the control point 2056 was
used as the distance start point. Type 2056 in the Node ID edit field.
See COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information on distance options.
10. Enter a distance from the second point.
144 COGO
12. The CAD graphic will display a direction line that crosses a circle. The intersection may be
selected as being the North, East, South, West crossing of the circle and the line, as Both
intersection graphically, click on the PIC button and select the correct intersection. In this
example, intersection selected was the “South” intersection.
Figure 5-5 Place Intersection Node Example
13. Click on Next to display the Place Intersection Node(s) dialog box.
14. Check the Nodes that you want placed.
dialog box.
16. You may change the Node ID, elevation, Field Code and description of each Node(s) placed.
making changes.
18. Set the Node IDs to the desired values and click on Apply to place the Nodes.
Intersect Distance-Distance
COG O # INTERSECT # DISTANCE-DISTANCE
KEY-IN COMMAND: distdist

The Intersect Distance-Distance command allows you to select two known points to use as control
points for two known distances. The distances may be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by
a distance to a point, distance between two points or a slope distance from the established point.
See COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
trail.
QuickSteps
To find the intersection of two distances for known points, complete the following steps:
1. Select Intersect ! Distance-Distance.

3. Click on Next.
4. Enter the first point by typing a Node ID or clicking on the PIC button and graphically select
a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab key to move your
cursor into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a point in the CAD
graphic.
5. Click on Next to enter a distance from the first point.
6. Click in the Distance edit field and type a distance, click on the PIC button and select a line
segment to report a distance or use one of the standard COGO methods to determine the
direction.
7. Click on Next to enter the second point.
8. Enter the second point by typing a Node ID or clicking on the PIC button and graphically
select a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab key to move
your cursor into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a point in the CAD
graphic.
10. Click on the Distance edit field and type a distance, click on the PIC button and select a line
segment to report a distance or use one of the standard COGO methods to determine the
direction.
12. The CAD graphic will display two circles that should cross in two locations. The intersection
may be selected as being the North, East, South, West crossing of both circles, as Both
dialog box.
15. You may change the Node ID, elevation, Field Code and description of each Node placed.
making changes.
17. Place intersection Nodes. Check the Nodes that you want placed. Set the Node IDs to the
desired values and click on Apply to place the Nodes.
146 COGO
Example
In this example, two control points and two distances from those control points are known. The Intersect
Distance-Distance command is used to find the intersection.
Figure 5-6 Intersect Distance-Distance Example
1. Select Intersect ! Distance-Distance.

when it displays.
3. Click on Next.
4. Select the first point. In this example, the control point 2052 was used. Type 2052 in the
Node ID edit field.
5. Click on Next to enter a distance from the first point.
See COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information on distance options.
6. Click on Next to enter the second point.
7. Select the second point. In this example, the control point of 2056 was used. Type 2056 in
the Node ID edit field.

10. The CAD graphic will display two circles that should cross in two locations. The intersection
may be selected as being the North, East, South, West crossing of both circles, Both
crossings, or you may graphically select the intersection. If you are selecting the
12. Check the Nodes that you want placed.
13. Set the Node IDs to the desired values.
dialog box.
making changes.
17. Click on Apply to place the intersection Node(s).
Intersect Direction-Station
COG O # INTERSECT # DIRECTION -S TATION
KEY-IN COMMAND: dirsta

The Intersect Direction-Station command allows you to select a known point and a known station value
on an alignment to use as control points for a Direction-Direction Intersection. The direction from the
point may be determined by specifying a direction point, two points, bearing, azimuth, geometric or a
backsight and a turned angle. The direction may also be offset at a horizontal distance so that a known
base line may be used, even though the base line does not intersect the point being calculated. This
offset may be determined by typing a horizontal distance or by a distance to a point, distance between
two points or a slope distance from the established point.
Distance Dialog Box on page 11 for more information on distance options. See COGO Pick Point Dialog
Box on page 5 for more information on selecting a point.
You may select an alignment from the alignment list or select one from the CAD graphic. An
intersecting station and an angle from that station are entered. An offset to the angled line going
through the specified station can be entered with the same options as just described. The intersection
of the two resulting lines is calculated.
148 COGO
trail.
Figure 5-8 Intersection Direction-Station Dialog Box
Intersection Direction-Station Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Intersecting Type the station value or the distance along the selected object to turn an intersecting angle from.
Station
Angle Select one of the four angles from the drop list and type the angle. The angle is measured by looking
backstation and turning the desired angle.
" Angle Right
" Angle Left
" Deflection Right
" Deflection Left
QuickSteps
To find the intersection between a direction and a turned angle at a station, complete the following
steps:
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Station.
3. Click on Next.
4. Select the start point for the direction by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button and
graphically select a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab
key to move your cursor into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a
point in the CAD graphic.
5. Click on Next to enter the direction from the point.
6. Click in the Direction edit field and type a direction, click on the PIC button and select a line
direction.
8. Type a negative value to offset the direction in the left, a positive value to offset to the right
9. Click on Next to select the alignment or object to reference the stationing from.

10. Highlight an existing alignment from the list of defined alignments; or click on the PIC
button and select a line, arc, spiral, polyline (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or complex chain
(MicroStation) on which to base the stationing.
11. Click on Next to enter the intersecting station and angle.
12. Click on the Intersection Station edit field and type the distance/station along the selected
object/alignment to turn an intersecting angle.
13. Select the angle type from the drop list and type the angle turned from the distance/station
location.
16. Click on Next to place the intersection Node.
Example
In this example, two control points define a direction; a station and an angle are known. The Intersect
Direction-Station command is used to find the intersection location.
1. Select Intersect ! Direction-Station.
2. When the Settings dialog box displays, choose whether to print an audit trail and what
objects to place in the project.
3. Click on Next.
Figure 5-9 Intersect Direction-Station Example
4. Select the start point for the direction. In this example, the Lot Corner 211 was used as the
direction start point. Type 211 in the Node ID edit field.
5. Click on Next to enter the direction from the point.
6. Select Direction Point from the Options drop list to define the direction to Lot Corner 212.
7. Click on Next to enter the offset distance. In this example, no offset is desired. Type 0.0 in
8. Click on Next to select the alignment or object from which to reference the stationing. In this
example, an alignment was selected graphically. Click on the PIC button and graphically
select the alignment.
150 COGO
9. Click on Next to enter the intersecting station and angle.
Figure 5-10 Turn Angle from Station 1 + 450 and Place Intersection Node
10. Click in the Intersection Station edit field and type the distance/station along the selected
object/alignment to turn an intersecting angle. In this example, the intersecting station is
1450. Type 1450 in the Intersecting Station edit field.
11. Select the angle type from the drop list and type the angle turned from the distance/station
location. In this example, the angle turned was a deflection left of 32°40'10". Select
Deflection Left from the drop list and type 32.4010 in the edit field.
12. Click on Next to enter the offset distance. In this example, no offset is desired. Type 0.0 in
13. Click on Next to place the intersection Node.
Intersect 3-D Lines

COG O # INTERSECT # 3-D LINES
KEY-IN COMMAND: 3dline

The Intersect 3-D lines command allows you to select the endpoints of two 3-D lines to calculate the
horizontal intersection. Node IDs from the CAD graphic or the database may also be selected to find an
intersection.
You may choose to place a Node at the elevation projected by the first 3-D line, second
3-D line or the average of the two at the calculated horizontal intersection.
You have the option to place a Node at the intersection and print an audit trail.
! No lines are drawn with this command.
QuickSteps
To find the 3-D intersection between two lines, complete the following steps:
1. Select Intersect ! 3-D Lines.
3. Click on Next.

4. Select the first endpoint of the first line by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button and
graphically select a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the Tab
key to move your cursor into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a
See COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5 for more information.
5. Click on Next to enter the second endpoint of the first line.
6. Select the second endpoint of the first line by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button
and graphically select a Node from the CAD graphic. To select a coordinate pair, press the
Tab key to move your cursor into the Northing edit field, click on the PIC button and select a
7. Click on Next to enter the first endpoint of the second line.
8. Select the first endpoint of the second line by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button
9. Click on Next to enter the second endpoint of the second line.
10. Select the second endpoint of the second line by typing a Node ID or click on the PIC button
11. Click on Next to display the Place Intersection Node dialog box.
12. Toggle on the Nodes that you want placed.
dialog box.
making changes.
Example
In this example, the 3-D intersection will be calculated from the extension of the lines.
1. Select Intersect ! 3-D Lines.
2. If the Settings dialog box displays, specify whether to print an audit trail and what objects to
152 COGO
3. Click on Next.
Figure 5-11 Intersect 3-D Lines Example
4. Select the first endpoint of the first line. In this example, the endpoint of the first line that
was snapped to had an elevation of 100.021.
See COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5 for more information.
5. Click on Next to enter the second endpoint of the first line.
6. Select the second endpoint of the first line. In this example, the second endpoint of the first
line that was snapped to had an elevation of 102.714.
7. Click on Next to enter the first endpoint of the second line.
8. Select the first endpoint of the second line. In this example, the first endpoint of the second
line that was snapped to had an elevation of 109.217.
9. Click on Next to enter the second endpoint of the second line.
10. Select the second endpoint of the second line. In this example, the second endpoint of the
second line that was snapped to had an elevation of 104.521.
12. Toggle on the Nodes that you want placed.

dialog box.
making changes.

154 COGO
LAYOUT
Once the survey data has been entered and the control points have been
established for the project, the Layout menu contains tools for laying out
CHAPTER
lots by area, road intersections, parking lots and cul-de-sacs. You can also
layout alignments and lots using this menu.
In this chapter:
Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Manage Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Convert to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Modify Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Create Lot Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Create Lot Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6
Create Mapcheck Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Layout Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Layout Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Layout Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Layout Road Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Layout Linear Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Layout Curved Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Layout Area Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Layout Bulb Cul-de-sac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Layout Offset Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Layout Hammer Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Chapter 6: Layout 155

Convert Objects to Alignment
COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT OBJECTS TO A LIG NM ENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgalign
ICON:
The Convert Objects to Alignment command may be used to convert existing lines, arcs, spirals and
complex objects into an alignment.
Graphically select the CAD objects, specify the correct end to start stationing from, enter the alignment
name, beginning station and any necessary station equations to place an alignment in a project.
An alignment may be used in intersection and station/offset calculations and generating inverse and
stakeout reports. Alignments can also be used for preparation of strip legal descriptions and the
“commencement” portion of legal descriptions. Existing road geometry made up of lines, arcs and spiral
segments may be converted to an alignment graphically and placed in a project database.
! The objects selected to be converted to an alignment must have common endpoints. If there are gaps
between selected objects, not all of the segments will be converted to an alignment. All segments
selected, up to the gap from the starting point, will be converted into the alignment.
Figure 6-1 Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box
Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignment Enter the name of the alignment you are creating. This will be the name that is displayed in the Defined
Alignments dialog box.
Beginning This is the beginning station for the alignment you are creating.
Station
Station Data This allows you to enter station equations for your alignment.
For more information, see Station Data on page 64.
Defined This displays all of the alignments that have been created for the project.
Alignments
QuickSteps
To convert objects into an alignment, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Convert Objects to Alignment.
2. Select lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects to be converted to an alignment. When you
are done selecting objects, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on
your pointing device in MicroStation.
3. Graphically select nearest the end where you want the alignment to start.
156 COGO
4. When the Convert Objects to Alignment dialog box (Figure 6-1 on page 156) displays, enter
the name for the Alignment. If you want to display the names of existing alignments, click on
the Defined Alignments button.
5. Enter the beginning station for the alignment in the Beginning Station edit field. Click on the
Station Data button if you want to enter any station equations for the alignment.
6. Click on Apply to convert all of the selected objects into an alignment.
Example
This is an example of four-line segments that are to be converted into an alignment.
1. Select Layout ! Convert Objects to Alignment.
2. Select the line segments shown in Figure 6-2 below. Press the Enter key in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the Reset button on your printing device in MicroStation once the objects have
been selected.
3. Select nearest the end that you want to start the alignment from as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 6-2 Convert Objects to an Alignment
4. When the Convert Objects to Alignment dialog box (Figure 6-1 on page 156) displays, enter
the name of the alignment in the Alignment edit field.
5. Enter the beginning station for the alignment in the Beginning Station edit field.
6. Click on the Station data button to enter any station equations for the alignment.
7. Click on Apply to convert the objects to an alignment.
Manage Lots
COG O # LAYOUT # M ANAG E LOTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgmanlots

Chapter 6: Layout
The Manage Lots command allows you to add, modify and delete COGO Lots from the current CAD
graphic within a project. It also allows you to show the lot in the CAD graphic, create a lot report and
create a mapcheck report. All of the defined lots or the lots in a specific lot group for the current CAD
graphic file within a project are displayed. The lot information (Name, Description, ID, Owner, Area,
Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent Area and Percent of Parent) for each lot is displayed in the
appropriate columns.
To add a new lot, click on the New Lot icon. The Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-4 on page 160)
displays, allowing you to create a lot by points, by selecting closed objects along a path, selecting
objects graphically, or by Eagle Point Boundary.

For more information, see Convert to Lot on page 159.
To modify a lot, click on the Modify Lot icon. The Modify Lot dialog box (Figure 6-16 on page 170)
displays allowing you to modify the Name, Description, ID, Owner and Parent Name for the highlighted
lot.
For more information, see Modify Lot on page 169.
To delete a lot, click on the Delete Lot icon. You are asked to confirm the deletion of the lot. Once you
confirm the deletion of the lot, the lot is removed from the CAD graphic and the database.
To show the geometry and location of a lot in the CAD graphic, select the Show Lot icon. The lot
selected in the Manage Lots dialog box is highlighted in the CAD graphic.
To create a lot report, select the Create Lot Report button. The Create Lot Reports dialog box (Figure 6-
18 on page 172) displays allowing you to select a lot or group of lots to include in the report.
For more information, see Create Lot Reports on page 172.
To create a mapcheck report, select the Create Mapcheck Report button. The Create Mapcheck
Reports dialog box (Figure 6-19 on page 174) displays allowing you to select a lot or group of lots to
include in the report.
For more information, see Create Mapcheck Reports on page 173.
Figure 6-3 Manage Lots Dialog Box
Manage Lots Dialog Box Definitions

Lot Group This drop list displays the lot groups within the current CAD graphic. There is also an option of
All Lots. When All Lots is selected in the Lot Group drop list, all of the lots defined in the current
CAD graphic are displayed in the list control. When a specific lot group is selected in the Lot
Group drop list, only the lots contained within the lot group are displayed in the list control.
For more information on lot groups, see Create Lot Groups on page 170.
Name This column displays the names that are assigned to the lots.
Description This column displays the descriptions that are assigned to the lots.
ID This column displays the IDs that are assigned to the lots.
Owner This column displays the owners that are assigned to the lots.
Square Feet/ This column displays the area of the lots in square feet when in an English project or square
Square Meters meters when in a metric project.
Acres/Hectares This column displays the area of the lots in acres when in an English project or hectares when in
a metric project.
Perimeter This column displays the perimeter of the lots.
Parent Name This column displays the parent lot names for the lots.
Parent This column displays the parent lot description for the lots.
Description
158 COGO
Manage Lots Dialog Box Definitions
Parent Area This column displays the parent area for the lots in square feet when in an English project and in
(Square Feet/ square meters when in a metric project.
Square Meters)
Parent Area This column displays the parent area for the lots in acres when in an English project and in
(Acres/Hectares) hectares when in a metric project.
Percent of This column displays the percentage the lot is of the parent lot.
Parent
New Lot This allows you to create a new lot using points, objects, or Eagle Point Boundary.
For more information, see Convert to Lot (below).
Modify Lot This icon allows you to modify the Name, Description, ID, Owner and Parent Name for the
highlighted lot.
For more information, see Modify Lot on page 169.
Delete Lot This icon allows you to remove the highlighted lot from the list. The lot is also removed from the
data files and the CAD graphic.
Show Lot Click on this icon to display the geometry and location of the highlighted lot in the CAD graphic.
The lot is displayed as a dashed line.
Create Lot Select this option to create a lot report. The information that can be reported for the lots are
Report Name, Description, ID, Owner, Area, Perimeter, Closure Direction, Closure Distance, Closure
Coordinates, Closure Ratio, Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent Area, and Percentage of
Parent.
For more information, see Create Lot Reports on page 172.
Create Select this option to generate closure reports. A mapcheck of a lot is the inverse of each leg of
Mapcheck the lot from the beginning point to the ending point. This inverse will use mapcheck precision to
Report calculate new coordinate locations from the rounded directions and distances. From these
rounded directions and distances and new coordinates, closure information is calculated for the
lot. The closure information that can be displayed are courses, direction, distance, ratio,
Northing, and Easting.
For more information, see Create Mapcheck Reports on page 173.
PIC This icon allows you to graphically select a lot in the CAD graphic. The selected lot will be
highlighted in the Manage Lots dialog box.
Convert to Lot
COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT TO LOT
KEY-IN COMMAND: conlot
ICON: Chapter 6: Layout

The Convert to Lot command allows you to create a lot in COGO. The converted lots may be used to
determine planimetric area, perimeter, closures and to generate user-definable Summary and
Mapcheck reports. The lots can also be annotated, placed in tables or used to help create legal
descriptions with the Drafting product.
Lots may be created by entering or graphically selecting Node IDs or points, selecting closed objects
along a path, selecting objects in CAD, or selecting an internal point to create a closed boundary within
a user-definable tolerance. Each lot created will have a name, description, ID, owner and parent lot
information associated with it. They may then be sorted and printed out in a user-defined report.
You may create the lot using one of four methods: Points, Closed objects along a path, selecting
objects graphically, or Eagle Point Boundary.

For more information on selecting Nodes or points, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5. For
more information on the Points method, see Convert to Lot – Points Method on page 162. For more
information on the Closed Objects along a path method, see Convert to Lot – Closed Objects Along
Path Method on page 165. For more information on the Objects method, see Convert to Lot – Objects
Method on page 166. For more information on the Eagle Point Boundary method, see Convert to Lot –
Eagle Point Boundary Method on page 168.
Figure 6-4 Convert to Lot Dialog Box
Convert to Lot Dialog Box Definitions

Options Icon Functions
PIC This icon allows you to select an object in the CAD graphic to convert to a lot, select points or an
object that defines a path, or select an internal point and have Eagle Point determine the
boundary, depending on which method is selected. This is not available when the Points method is
selected.
Points Turn on this option if you want to define a lot by entering or graphically selecting Node IDs or
points to define a lot. Click on the Apply button to display the Convert to Lot By Points dialog box
(Figure 6-6 on page 162).
For more information, see Convert to Lot – Points Method on page 162.
Closed Toggle this option on if you want to select points or an object that defines a path. Any closed
Objects objects that cross through this path will be converted to a lot.
(select along
" Select Points for Path: Select this method if you want to select points that define your
path)
path. You can select as many points as needed to define your path. When you are
finished selecting the points, press the Enter key in AutoCAD or the Reset button on
your pointing device in MicroStation.
" Select Existing Path: Select this method if you want to select an existing object in your
CAD graphic that defines your path. The object can be line, arc or polyline/complex
chain/line string.
For more information, see Convert to Lot – Closed Objects Along Path Method on page 165
Objects Toggle this on if you want to select objects to convert into a lot. You can select lines, arcs, spirals
(select and complex objects.
graphically)
For more information, see Convert to Lot – Objects Method on page 166.
Eagle Point Toggle this on if you want to select a point and have the program create the lot from. The program
Boundary will use the objects that enclose an area closest to the point that is selected.
(select
For more information, see Convert to Lot – Eagle Point Boundary Method on page 168.
internal point
near
beginning)
160 COGO
After the Nodes, points, path, objects or internal point have been selected, the Convert to Lot dialog box
(below) displays. This allows you to name the lot, specify the description, ID, owner and a parent lot.
When the apply button is clicked on, the lot will be created and can be used in various commands in
COGO and Drafting.
Figure 6-5 Convert to Lot Dialog Box

Option Function
Lot Name This is the name of the lot. A lot name may not be repeated in a project. If a duplicate name is entered or
if it is left blank, you will be prompted to modify the name of the lot. The <> symbols identify where the lot
number will be placed. Anything before the <> is a prefix to the number and anything after the <> is a
suffix. Once the lot is created, the lot number will automatically increment.
Lot Description This is the description of the lot. If this is left blank, you will be prompted to enter information into the edit
field. If the <> symbols are in this edit field, the number to the right of the Lot Name will be placed in this
location when the lot is created. Anything before the <> is a prefix to the number and anything after the <>
is a suffix.
Lot ID This is the ID value of the lot. This may be used for GIS (Global Information System) applications. This
value is typically an Assessor’s Parcel number or similar number. If this is left blank, you will be prompted
to enter information into the edit field. If the <> symbols are in this edit field, the number to the right of the
Lot Name will be placed in this location when the lot is created. Anything before the <> is a prefix to the
number and anything after the <> is a suffix.
Lot Owner This is the name of the person(s) who owns the lot.
Lot Area This displays the area of the lot in square feet or acres if your are in an English project and square meters
or hectacres if you are in a metric project.
Lot Perimeter This displays the perimeter of the lot in feet in an English project or meters in a metric project.
Parent Name This is the parent to the lot that you are defining. You can select from all of the lots that have been defined
or select none.
Parent This is the description of the lot that is listed in the Parent Name drop list. This will display as None if the
Description Parent Name is set to none.
Parent Area This displays the area of the parent lot that is selected in the Parent Name drop list. The units it is
Chapter 6: Layout
displayed in is square feet or acres if you are in an English project and square meters or hectacres if you
are in a metric project.
Percent of This displays the percent of the total planimetric area of the parent lot that the newly converted lot
Parent occupies.
Annotate Lot Toggle this option on to annotate the lot information when the lot is created. The items that can be
annotated are Name, Description, ID, Owner, Parent Name and Area.
Annotation Style Select the annotation style to use for the lot annotation from the drop list. All annotation styles are
displayed in the drop list.
For more information on annotation styles, see Annotation Styles in the Drafting manual.

Option Function
Convert Lot on Toggle this option on to convert the objects to a lot and automatically name the lot instead of displaying
Pick of Internal this dialog box. The Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) will not display for subsequent lots
Point that are converted when this option is toggled on and the <> symbols are displayed in the Lot Name edit
field.
Convert to Lot – Points Method

COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT TO LOT # BY POINTS
The Convert to Lot command when using the Points method allows you to create a lot by selecting
points or Nodes. The points selected may be actual points on the boundary of the proposed lot or they
may be PI (point of intersection) or RP (radius point) points that further define the region converted.
Using the Points method to create a lot, you can choose between selecting points that define lines or
curves.
! If you are selecting points in CAD, each point after the first point selected is automatically advanced
ahead as the start point. This allows you to continue from the previous point selected.
Figure 6-6 Convert to Lot By Points Dialog Box
Convert to Lot By Points Dialog Box Definitions

Select Points to Select the option for entering or selecting Node IDs or coordinates to construct lines or arcs to
Form Lot be used as the boundary for your lot. The available options are: Line by Start and End Points;
Curve by Start, Point of Intersection, End; Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End; Curve by Start,
Radius Point, End; and Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
counterclockwise.
PIC This icon allows you to select a Node ID or Northing and Easting coordinate pair from the CAD
graphic when focus is in the Node ID or Northing and Easting edit fields, respectively.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the picture or the word to change the
Counterclockwise direction of the curve. This is only available if the construction option is set to Curve by Start,
Radius Point, End, or Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
Line, End of Line, Start of Curve, Point of Intersection, Point on Curve, Radius Point and End
of Curve.
162 COGO
Convert to Lot By Points Dialog Box Definitions
select them for the Start of Line, End of Line, Start of Curve, Point of Intersection, Point on
Curve, Radius Point and End of Curve.
Close Object This allows you to close the object back to the first point that was selected instead of having to
select the same point a second time. There must be at least three points that have been
selected before you can close the object. If there are not three points selected, this option is
disabled.
Name Lot This allows you to give a name to the lot.This requires you to select a point graphically to verify
which lot will be created in case there are some conflicts with the points that were selected.
The Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) displays, allowing you to enter the
name of the lot.
QuickSteps
To create a lot using the Points method, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Convert to Lot.
This displays the Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-4 on page 160).
2. Toggle on Points for the option to create the lot. Click on Apply.
This displays the Convert to Lot By Points dialog box (Figure 6-6 on page 162).
3. Select the option to define the lot from the drop list.
The available options are: Line by Start and End Points; Curve by Start, Point of Intersection, End;
Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End; Curve by Start, Radius Point, End; and Curve by Start, Radius
Length, End.
4. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the lot.
5. Continue selecting Nodes or points until the lot is closed or click on the Close Object button
to close the lot on the starting point.
6. Click on the Name Lot button to assign a name, description, ID, owner and parent lot.
7. Enter a unique name for the lot, description, ID, owner and parent lot. Click on Apply to
define the lot.
8. If you want to create another lot, click on the Repeat button when the Convert Lot on Pick of
Internal Point is not checked. When the option is checked, you are automatically repeating
the command.
Example
This example shows how you might convert an area bounded by Nodes or points on lines in the CAD
graphic to a lot.
Chapter 6: Layout
1. Select the Layout ! Convert to Lot.

2. Turn on the Points radio button and click on Apply.
3. Determine whether the first segment of the area to be converted is a line segment or an arc
segment.

The first segment, as shown in the figure below, is a line segment.
Figure 6-7 Select Start Point
4. Place focus in the Northing edit field in the Start of Line column and click on the PIC button.
Graphically select the location of the start point shown in the figure above.
5. Graphically select the location of the end point of the first line segment as shown in the
figure above. This will define the first line segment for the lot.
6. Continue to graphically select the end points of the line segments in a counterclockwise
direction until you are at the lower left corner of the lot. This is also the location that a curve
will start from. Select the appropriate method to solve for a curve portion based on the
information available in the project.
In the example, a cul-de-sac is approached with a known radius and an available radius point in the
CAD graphic.
7. Change the point option type in the drop list on the dialog box to be Curve by Start, Radius
Point, End and set the curve direction to be clockwise.
Figure 6-8 Define Curve Using Radius Point
8. Graphically select the Radius Point as shown in the figure above.

9. Graphically select the end of the curve as shown in the figure above.
10. On the next curve portion in this example, the only information available to recreate the
curve is to select a point on the curve. Change the point option type in the drop list on the
dialog box to be Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End.
Figure 6-9 Define Curve Using Point on Curve
164 COGO
11. Graphically select the point on curve as shown in Figure 6-9 on page 164.
12. Graphically select the end of curve as shown in Figure 6-9 on page 164.
13. The last segment of the area is a line segment from the end of the curve to the start of the
lot. Click on the Close Object button to close the object back to the starting point.
14. Click on the Name Lot button. You will be prompted to pick a point. Graphically select inside
the lot that was created.
This is done in case there is any conflict with the lot that was created. The Convert to Lot dialog box
(Figure 6-5 on page 161) displays.
15. Enter the Lot Name of Lot <> and set the value to the right to be 1. When the lot is created,
the name will be Lot 1. Enter the Lot Description of By Points. Enter the Lot ID of 123-45-
6789. Enter the Lot Owner of Smith. The rest of the information is optional and for display
purposes. You will not assign this lot to a Parent Lot. Click on Apply to create the lot. You
can click on the Repeat button to create additional lots; however, in this example you will
not. Click on Close to end the command.
Convert to Lot – Closed Objects Along Path Method

COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT TO LOT # CLOSED OBJECTS (SELECT ALONG PATH)
The Convert to Lot command when using the Closed Objects Along Path method allows you to define a
path by selecting points or an existing object. Any closed objects that cross through this path are
converted to a lot. The closed object determines the starting point of the lot and its direction. The path
can be defined by using points or by selecting an object. When using the Select Points for Path option,
you can select as many points as needed to accurately define your path. When using the Select
Existing Path option, you can select a line, arc or polyline/complex chain/linestring to define as the path.
QuickSteps
To create a lot using the Closed Objects Along Path method, complete the following steps:
2. Toggle on Closed Objects (select along path).
3. Choose the Select Existing Path option from the drop list.
4. Click on the PIC button to graphically select the object that defines your path.
5. Enter a unique name with the <> for the lot, description, ID, owner and parent lot. Click on
Apply.
All of the closed polylines/shapes that cross through the defined path will be converted to lots.
6. If you want to create another lot, click on the Repeat button. Chapter 6: Layout
Example
To convert a lot by selecting a defined path, select the Convert to Lot command, toggle on the Closed
Objects (select along path) method, choose Select Existing Path from the drop list, and click on the PIC
button.

Graphically select a defined path that is crossing through closed objects. The closed objects that path
crosses through will be converted to lots in the order the path crosses them. See the figure below for
the path to select.
Figure 6-10 Select Defined Path
Once you have selected the path, the Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) displays.
Enter <> in the Lot Name edit field and set the number to the right to be 1. The closed objects the path
crosses will be converted into lots in the order the path crosses through them. The first lot will have a
Name of 1, the second 2 and so forth. The direction of travel around the lot will be the same as the
closed object. See the figure below for the resulting lots created.
Figure 6-11 Resulting Lots
Convert to Lot – Objects Method

COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT TO LOT # OBJECTS
The Convert to Lot command when using the Objects method allows you to create a lot bounded by
selected lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects. You may also select one geometrically closed
complex object to get an area, or several geometrically closed complex objects to get an area bounded
by those objects. The region is then defined by choosing an internal point that is bounded by the
selected objects.
! The Object method allows you to leave lines that cross through the lot out of consideration by leaving
them out of the selection set. For example, easement lines, utility lines and building setback lines would
not be calculated as part of the lot boundary if they were not selected.
QuickSteps
To create a lot using the Objects method, complete the following steps:
166 COGO
2. Toggle on Objects (select graphically).
3. Click on the PIC button to graphically select the objects that you want to create a lot from.
4. Graphically select all of the objects that you want to convert to a lot. In AutoCAD/BricsCad,
when you are finished selecting objects, press the Enter key. In MicroStation, when you are
finished selecting objects, press the Reset button on your pointing device.
You are prompted to pick a point.
5. Graphically select a point inside of the area that you want defined as a lot.
The Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) will display.
6. Enter a unique name for the lot, description, ID, owner and parent lot. Click on Apply.
Internal Point is not checked. When the option is checked, the command automatically
repeats, prompting you: Select objects.
Example
To convert a lot by selecting objects, select the Convert to Lot command, toggle on the Objects (select
graphically) method and click on the PIC button.
Graphically select a closed object to convert to a lot. You may also select several objects to define the
boundary of the lot that you are converting. See the figure below for the objects to select.
Figure 6-12 Select Bounding Objects
The selected objects will be highlighted in the CAD graphic. Once you have selected enough objects to
completely enclose the area to be converted into a lot, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the
Reset button on your pointing device in MicroStation to finish selecting objects. You will be prompted to
select an internal point.
Chapter 6: Layout

The program will search for a closed boundary using the limited selection set of the chosen objects. If a
closed object cannot be determined, you will be prompted to reselect an internal point.
Figure 6-13 Select Internal Point
If a closed region is found, it will be highlighted in the CAD graphic and you will be prompted to accept
the bounded region or retry by selecting a different point. The closest intersection to the selected
internal point will be the point of beginning of the lot for report purposes. The direction of travel around
the lot will be from the point of beginning along the entity that is closest to the selected internal point.
Once the lot has been accepted, the Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) displays. This
allows you to define the lot name, description, ID and owner.
Convert to Lot – Eagle Point Boundary Method

COG O # LAYOUT # CONVERT TO LOT # EAG LE POINT BOUNDARY
The Convert to Lot command when using the Eagle Point Boundary method allows you to create a lot
bounded by lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects by selecting an internal point. You may enter a
tolerance value that will artificially close a bounded region if it is not geometrically closed. The tolerance
value is the minimum distance allowed between two endpoints of selected objects before these objects
are closed for the creation of the lot.
QuickSteps
To create a lot using the Eagle Point Boundary method, complete the following steps:
2. Toggle on Eagle Point Boundary (select internal point near beginning).
3. Enter the Tolerance in the edit field.
This is the allowable space between objects that is considered to be closed.
4. Click on the PIC icon to graphically select an internal point of the objects that you want to
create a lot from.
The boundary of the lot that was calculated is displayed.
5. Click on the Apply button to accept the lot or click on the PIC icon to select an internal point
again.
When you accept the lot, the Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 6-5 on page 161) displays.
6. Enter a unique name for the lot, description, ID, owner and parent lot. Click on Apply to
define the lot.
168 COGO
Internal Point is not checked. When the option is checked, the command automatically
repeats, prompting you: Pick a point inside lot near beginning point.
Example
To convert a lot by selecting an internal point of objects, select the Convert to Lot command and toggle
on the Eagle Point Boundary (select internal point near beginning) method. Enter a value in the
Tolerance edit field that is an acceptable gap between segments.
Click on the PIC button to select a point inside of the area you wish to convert into a lot. The point
selected determines the closed area being converted, the beginning point of the lot and the direction of
travel around the lot (clockwise or counterclockwise).
The Eagle Point Boundary is calculated from the selection of an internal point of bounding lines, arcs,
spirals and complex objects. The nearest endpoint of a bounding object to the internal point selected is
the start point for the boundary calculation.
If you set a value for the tolerance, the value is applied to each endpoint of the bounding selected
objects. If two endpoints fall within the tolerance value, COGO will connect the two endpoints with a line
segment for the purpose of closing the boundary. If the endpoints fall outside of the tolerance value,
then the EP boundary will continue to calculate the boundary until it meets at the same coordinate that
it started or it is unable to find enough bounding objects.
Figure 6-15 Tolerance Value
After Eagle Point Boundary has found a closed area with regard to any tolerance settings, the closest
intersection to the selected internal point will be the point of beginning for the lot.
Chapter 6: Layout
Modify Lot
COG O # LAYOUT # M ODIFY LOT
KEY-IN COMMAND: modifylot

The Modify Lot command allows you to change the name, description, ID, owner and parent lot for a lot
that has been defined by COGO. You can select the lot by three methods. The available selection
methods are by using the Eagle Point Boundary method, by selecting a lot graphically or by name.

When using the name method, you can either enter the name or select the desired lot from a list of the
defined COGO lots.
After the lot has been selected by one of the three methods, click on the Apply button. This will display
the Modify Lot dialog box (see Figure 6-5 on page 161 for a similar dialog box).
! For information on how to create a lot see Convert to Lot on page 159.
Figure 6-16 Modify Lot Dialog Box
Modify Lot Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select a lot object or internal point within a lot from the CAD graphic to
determine the name of the lot. The lot name is filled into the Lot Name edit field. This option is not
available when the method is set to Lot Name.
Eagle Point Toggle this on if you want to select a point and have the program determine which lot to select.
Boundary The program will use the objects that enclose an area closest to the point that is selected and
(select search the lot database to determine the lot.
internal point
near
beginning)
Lot (select Toggle this on if you want to select a lot graphically. The object that is selected must be a lot that
graphically) has been defined by COGO.
Lot Name Toggle this on if you want to select the lot by entering the name of the lot or by selecting it from a
list of defined lots. Enter the name of the lot that you want to modify in the edit field.
Defined Lots This allows you to select a lot from a list of all the defined lots. Highlight the lot in the list that you
want to modify and click on OK.
Create Lot Groups

COG O # LAYOUT # CREATE LOT G ROUPS
KEY-IN COMMAND: lotgroup

The Create Lot Groups command allows you to group lots together. These can be grouped together so
all lots contained within a group can be printed in a report. Lots can be assigned to different lot groups
of a subdivision.
170 COGO
Each lot can be placed into as many groups as desired. Each group of lots may be reported and printed
separately. For more information about printing reports of lots, see Create Lot Reports on page 172.
Figure 6-17 Create Lot Groups Dialog Box
Create Lot Groups Dialog Box Definitions

Group Name This column displays all of the lot group names that have been added for the project.
Group This column displays all of the descriptions that have been defined for the lot group names.
Description
New Lot Group This icon allows you to create a new lot group by typing the name and description. This will add
a lot group name to the Lot Group list.
Modify Lot This icon allows you to change the name or description of the lot group. This will modify the lot
Group group name or description in the Lot Group list.
Delete Lot This icon will remove a lot group from the list. This will only delete the group name and will not
Group delete the lots from the database.
Print Lot Groups This icon will print the lot group names and descriptions.
Name This column displays the names that are assigned to the lots.
Description This column displays the descriptions that are assigned to the lots.
ID This column displays the IDs that are assigned to the lots.
Owner This column displays the owners that are assigned to the lots.
Square Feet/ This column displays the area of the lots in square feet when in an English project or square
Square Meters meters when in a metric project.
Acres/Hectares This column displays the area of the lots in acres when in an English project or hectares when in
a metric project.
Chapter 6: Layout
Perimeter This column displays the perimeter of the lots.
Parent Name This column displays the parent lot names for the lots.
Parent This column displays the parent lot descriptions for the lots.
Description
Parent Area This column displays the parent area for the lots in square feet when in an English project and in
(Square Feet/ square meters when in a metric project.
Square Meters)
Parent Area This column displays the parent area for the lots in acres when in an English project and in
(Acres/Hectares) hectares when in a metric project.

Create Lot Groups Dialog Box Definitions
Percent of This column displays the percentage the lot is of the parent lot.
Parent
New Lot This icon allows you to add a lot to the highlighted lot group by selecting one or more lots from
the database.
Delete Lot This icon will remove the highlighted lot(s) from the lot group by deleting it. This will only remove
the lot from the lot group and not from the database.
Print Options for This icon will display the standard Print Options dialog box. You may select what lot information
Lots to print from the lots within the highlighted group list.
For more information on print options, see COGO Print Options Dialog Box on page 16.
Create Lot Reports

COG O # LAYOUT # CREATE LOT REPORT
KEY-IN COMMAND: lotrep

The Create Lot Report command allows you to create and print a report of selected lots and lot groups.
The information that can be reported for the lots using the summary or Mapcheck print options are
Name, Description, ID, Owner, Perimeters, Closure Direction, Closure Distance, Closure Coordinates,
Closure Ratios, Area, Percentage of Parent, Parent Name, Parent Description and Parent Area.
You may generate information relating to the selected lot groups and print it out in a user-definable
format.
You may select entire groups of lots or select lots on an individual basis.
! All of the lots listed in the Report list box will be included in either the summary or the Mapcheck Report.
Figure 6-18 Create Lot Reports Dialog Box
Create Lot Reports Dialog Box Definitions

Select Lot Group This allows you to select a lot group from the list of lot groups to create a report. All of the lots
contained in the selected lot group are listed.
For more information on lot groups, see Create Lot Groups on page 170.
Select Lots This allows you to select lots from a list of all of the defined lots. Highlight all the lots you want to
include in the report and click on OK.
172 COGO
Create Lot Reports Dialog Box Definitions
Name This is the name of the lot. A lot name may not be repeated in a project. If a duplicate name is
entered or if it is left blank, you will be prompted to modify the name of the lot.
Description This is the description of the lot. If this is left blank, you will be prompted to enter information into
the edit field.
ID This is the ID value of the lot. This may be used for GIS (Global Information System)
applications. This value is typically an Assessor’s Parcel number or similar number. If this is left
blank, you will be prompted to enter information into the edit field.
Owner This is the name of the person(s) who owns the lot.
Area This displays the area of the lot in square feet or acres if your are in a English project and
square meters or hectares if you are in a metric project.
Perimeter This displays the perimeter of the lot in feet in an English project or meters in a metric project.
Closure This is the direction calculated from the last leg of the boundary traverse to the initial occupied
Direction point.
Closure This is the length of the horizontal line segment that would join the last leg of the boundary
Distance traverse to the initial occupied point.
Closure Easting This is the total change in the X (Easting) direction from the beginning point to the ending point.
Closure This is the total change in the Y (Northing) direction from the beginning point to the ending point.
Northing
Closure Ratio This is the ratio of the Closing Distance to the perimeter of the lot.
Parent Name This is the parent to the lot that you are defining. You can select from all of the lots that have
been defined or select none.
Parent This is the description of the lot that is listed in the Parent Name drop list. This will display as
Description None if the Parent Name is set to none.
Parent Area This displays the area of the parent lot that is selected in the Parent Name drop list. The units it
is displayed in is square feet or acres if you are in an English project and square meters or
hectares if you are in a metric project.
Percent of This displays the percent of the total planimetric area of the parent lot that the newly converted
Parent lot occupies.
Print Options Click on this icon to print a lot report. This displays the Create Lot Report Print Options dialog
box, allowing you to customize your printout.
For more information, see COGO Print Options Dialog Box on page 16.
Create Mapcheck Reports

COG O # LAYOUT # CREATE M APCHECK REPORTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: lotmap

The Create Mapcheck Reports command allows you to generate closure reports for COGO lots. A
mapcheck of a lot is the inverse of each leg of the lot from the beginning point to the ending point. This
inverse will use mapcheck precision to calculate new coordinate locations from the rounded directions
Chapter 6: Layout
and distances. From these rounded directions and distances and new coordinates, closure information
is calculated for the lot. The closure information that can be displayed are courses, direction, distance,
ratio, Northing and Easting.
For more information of mapcheck precision, see Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab on page 251. For
more information on the closure information, see Create Mapcheck Report Settings on page 175.
You can create the mapcheck report for a group of lots or individual lots. If you click on the Select Lot
Group button, you can select all or some of the lots that belong to a specific lot group. You can also
select one or more lots from the list of all lots that have been defined by clicking on the Select Lots
button.

For more information about Lot Groups, see Create Lot Groups on page 170.
You can customize what is displayed in the report as well as add additional information to the report. To
specify what items are displayed and how they are displayed in the report, click on the Mapcheck
Settings button. If you want to add any additional information to the mapcheck report or further
customize what is displayed in the report you can do so by typing directly into the multiple line edit field.
Click with your pointing device in the location that you want to make an addition or change. When you
print the report, the contents of the multiple line edit field will be printed, so any changes that have been
made will be included.
Figure 6-19 Create Mapcheck Reports Dialog Box
Create Mapcheck Reports Dialog Box Definitions

Select Lot Group This displays a list of all of the lot groups that have been defined. Each lot group will also display
all of the lots that are associated with the group. By selecting this option, you can get the
mapcheck report for an entire group of lots.
For more information on creating lot groups, see Create Lot Groups on page 170.
Select Lots This displays a list of all of the lots that have been defined in COGO. You can select an
individual lot or several of the lots that are displayed in the list.
Print Mapcheck This allows you to print the contents of the mapcheck report edit field to a file or printer. The
Report order and labeling of the different items in the report are controlled by the Report Mapcheck
Settings (see Create Mapcheck Report Settings on page 175). The location of the printout is
determined by the Print Setup command located in the File menu of the Eagle Point Menu.
For more information on the print setup, see Print Setup in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Mapcheck This option allows you to customize how the mapcheck report will appear. You can specify
Settings which lot items are displayed, how the items are labeled and the order that they are placed into
the report.
For more information on the Mapcheck Settings, see Create Mapcheck Report Settings on page
175.
Clear List This will clear the contents of the dialog box. This allows you to create additional mapcheck
reports.
174 COGO
Create Mapcheck Report Settings
COG O # LAYOUT # CREATE M APCHECK REPORTS # M APCHECK SETTING S
The Create Mapcheck Report Settings command allows you customize how the mapcheck report will
appear. You can specify which lot items are displayed, how the items are labeled and the order that
they are placed into the report. The lot items that you can customize are Name, Description, ID, Owner,
Square Feet (Square Meters), Acres (Hectares), Perimeter, Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent
Square Feet (Square Meters), Parent Acres (Hectares), Percent of Parent, Closure Report, Closure
Direction, Closure Distance, Closure Ratio, Closure Northing and Closure Easting.
All of the customization that is done in the Mapcheck Report Settings command is stored in a central
location. This allows you to customize the settings one time and then use those settings for all projects.
Figure 6-20 Create Mapcheck Report Settings Dialog Box
Chapter 6: Layout

Create Mapcheck Report Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Option Function
Lot Item This allows you to select what you want included in the mapcheck report. Any of the options that are
toggled on will be reported in the mapcheck report. The items that you can choose from are as follows:
" Name: This is the name of the lot that was entered when the lot was created. For more
information on creating a lot, see Convert to Lot on page 159.
" Description: This is the description of the lot that was entered when the lot was created.
" ID: This is the ID of the lot that was entered when the lot was created.
" Owner: This is the owner of the lot that was entered when the lot was created.
" Square Feet (Square Meters): This is the area of the lot in square feet in an English project or
square meters in a metric project.
" Acres (Hectares): This is the area of the lot in acres in an English project or hectares in a
metric project.
" Perimeter: This is the perimeter of the lot in feet in an English project or meters in a metric
project.
" Parent Name: This is the name of the parent lot.
" Parent Description: This is the description of the parent lot.
" Parent Square Feet (Square Meters): This is the area of the parent lot in square feet in an
English project or square meters in a metric project.
" Parent Acres (Hectares): This is the area of the parent lot in acres in an English project or
hectares in a metric project.
" Percent of Parent: This is the percent of the total planimetric area of the parent that the
selected lot occupies.
" Closure Report: This displays the course information from point to point around the lot. The
new coordinates, directions, distances and curve parameters are calculated based on
mapcheck precision.
For more information on the mapcheck precision, see Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab on page
251.
" Closure Direction: This is the direction calculated from the ending point on the last leg of the lot
to the beginning point of the lot.
" Closure Distance: This is the length of the horizontal line segment that would join the end point
of the last leg of the lot to the beginning point of the lot.
" Closure Ratio: This is the ratio of the closure distance to the perimeter of the lot.
" Closure Northing: This is the total change or departure in Y (Northing). This is measured from
the beginning point to the ending point.
" Closure Easting: This is the total change or departure in X (Easting). This is measured from the
beginning point to the ending point.
Label This allows you to customize how the heading of each lot item is displayed in the mapcheck report. You
can enter up to 128 characters for the label.
Order This allows you to customize the order that the lot items will be displayed in the mapcheck report.
Layout Triangular Area

COG O # LAYOUT # TRIANG ULAR A REA
KEY-IN COMMAND: triarea

The Layout Triangular Area command may be used to create a closed object by entering two known
points, a direction and the desired area. The region formed is triangular.
Select the first know base point of the triangular area. Select the second known base point of the
triangular area. Enter the direction from the first base point. Enter the triangular area.
176 COGO
The triangular area will be created holding the two base points and following the direction defined from
the first base point until the area is reached.
! The units for the triangular area is determined by the Planimetric Area setting for input. The available
options are Acres and Square Feet in an English project, and Hectares and Square Meters in a metric
project. For more information, see Units in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
QuickSteps
To create a triangular area, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Triangular Area.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the first known base point. Click on Next.
3. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the second known base point. Click on
Next.
4. Enter the direction from the first base point. Click on Next.
For the available options to define the direction, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
5. Enter the desired triangular area. Click on Apply.
6. Enter the Node ID that will be placed. Click on Apply to place the Node.
For more information about the Node parameters that can be changed when placing a Node, see
COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.
7. If you want to place additional triangular areas from the area that was just created, enter a
new value in the Area edit field.
Example
This is an example of a closed region created by the Triangular Area command.
In this example, closed regions are created by first selecting two base points and a direction from the
first base point.
Chapter 6: Layout
Figure 6-21 Select Base Points
Enter the desired triangular area. In this example, the area entered is 2000.

The closed region is created by swinging the third leg out along the direction specified from the first
base point, rotating about the second base point.
Figure 6-22 Enter Area
To continue from the area just created, enter an area. In this example, the area of 3000 is entered.
The new region is formed from the direction established from the first direction point and the new region
created from the previous area entered.
Figure 6-23 Final Triangular Area
Layout Radial Area

COG O # LAYOUT # RADIAL A REA
KEY-IN COMMAND: radarea

The Layout Radial Area command may be used to create a closed region when one of the sides is an
arc. Select the first know base point. This is a point along the arc side of the radial area. Select the
second known base point. This is a point that the direction of the area will follow. Enter the direction
from the second base point. Enter the center point for the arc. Enter the radial area. The radial area will
be created holding the two base points, following the direction of the arc and the direction from the
second base point until the area is reached.
more information on defining directions, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
! You can use this command to lay out the boundary of a lot that has a curve for the front lot line, or if the
lot falls on an offset or bulb cul-de-sac.
178 COGO
QuickSteps
To create a radial area, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Radial Area.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the first known base point. This point will
be along the arc. Click on Next.
Next.
4. Enter the direction from the second base point. Click on Next.
5. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the center of the arc. Click on Next.
6. Enter the desired radial area. Click on Apply.
7. Enter the Node IDs that will be placed. Click on Apply to place the Nodes.
8. If you want to place additional radial areas from the area that was just created, enter a new
value in the area edit field.
Example
This is an example of calculating closed regions along a curve. These regions may later be converted
to lots, annotated and printed for reports.
In this example, closed regions are created by selecting two base points, a direction from the second
base point and the center of the arc or radius point.
1. Select Layout ! Radial Area.
2. Select the first base point as shown Figure 6-24 on page 180.
This is typically one of the lot corners on the frontage portion of the lot.
3. Select second base point as shown in Figure 6-24 on page 180.
This is typically one of the back lot corners.
4. Enter direction from second base point as shown in Figure 6-24 on page 180.
This will be a direction along the back lot line.
Chapter 6: Layout

5. Select the radius point of curve as shown below.
Figure 6-24 Radial Area
6. Once the shape of the region has been determined, type the desired area for the region to be
created.
The lines will be drawn and Nodes will be placed at the two new corners created to form the region.
In this example, 10,500 was entered for the area.
7. To enter a different area to be calculated, type the area and apply it.
In this example, additional areas of 12,000 and 9,000 where entered.
Figure 6-26 Continue Radial Area Command
8. Continue to apply the additions along the arc segment until either the back lot line changes,
or the curve radius point changes. When that happens, repeat the command and reselect
the base points.
180 COGO
Layout Trapezoidal Area
COG O # LAYOUT # TRAPEZOIDAL A REA
KEY-IN COMMAND: traparea

The Layout Trapezoidal Area command may be used to create a closed object by entering two known
points, known directions from each point and the desired area. The region formed is trapezoidal.
Select the first know base point of the trapezoidal area. Enter the direction from the first base point.
Select the second known base point. Enter the direction from the second base point. Enter the
trapezoidal area. The trapezoidal area will be created holding the two base points and following the
directions defined from the two base points. The fourth side will be parallel to the direction defined by
the two base points selected.
more information on defining directions, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
QuickSteps
To create a trapezoidal area, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Trapezoidal Area.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the first known base point. Click on Next.
3. Enter the direction from the first base point. Click on Next.
Next.
5. Enter the direction from the second base point. Click on Next.
6. Enter the desired trapezoidal area. Click on Apply.
7. Enter the Node IDs that will be placed. Click on Apply to place the Nodes.
8. If you want to place additional trapezoidal areas from the area that was just created, enter a
new value in the Area edit field.
Chapter 6: Layout

Example
This is an example of a closed region created by the Trapezoidal Area command.
In this example, closed regions are created by first selecting a base point and direction. A second
corresponding base point and direction are then selected to form a trapezoidal region.
Figure 6-27 Select Base Points and Directions
Once the initial points and directions are established, enter the area for the region. Nodes may be
placed on the area created. The trapezoid is formed from the baseline created by the two base points
and is extended along the directions from the base points. The final course of the boundary is parallel to
the original baseline from the first base point to the second base point. In this example, 5,000 was
entered for the area.
182 COGO
To continue from the area just created, enter an area. In this example, an area of 3,000 and then of
4,000 was entered.
Figure 6-29 Continue Trapezoidal Area
Layout Road Intersection

COG O # LAYOUT # ROAD INTERSECTION
KEY-IN COMMAND: roadint

The Layout Road Intersection command allows you to remove segments that intersect with another by
trimming them. The segments that intersect can be lines, arcs, spirals or complex objects. It also allows
you to place fillets (arcs) between the segments. This can be used for curb lines, right-of-way lines,
property lines, etc.
Select the objects that you want to use to create a road intersection. Select the objects that you want to
remove. Enter the radius for the fillets that you want to place between the objects and select the Node
IDs that you want to place on the fillets.
QuickSteps
To lay out a road intersection, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Road Intersection.
2. Graphically select the objects for which you want to create the road intersection. Click on
Next.
3. Graphically select the objects that you want to remove from the road intersection. Click on
Next.
4. Enter the radius that you want to place between objects of the intersection.
For more information on all of the available distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on
page 11.
Chapter 6: Layout
5. Enter the Node IDs that you want to place for the fillets. Click on the Fillet Node Options
button to change any of the Node parameters.
For more information on the Node parameters that can be changed, see COGO Place Node Dialog
Box on page 6.
6. Click on the PIC button to select the objects that you want to fillet between.
7. Graphically select the objects that you want to place a fillet between. Click on Apply to place
the fillet and the Nodes.

8. When you are finished placing fillets between objects, click on Close.
Example
This is an example of a road intersection that will be modified using the Road Intersection command.
1. To access the Road Intersection command, select Layout ! Road Intersection. The first
dialog box that appears prompts you to select the objects to intersect the road. Graphically
select the objects as shown below.
Figure 6-30 Select Offset Lines
2. Once you have selected the appropriate lines, click on Next. You will be prompted to select
the segments to remove. Graphically select the segments shown in the figure below.
Figure 6-31 Select Segments to be Removed
3. Once you have selected the segments to remove, click on Next. Enter the radius for the
fillets. Enter the Node IDs for the fillets and click on the PIC button.
184 COGO
4. Graphically select the segments to place a fillet between as shown below. Click on Apply to
place the fillet and Nodes.
Figure 6-32 Select Objects to Fillet
5. Continue the same procedure for the three remaining corners of the intersection.
When you have finished selecting the remaining corners, the intersection should look like the
intersection shown in the figure below.
Figure 6-33 Set Fillet Radius for Curb Returns
Layout Linear Parking Lot

COG O # LAYOUT # PARKING LOT # LINEAR
KEY-IN COMMAND: cglpark

The Layout Linear Parking Lot command allows you to quickly place multiple parking stalls into the
Chapter 6: Layout
CAD graphic. You can set the style, dimensions, parameters and disabled settings for the parking lot.
The style, dimensions, parameters and disabled stall settings are all different dialog boxes of the wizard
that steps you through all of the settings for the command. If you do not want to change all of the
settings, the defaults established for the command will be used. Also, you can set the CAD properties
for the stripes, bumper, disabled symbol and curb. The CAD properties that can be set are layer/level,
color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.

In the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style dialog box (below), you can select between three different
styles of parking stalls to create. The three different styles are Single Row (Edge), Double Row (Center)
and Double Row (Island).
Figure 6-34 Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style Dialog Box
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available for any options on this page of the Layout Linear Parking Lot command.
Single Row Toggle this option on if you want to place the stalls of the parking lot on a single side. You will need
(Edge) to select the start and end point that the stalls will be placed between and the side on which the
stalls will be placed.
Double Row Toggle this option on if you want to place the stalls of the parking lot on both sides. You will need
(Center) to select the start and end point that the stalls will be placed between. The stalls will not be
separated at the center.
Double Row Toggle this option on if you want to place the stalls of the parking lot on both sides and have them
(Island) separated by an island. You will need to select the start and end point that the stalls will be placed
between. The stalls will be separated at the center by the width of the island.
CAD Settings This icon allows you to set the CAD properties for the stripes, bumpers, disabled symbol, and
curb. You can set the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.
On the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (below), you can set the dimensions for the
parking lot. You can set the angle, length and width for the stalls. If you have selected the parking lot
style of Double Row (Island), then you can also set the width of the island.
Figure 6-35 Layout Linear Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box
186 COGO
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to select an angle or distance from the CAD graphic. You will be prompted to
select two points. The angle (measured from 0 degrees) or distance will be placed in the
appropriate edit field.
Angle This is the angle at which the stalls will be placed. The angle is measured in a counterclockwise
direction with 0 degrees defined to the right. You can select an angle from the drop list, enter your
own angle in this field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the
angle.
Length This is the length of the stripe lines for the stalls. The length is measured from the bumper line. You
can select a length from the drop list, enter your own length in this field or click on the PIC button
and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Width This is the perpendicular distance between each of the stripe lines that the stalls will be placed
apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your own width in this field or
click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Island Width This is the perpendicular distance between a double row of stalls. You can select an island width
from the drop list, enter your own width in this field or click on the PIC button and select two points
in CAD to calculate the distance. This is only available if you have selected Double Row Island in
the Linear Parking – Style dialog box (Figure 6-34 on page 186).
CAD Settings This icon allows you to set the CAD properties for the stripes, bumpers, disabled symbol and curb.
You can set the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.
On the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (below), you can specify if you want to
create as many stalls that will fit between two points selected or to specify the number of stalls to
create. You can also specify if you want to place the stripe lines for the end stalls.
Figure 6-36 Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available for any options on this page of the Layout Linear Parking Lot command.
End Point Toggle this on if you want to have as many stalls as possible created between the two points that
Chapter 6: Layout
are selected.
Number Toggle this on if you want to place a specified number of stalls between the two points that are
selected. Enter the desired number of stalls to create in the edit field.
Draw End Toggle this on if you want to place the stripe lines at the ends of the stalls. If this is toggled off, the
Stripes stripe lines for the first and last stalls will not be created.
You can set layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.

On the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-37 below), you can
specify how many disabled stalls to place and the width of those stalls. Also, you can choose to place a
disabled symbol in the disabled stalls automatically.
! Placing disabled stalls is optional. If you do not want to place any disabled stalls, set the number of
stalls to 0.
Figure 6-37 Layout Linear Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to select a distance from the CAD graphic for the width. You will be
prompted to select two points. The distance between the two points will be placed in the
Number of stalls This is the number of disabled stalls that will be created. The disabled stalls will be created
nearest to the first point that was selected.
Width This is the perpendicular distance between each of the stripe lines that the disabled stalls will be
placed apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your own width in
this field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Insert Disabled Toggle this on if you want to insert a disabled symbol into the disabled stalls.
Symbol
CAD Settings This icon allows you to set the CAD properties for the stripes, bumpers, disabled symbol and
QuickSteps
To create a linear parking lot, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Parking Lot ! Linear.
This displays the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style dialog box (Figure 6-34 on page 186).
2. Select the style for parking lot. You can select between Single Row (Edge), Double Row
(Center) and Double Row (Island). Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (Figure 6-35 on page 186).
3. Enter the angle for the stalls.
4. Enter the length for the stalls.
5. Enter the width for the stalls.
6. Enter the island width if you selected the Double Row (Island) style.
7. Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (Figure 6-36 on page 187).
188 COGO
8. Select End Point or Number to determine how many stalls will be created. If you have
selected Number, enter the number of stalls in the edit field.
9. Toggle on Draw End Stripes if you want to place the stripes at the ends of the first and last
stalls. Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Linear Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-37 on
page 188).
10. Enter the number of disabled stalls that are desired.
11. Enter the width for the disabled stalls.
12. Toggle on the Insert Disabled Symbol option if you want to place a disabled symbol in the
disabled stalls.
13. Click on the CAD Settings icon and set the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/
weight for the parking lot stalls.
14. Click on Finish. You will be prompted to select a first point. Graphically select the starting
point of the parking lot stalls.
You will be prompted to select a second point.
15. Graphically select the second point.
This point will be used as the direction of the parking lot stalls and the limits of the parking lot stalls
if End Point was toggled on in the parameters box.
16. If you have selected Single Row (Edge) for the parking lot style, you will be prompted to
select a side. Graphically select the side on which you want the stalls placed.
Example
This is an example of linear parking lot stalls.
Figure 6-38 Linear Parking Lot Stalls
Layout Curved Parking Lot

COG O # LAYOUT # PARKING LOT # CURVED
Chapter 6: Layout
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgcpark

The Layout Curved Parking Lot command allows you to quickly place multiple parking stalls into the
CAD graphic. You can set the style, dimensions, parameters and disabled settings for the parking lot.
The style, dimensions, parameters and disabled stall settings are all different dialog boxes of the wizard
that steps you through all of the settings for the command. If you do not want to change all of the
settings, the defaults established for the command will be used.

You can also set the CAD properties for the stripes, bumper, disabled symbol and curb. The CAD
properties that can be set are the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.
On the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style dialog box (below), you can select whether you want the
stalls placed on the inside or the outside of the curve. Also, you can specify the direction (clockwise or
counterclockwise) that the stalls will be created around the curve.
Figure 6-39 Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style Dialog Box
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available for any options on this page of the Layout Curved Parking Lot
command.
Inside/Outside This allows you to control what side of the curve the parking lot stalls will be placed. Click on the
picture or word to change the side of curve.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction around the curve the parking lot stalls will be created. Click on the
Counterclockwise picture or word to change the direction.
On the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (below), you can set the dimensions for the
parking lot. You can set the length and width for the stalls.
Figure 6-40 Layout Curved Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box
190 COGO
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to select a distance from the CAD graphic for the length or width. You will be
Length This is the length of the stripe lines for the stalls. The length is measured from the bumper line.
You can select a length from the drop list, enter your own length in this field or click on the PIC
button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Width This is the distance between each of the stripe lines, measured at the curve, that the stalls will be
placed apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your own width in this
field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
On the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (below), you can specify if you want to
create as many stalls that fit between the end points of the curve or to specify the number of stalls to
create. You can also specify if you want to place the stripe lines for the end stalls.
Figure 6-41 Layout Curved Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available for any options on this page of the Layout Curved Parking Lot command.
End Point Turn this radio button on if you want to have as many stalls created between the end points of the
curve that was selected.
Number Turn this radio button on if you want to place a specified number of stalls around the curve that
was selected. Enter the desired number of stalls to create in the edit field.
Draw End Turn this radio button on if you want to place the stripe lines at the ends of the stalls. If this is
Stripes toggled off, the stripe lines for the first and last stalls will not be created.
Chapter 6: Layout
On the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-42 on page 192), you
can specify how many disabled stalls to place and the width of those stalls. Also, you can choose to
place a disabled symbol in the disabled stalls automatically.

stalls to 0.
Figure 6-42 Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Number of stalls This is the number of disabled stalls that will be created. The disabled stalls will be created as
the first stalls. The first stalls are determined by the direction that is set on the style dialog box.
Width This is the distance between each of the stripe lines, measured at the curve, that the disabled
stalls will be placed apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your
own width in this field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the
distance.
Symbol
QuickSteps
To create a curved parking lot, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Parking Lot ! Curved.
This will display the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style dialog box (Figure 6-39 on page 190).
2. Select the style for the parking lot. You can select between Inside and Outside for the side
the stalls will be placed on and clockwise and counterclockwise for the direction the stalls
will be created around the curve. Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (Figure 6-40 on page 190).
5. Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (Figure 6-41 on page 191).
192 COGO
This displays the Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-42 on
page 192).
disabled stalls.
12. Click on Finish.
You will be prompted to select an object.
13. Graphically select the curve that you want to place the parking lot stalls around.
Example
This is an example of curved parking lot stalls.
Figure 6-43 Curved Parking Lot Stalls
Layout Area Parking Lot

COG O # LAYOUT # PARKING LOT # A REA
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgapark

The Layout Area Parking Lot command allows you to quickly place multiple parking stalls into the CAD
graphic. You can set the row spacing, dimensions, parameters and disabled stall settings for the
parking lot. The row spacing, dimensions, parameters and disabled settings are all different dialog
boxes of the wizard that steps you through all of the settings for the command. If you do not want to
change all of the settings, the defaults established for the command will be used. Also, you can set the
Chapter 6: Layout
CAD properties for the stripes, bumper, disabled symbol and curb. The CAD properties that can be set
are the layer/level, color, linetype/linestyle and width/weight.

On the Layout Area Parking Lot – Row Spacing dialog box (below), you can select between the
distance between rows or the number of rows. You can also choose if you want the rows to have bi-
directional aisles or not.
Figure 6-44 Layout Area Parking Lot – Row Spacing Dialog Box
Layout Area Parking Lot – Row Spacing Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select the distance between centerlines or the aisle width from the CAD
graphic. You are prompted to select two points. The distance between the two points is placed
in the appropriate edit field.
Row Spacing This allows you to control the spacing between the rows of parking stalls. The available options
Option are Distance Between Centerlines and Aisle Width.
" Distance Between Centerlines: Select his option to specify the distance between
the rows of parking spaces based on the centerline between the rows.
" Aisle Width: Select his option to specify the width of each aisle between the parking
spaces.
Graphically Toggle this on if you want to specify the distance between rows by graphically selecting the
Select Distance parking area. The number of rows is determined by the area selected.
Number of Rows Toggle this on if you want to specify how many rows to create. Enter the desired number of rows
in the edit field.
Use Toggle this on if you want to have traffic flow in two directions for the row. If this is toggled off,
bi-directional the traffic flow will be in one direction for the rows.
Aisles
CAD Settings This icon allows you to set the CAD properties for the stripes, bumpers, disabled symbols and
On the Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (below), you can set the dimensions for the
parking lot. You can set the angle, length and width for the stalls.
Figure 6-45 Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box
194 COGO
Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to select an angle or distance from the CAD graphic. You will be prompted to
select two points. The angle (measured from 0 degrees) or distance will be placed in the
Angle This is the angle that the stalls will be placed at. The angle is measured in a counterclockwise
direction with 0 degrees defined to the right. You can select an angle from the drop list, enter your
own angle in this field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the
angle.
Length This is the length of the stripe lines for the stalls. The length is the measured from the bumper line.
You can select a length from the drop list, enter your own length in this field or click on the PIC
button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Width This is the perpendicular distance between each of the stripe lines that the stalls will be placed
apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your own width in this field or
click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
In the Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (below), you can specify if you want to create
as many stalls that fit between two points selected or to specify the number of stalls to create. You can
also specify if you want to place the stripe lines for the end stalls.
Figure 6-46 Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box
Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon is not available for any options on this page of the Layout Area Parking Lot command.
End Point Toggle this on if you want to have as many stalls created between the two points that are selected.
Number Toggle this on if you want to place a specified number of stalls between the two points that are
selected. Enter the desired number of stalls to create in the edit field.
Draw End Toggle this on if you want to place the stripe lines at the ends of the stalls. If this is toggled off, the
Stripes stripe lines for the first and last stalls will not be created.
Chapter 6: Layout
In the Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-47 on page 196), you can
specify how many disabled stalls to place and the width of those stalls. Also, you can choose to place a
disabled symbol in the disabled stalls automatically.

stalls to 0.
Figure 6-47 Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box
Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Number of Stalls This is the number of disabled stalls that will be created. The disabled stalls will be created
nearest to the first point that was selected.
Width This is the perpendicular distance between each of the stripe lines that the disabled stalls will be
placed apart from each other. You can select a width from the drop list, enter your own width in
this field or click on the PIC button and select two points in CAD to calculate the distance.
Symbol
QuickSteps
To create parking lot stalls within an area, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Parking Lot ! Area.
The Layout Area Parking Lot – Row Spacing Lot dialog box (Figure 6-44 on page 194) displays.
2. Select how you want the rows spaced. Click on Next once you have selected the spacing
options.
You can select between Distance Between Centerlines and Aisle Width. You can also choose to
graphically select or to specify the number of rows for the area parking lot. There is also an option
for Bi-directional Aisles.
This displays the Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions dialog box (Figure 6-45 on page 194).
3. Enter the angle for the stalls.
6. Click on Next.
This displays the Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters dialog box (Figure 6-46 on page 195).
196 COGO
This displays the Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Settings dialog box (Figure 6-47 on page
196).
disabled stalls.
13. Click on Finish.
You will be prompted to select a first point.
14. Graphically select the starting point of the parking lot stalls.
You will be prompted to select a second point.
15. Graphically select the second point.
This point will be used as the direction of the parking lot stalls and the limits of the parking lot stalls
if End Point was toggled on in the parameters box.
You will be prompted to select a side.
16. Graphically select the side that you want the stalls placed on.
Example
This is an example of parking lot stalls created in an area.
Figure 6-48 Area Parking Lot Stalls
Layout Bulb Cul-de-sac

Chapter 6: Layout
COG O # LAYOUT # CUL-DE-SACS # BULB
KEY-IN COMMAND: bulbcds

The Layout Bulb Cul-de-Sac command allows you to place the bulb radius for the cul-de-sac, entrance
radius and straight line transition line between them. Enter the center point for the bulb cul-de-sac.
Enter the radius for the bulb. Select the first right-of-way object near the cul-de-sac. Select the second
right-of-way object near the cul-de-sac. Enter the first tangent length if desired.

Enter the first entrance radius. Select the Nodes that you want placed on the fillets and enter the Node
IDs for the locations. Enter the second tangent length if desired. Enter the second entrance radius.
Select the Nodes the you want to place on the fillets and enter the Node IDs for the locations.
more information on defining a distance, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more
information on placing Nodes, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6 and COGO Place Curve
Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For more information on the Node parameters that can be set, see
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.
! Before beginning the command, two right-of-way lines must be created and a center point of the bulb
cul-de-sac must be known. The right-of-way lines can be lines, arcs or complex objects.
QuickSteps
To lay out a bulb cul-de-sac, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Bulb.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the center of the bulb cul-de-sac. Click on
Next.
3. Enter the radius for the bulb of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
For more information on all of the available distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on
page 11.
4. Select the first right-of-way object near the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
5. Select the second right-of-way object near the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
6. If desired, enter the tangent length to be used to transition from the bulb radius to the
entrance radius. Click on Next.
7. Enter the radius for the first fillet to be placed as the entrance radius to the cul-de-sac. Click
on Next.
8. If you want to change any of the Node placement options for the fillets, click on the Fillet
Node Options button.
For more information on the Node parameters that can be set, see COGO Curve Node Options
9. Enter the Node IDs and select the Nodes you want placed on the fillets.
For more information on Node placement, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14.
10. Click on Apply to place the Nodes. Click on Next. If you have entered a tangent length, you
will be prompted to place a Node. Click on Apply to place this Node and then click on Next.
11. If desired, enter the tangent length to be used to transition from the bulb radius to the
12. Enter the Radius for the second fillet to be placed as the entrance radius to the cul-de-sac.
Click on Next.
13. If you have entered a tangent length, you will be prompted to place a Node. Click on Apply to
place the Node and then click on Next.
198 COGO
16. Click on Apply to place the Nodes. If you want to create another bulb cul-de-sac, click on the
Repeat button.
Example
This is an example of a bulb cul-de-sac. To begin, you must have a centerline and two right-of-way
lines.
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Bulb.
2. Enter or graphically select the center point for the bulb cul-de-sac as shown in the figure
below. Click on Next.
Figure 6-49 Select Center of Cul-de-sac
3. Enter the radius for the bulb of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
A circle having the radius of the bulb will be constructed from the center point that was selected.
4. Select the first right-of-way line. In this example, the right-of-way line on the bottom is the
first right-of-way line. Click on Next.
5. Select the second right-of-way line. Click on Next. See the figure below for the right-of-way
lines.
Figure 6-50 Select Right-of-Way Lines
Chapter 6: Layout

6. Enter the tangent length for the bulb to the fillet between the first right-of-way line. See the
figure below for the tangent length. Click on Next.
Figure 6-51 Specify Tangent Length
7. Enter the radius for the fillet for the first right-of-way line. See the figure below for the fillet
radius. Click on Next.
Figure 6-52 Specify Fillet Radius
8. Select the Nodes that you want to place on the fillet and enter the Node IDs for those points.
Click on Apply to place the fillet Nodes. Click on Next. Enter the Node ID for the tangent to
the bulb. Click on Next. See the figure below.
Figure 6-53 Place Fillet, Tangent and Nodes
200 COGO
9. Repeat the same steps of entering the tangent length, radius for the fillet and Node IDs for
the second right-of-way line. This will complete the cul-de-sac as shown in the figure below.
If you want to create another bulb cul-de-sac, click on the Repeat button.
Figure 6-54 Finished Bulb Cul-de-sac
Layout Offset Cul-de-sac

COG O # LAYOUT # CUL-DE-SACS # OFFSET
KEY-IN COMMAND: offsetcds

The Layout Offset Cul-de-sac command allows you to place the offset radius for the cul-de-sac,
entrance radius and straight line transition lines between them. Select the outside right-of-way object
near the start of the cul-de-sac. Select the inside right-of-way object near the cul-de-sac. Enter the
offset radius from the outside right-of-way line. The center point of the cul-de-sac will be placed the
offset distance perpendicular to the first right-of-way line. Enter the tangent length if desired. This is
from the cul-de-sac to the inside right-of-way object. Enter the entrance radius of the cul-de-sac. Select
the Nodes that you want to place on the fillet and enter the Node IDs for the locations.
For more information on defining a distance, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more
information on placing Nodes, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For more
information on the Node parameters that can be set, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on
page 14.
! Before beginning the command, two right-of-way lines must be created. The right-of-way lines can be
lines, arcs or complete objects.
QuickSteps
To lay out an offset cul-de-sac, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Offset.
2. Select the outside right-of-way object near the start of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
Chapter 6: Layout
3. Select the inside right-of-way object near the start of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
4. Enter the offset radius distance. Click on Next.
5. Enter the Node ID for the tangent to curve Node. Click on Apply to place the Node. Click on
Next.
For more information on placing a Node, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.

6. Enter the Node ID for the center of the offset radius of the cul-de-sac. Click on Apply to
place the Node. Click on Next.
For more information on placing a Node, see COGO Place Node Dialog Box on page 6.
7. If desired, enter the tangent length to be used to transition from the cul-de-sac radius to the
8. Enter the radius for the fillet to be placed as the entrance radius to the cul-de-sac. Click on
Next.
9. If you have entered a tangent length, you will be prompted to place a Node. Click on Apply to
place the Node and then click on Next.
12. Click on Apply. If you want to create another offset cul-de-sac, click on the Repeat button.
Example
This is an example of an offset cul-de-sac. To begin, you must have two right-of-way lines.
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Offset.
2. Select the outside right-of-way line. Click on Next. Select the inside right-of-way line. Click
on Next. See the figure below for the right-of-way lines to select.
Figure 6-55 Select Right-of-Way Lines
3. Enter the radius for the cul-de-sac. Click on Next. The center point of the cul-de-sac will be
placed the offset distance perpendicular to the first right-of-way line and a circle will be
created. See the following for the circle that is placed.
202 COGO
4. Enter the Node ID for the tangent to curve point. Click on Next. See the figure below for the
tangent to curve Node that is placed.
Figure 6-56 Place Tangent to Curve Node
5. Enter the Node ID for the center point of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next. See the figure below
for the Node that is placed.
Figure 6-57 Place Center of Cul-de-sac Node
6. Enter the tangent length to be placed between the cul-de-sac and the fillet radius. Click on
Next. See the figure below for the tangent length that was entered.
Figure 6-58 Enter Tangent Length Chapter 6: Layout
7. Enter the Node ID to be placed at the curve to tangent location. Click on Apply and then click
on Next.

8. Enter the radius for the fillet. See the figure below for the fillet radius. Click on Next.
Figure 6-59 Specify Fillet Radius
9. Select the Nodes that you want to place on the fillet and enter the Node IDs for those points.
Click on Apply to place the fillet Nodes. See the above figure for the Nodes that were placed.
Layout Hammer Cul-de-sac

COG O # LAYOUT # CUL-DE-SACS # H AM M ER
KEY-IN COMMAND: hammercds

The Layout Hammer Cul-de-sac command allows you to place lines, fillets and Nodes for a hammer
cul-de-sac. Select the center point for the cul-de-sac. Enter the back tangent direction to define the
orientation of the cul-de-sac. Enter the width and depth of the cul-de-sac. Select the right-of-way
objects. Enter the radius for the fillet of the first right-of-way object. Select the Nodes to be placed on
the fillet and on the cul-de-sac. Enter the radius for the fillet of the second right-of-way object. Select the
Nodes to be placed on the fillet.
For more information about selecting a Node or point, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5. For
more information on defining a direction, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9. For more
information on defining a distance, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11. For more information
of placing Nodes, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box on page 14. For more information on the
Node parameters that can be set, see COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box on page 14.
! Before beginning this command, two right-of-way objects must be created and the center point of the
cul-de-sac must be known. The right-of-way lines can be lines, arcs or complex objects.
QuickSteps
To lay out a hammer cul-de-sac, complete the following steps:
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Hammer.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the center of the hammer cul-de-sac. Click
on Next.
3. Enter the back tangent direction. This is to define the orientation of the hammer cul-de-sac.
Click on Next.
204 COGO
4. Enter the width for the hammer cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
For more information on defining distances, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
5. Enter the depth for the hammer cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
For more information on defining distances, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
6. Select the first right-of-way object near the start of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
7. Select the second right-of-way object near the start of the cul-de-sac. Click on Next.
8. Enter the radius for the fillet to be placed as the entrance radius to the cul-de-sac for the
first right-of-way line. Click on Next.
9. Enter the Node IDs and select the Nodes you want placed on the fillet.
10. Click on Apply to place the Nodes and then click on Next.
11. Enter the radius for the fillet to be placed as the entrance radius to the cul-de-sac for the
second right-of-way line. Click on Next.
12. Enter the Node IDs and select the Nodes you want placed on the fillet.
13. Click on Apply. If you want to create another hammer cul-de-sac, click on the Repeat button.
Example
This is an example of a hammer cul-de-sac. To begin, you must have two right-of-way lines and know
the center point of the cul-de-sac.
1. Select Layout ! Cul-de-sacs ! Hammer.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or point for the center of the hammer cul-de-sac. See
below for the location of the center point. Click on Next.
3. Select the Back Tangent direction to define the orientation of the hammer cul-de-sac. See
below for the back tangent direction. Click on Next.
Chapter 6: Layout
Figure 6-60 Select the Center Point and Back Tangent Direction
4. Enter the width of the cul-de-sac. See Figure 6-58 for the width of the cul-de-sac. Click on
Next.
5. Enter the depth of the cul-de-sac. See Figure 6-61 on page 206 for the depth of the cul-de-
sac. Click on Next.

Figure 6-61 Width and Depth of Cul-de-Sac
6. Select the first right-of-way line. See below for the first right-of-way line. Click on Next.
7. Select the second right-of-way line. See the figure below for the second right-of-way line.
Click on Next.
Figure 6-62 Select Right of Way Lines
8. Enter the radius for the fillet to the first right-of-way line. See Figure 6-63 below for the fillet
to the right-of-way line. Click on Next.
9. Enter the Node IDs for the fillet. See Figure 6-63 below for the Nodes that are placed on the
fillet. Click on Apply to place the Nodes and then click on Next.
For more information about the Nodes that can be placed, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog
Box on page 14.
Figure 6-63 Place Fillet Nodes
206 COGO
10. Enter the Node IDs for the corners of the cul-de-sac. See the figure below for the Nodes that
are placed on the corners. Click on Apply to place the Nodes and then click on Next.
Figure 6-64 Place Nodes on Corners of Cul-de-sac
11. Enter the radius for the fillet to the second right-of-way line. See Figure 6-62 on page 206 for
the fillet to the right-of-way line. Click on Next.
12. Enter the Node IDs for the fillet. See Figure 6-63 on page 206 for the Nodes that are placed
on the fillet. Click on Apply to place the Nodes.
For more information about the Nodes that can be placed, see COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog
Box on page 14.
Figure 6-65 Finished Hammer Cul-de-sac
Chapter 6: Layout

208 COGO
REPORT
The Report commands allow you to query Nodes, unused ranges of
Nodes and station/offset information from points or Nodes.
CHAPTER
Areas can be queried by selecting bounding objects, closed regions,
defined lots or selecting bounding Nodes or points. Angles can be
determined by selecting Nodes, points or lines. Inverses can be calculated
by selecting points, Nodes, lines arcs and spirals. Stakeout reports can be
generated from selecting Nodes, closed regions and alignments. All but
the single station/offset report can be printed to a printer or to a file.
7
In this chapter:
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Report Unused Nodes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Single Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Report Station/Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Report Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Inverse Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Stakeout Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Stakeout Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Stakeout Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Chapter 7: Report 209

Report Nodes
COG O # REPORT # NODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgnode
ICON:
The Report Nodes command may be used to build a report of selected Nodes from the project. You can
use any of the standard methods of selecting Nodes from the drawing or the database.
For more information, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
The selected Nodes will report information such as Node ID, Northing, Easting, elevation, description,
layer/level, symbol and Field Code. The report can then be printed in a user-definable format. You may
choose the information and the order in which the information should appear in the report. You will also
be able to save the printing options as a default setting.
Figure 7-1 Report Nodes Dialog Box
Report Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Node ID This column displays the Node ID values.
Northing (Y) This column displays the Northing or Y coordinate values of the Nodes.
Easting (X) This column displays the Easting or X coordinate values of the Nodes.
Elevation This column displays the Elevation or Z coordinate values of the Nodes.
(Z)
Description This column displays the description values.
Layer/Level This column displays the layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or level (MicroStation) of each selected Node.
Symbol This column displays the symbol name of each selected Node. This will either be the name of the
block (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or cell (MicroStation).
Field Code This column displays the Field Code associated with each selected Node.
Print You may select what Node information and in what order you want to print the report. These settings
can be saved as the default for future reports. You may print the report to a file or the printer.
See COGO Print Options Dialog Box on page 16.
Clear You may clear the list of Nodes and reselect them from the project by clicking on this button.
Select This button allows you to display the Select Nodes dialog box or deselect Nodes to be reported. This
Nodes is only available if the Select Nodes dialog box has been closed.
210 COGO
QuickSteps
Chapter 7: Report
To display the information about Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Nodes.
The Report Nodes dialog box (Figure 7-1 on page 210) displays.
2. Choose the method by which you will select the Nodes to be included in the report.
3. Select the Nodes.
The selected Nodes will be listed in the Report Nodes dialog box with all the associated
information.
4. To clear the list of Nodes, click on the Clear button.
5. Click on the Print icon if you want to print the Nodes listed.
Report Unused Nodes

COG O # REPORT # UNUSED NODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgunused

The Report Unused Nodes command may be used to see which Node IDs are currently not in use in
the project.
You can report the Node ID ranges available in the entire project or check to see what Node IDs are not
being used within a specified range of Node ID values.
Figure 7-2 Report Unused Nodes Dialog Box
Report Unused Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Node ID This displays all of the Node IDs that have not been used in the project. This will display a single Node
ID, range of Node IDs and the last Node ID that was used.
All Turn this radio button on if you want to display all of the unused Nodes in the project.
Range Turn this radio button on if you want to display all of the unused Nodes within the range specified. Enter
the Node IDs that you want to search from and to in the From and To edit fields.
Print This icon allows you to print the unused Nodes that are listed.

QuickSteps
To display the unused Node IDs in your project, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Unused Nodes.
The Report Unused Nodes dialog box (Figure 7-2 on page 211) displays. The Node IDs that have
not been used in your project will be displayed.
2. Switch between All and Range to adjust the report as needed.
3. If you select the Range option, enter the Node ID in the From and To edit fields and click on
Apply.
Resolve Duplicate Nodes

COG O # REPORT # RESOLVE DUPLICATE NODES
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgdupnode
ICON:
The Resolve Duplicate Nodes command may be used to renumber, delete or arrange the coordinates
of duplicate Node IDs in the project.
You may have more than one occurrence of a Node ID within close proximity that have been placed as
a result of multiple recorded shots to the same location. Duplicate Nodes may also have been placed in
the project from an imported or inserted CAD graphic file, imported Nodes or attached external Node
database file.
Figure 7-3 Resolve Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box
Resolve Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Node ID This column displays the Node ID values.
Northing This column displays the Northing or Y coordinate values of the Nodes.
Easting This column displays the Easting or X coordinate values of the Nodes.
Elevation This column displays the Elevation or Z coordinate values of the Nodes.
Description This column displays the description values.
Layer/Level This column displays the layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or level (MicroStation) of each selected Node.
212 COGO
Resolve Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 7: Report
Symbol This column displays the symbol name of each selected Node. This will either be the name of the
block (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or cell (MicroStation).
Print This icon displays the Duplicate Nodes Print Options dialog box.
Renumber This will renumber the highlighted occurrence to the lowest available Node ID in the project. This
Node to option works on a Single Node ID.
Lowest
Available
Renumber This will renumber the highlighted occurrence to the next available Node ID in the project. To set
Node to Next the next available Node ID, see Entry Options on page 248. This option works on a single Node ID.
Available
Renumber This will renumber the highlighted occurrence to the value that is typed in the Node ID edit field.
Node to This option works on a Single Node ID.
Selected
Value
Delete This will delete all of the highlighted occurrences. This option works on the Multiple Node ID’s
Selected highlighted.
Node(s)
Keep Selected This will delete all the duplicate Node occurrences remaining in the dialog box with the same Node
Node(s), ID as the highlighted Node(s), except the highlighted occurrence(s). This option works on the
Delete Multiple Node ID’s highlighted.
Remaining
Duplicates
Average This will create one Node with the calculated average of the Northing, Easting and elevation
Coordinates & coordinate values for every highlighted Node ID in the dialog box. This option works on the
Elevations of Multiple Node ID’s highlighted.
Selected
Nodes
QuickSteps
To resolve the duplicate Node IDs in your project, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Resolve Duplicate Nodes.
The Resolve Duplicate Nodes dialog box (Figure 7-3 on page 212) displays. The duplicate Node
IDs in your project will be listed.
2. Highlight the Node(s) to be resolved.
3. Choose the resolution method from the drop list. If you have selected Renumber Node to
selected Value, enter the Node ID in the edit field.
4. Click on Apply to resolve the duplicate Node ID.

Single Station/Offset
COG O # REPORT # S ING LE S TATION/OFFSET
KEY-IN COMMAND: sstaoff
ICON:
The Single Station/Offset command may be used to graphically select a point to find a station and an
offset from any selected line, arc, spiral, complex object or alignment.
You may select any line, arc, spiral, complex object or alignment in the project to use as a basis for
stationing. You then select individual Nodes or points to report the station and offset values. You may
graphically select an alignment or choose one from the list of defined alignments in the project. When
selecting a point, the coordinates, station and offset values will track with your cursor. As soon as a
point is selected, the values will lock in.
! The Station and Offset edit fields are read only. This enables you to copy the reported value by
highlighting the text and performing a right mouse click-Copy. Alternatively use Ctrl+C on your
keyboard to copy the text.
! If the selected object is not an alignment, then a zero (0+00) station value will be assumed at the
nearest endpoint to where it was selected.
Figure 7-4 Single Station/Offset Dialog Box
Single Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

Defined Click on this button to select an alignment from the list of defined alignments in the project.
Alignments
PIC When starting this command, you can click on the PIC icon to select an alignment or object to base
the stationing on. After the alignment or object is selected graphically, click in the Node ID, Northing
or Easting edit field and click on the PIC button to select a Node or point to query a station and offset
value.
Node ID Type the Node ID to query a station and offset value or click in this edit field, click on the PIC button
and graphically select the Node.
Northing Type the Northing coordinate or click in this edit field, click on the PIC button and graphically select a
point.
Easting Type the Easting coordinate or click in this edit field, click on the PIC button and graphically select a
point.
Station This is the reported station or distance along the selected alignment or object.
Offset This is the reported offset or distance from the selected alignment or object.
Reset This allows you to select a different object or alignment for a basis of stationing.
214 COGO
QuickSteps
Chapter 7: Report
To report the station and offset values for a Node or point, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Single Station/Offset.
The Single Station/Offset dialog box (Figure 7-4 on page 214) displays.
2. Select an object or alignment for a basis of stationing. To select the object or alignment,
click on the Defined Alignments button and select an alignment or click on the PIC button
and graphically select an object from CAD.
3. Enter or graphically select a Node ID or coordinates to have the station and offset values
displayed.
4. Click on the Repeat button if you want to select a new object or alignment.
Report Station/Offset
COG O # REPORT # STATION/OFFSET
KEY-IN COMMAND: staoff

The Report Station/Offset command may be used to generate a station/offset report from any selected
line, arc, spiral, complex object or alignment.
You may select any line, arc, spiral or complex object in the project to use as a basis for stationing. You
may graphically select an alignment or choose one from the list of defined alignments in the project.
You then select individual Nodes or points to report the station and offset values. The points/Nodes may
be selected using any of the standard COGO selection methods available.
For more information on Node selection methods, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.
You may continue to build a selection set using different selection methods which will update in the
Report Station/Offset dialog box (below). A corridor edge or maximum offset distance from the
alignment may also be specified to further filter the selection set.
The report will display, if applicable, Node ID, station, offset, Northing, Easting, elevation, description,
CAD properties (layer/level), symbol and Field Code for each point selected.
! If the selected object is not an alignment, then a zero (0+00) station value will be assumed at the
nearest endpoint to where it was selected.
! The printed report may be sorted by any value in the report, including station, offset and Node ID.
Figure 7-5 Report Station/Offset Dialog Box

Report Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions
PIC Click on this button to graphically select a Node or Nodes from the CAD graphic.
Selection Mode This allows you to choose whether you are adding Nodes to the report or if you are removing
them from the report. If the selection mode is set to select when the Apply button is clicked, the
Nodes will be added to the report. If the selection mode is set to unselect, the Nodes will be
removed from the report when the Apply button is clicked.
Selection This allows you to choose the method that will be used to select or unselect Nodes.
Method
See COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7 for more information.
Node ID This is the Node ID for which you will get a station/offset report.
Northing This displays the Northing (Y) coordinates of the Node ID.
Easting This displays the Easting (X) coordinates of the Node ID.
Left Side, Less You may specify a left side corridor edge to narrow down the selected Nodes. If this option is
than or equal to checked on, type an offset distance for the left side of the selected alignment or object. If any of
the selected Nodes occur outside the offset distance entered, they will no longer be considered
as part of the selection set when the Apply button is clicked.
Right Side, Less You may specify a right side corridor edge to narrow down the selected Nodes. If this option is
than or equal to checked on, type an offset distance for the right side of the selected alignment or object. If any
of the selected Nodes occur outside the offset distance entered, they will no longer be
considered as part of the selection set when the Apply button is clicked.
Figure 7-6 Report Station/Offset Dialog Box

Alignment Name This displays the name of the selected alignment.
Length This displays the overall length of the selected alignment or object.
BOP This displays the beginning of a project station value or the starting station of the selected
alignment.
EOP This displays the end of a project station value or the ending station of the selected alignment.
Station This displays any station equations on the selected alignment.
Equations
Node ID This column displays the Node ID values that have been selected.
Station This column displays the reported station or distance along the selected alignment or object.
Offset This column displays the reported offset or distance from the selected alignment or object.
Northing This column displays the Northing or Y coordinate values.
Easting This column displays the Easting or X coordinate values.
Elevation This column displays the Elevation or Z coordinate values.
Description This column displays the description values for each Node selected.
216 COGO
Chapter 7: Report
Layer/Level This column displays the layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or level (MicroStation) of each selected
Node.
Symbol This column displays the symbol name of each selected Node. This will either be the name of
the block (AutoCAD/BricsCad or cell (MicroStation).
Print You may select what Node information and in what order you want to print the report. These
settings will be saved as the default for future reports. You may print the report to a file or to the
printer.
For more information, see COGO Print Options Dialog Box on page 16
Clear You may clear the list of Nodes and reselect them from the project.
QuickSteps
To report the station and offset values of Nodes or coordinates, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Station/Offset.
2. Graphically select an alignment or object in CAD using the PIC button or highlight a defined
alignment and click on Next.
The Report Station/Offset dialog boxes (Figure 7-5 on page 215 and Figure 7-6 on page 216)
display.
3. Choose the selection mode.
The available options are Select and Unselect.
4. Choose a selection method from the drop list.
5. Select the Nodes for which you want a station and offset report.
6. Specify a distance for the left and right corridor if desired.
7. Click on Apply.
The Nodes display and the station/offset values are reported.
Report Area
COG O # REPORT # A REA
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgarea
ICON:
The Report Area command allows you to choose between several methods to query a bounded area.
The methods are By Points, Objects, Eagle Point Boundary and Lots.
The Area by Points method allows you to determine the area of a region by selecting points or Nodes.
The points selected may be actual points on the boundary or they may be PI or RP points that further
define the area.
The Area by Objects method allows you to determine the area of a region bounded by selected lines,
arcs, spirals and complex objects. You may also select one object to get an area, or select more than
one geometrically closed complex object to determine an area bounded by those objects. That region is
then selected by choosing an internal point that is bounded by the selected objects.

The Area by Eagle Point Boundary method allows you to determine the area of a region bounded by
lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects by selecting an internal point. You may enter a tolerance value
that will artificially close a bounded region if it is not geometrically closed. The tolerance value is the
minimum distance allowed between two endpoints of bounding objects before these objects are closed
for the calculation of the area.
The Area by Lots method allows you to select a defined lot from the CAD graphic or from the lot
database.
The information that is displayed includes the region’s area and perimeter in the project’s working units.
A detailed explanation of each Node determined on the bounded region, including Node ID, Northing,
Easting and elevation, is also displayed. Each line segment of the bounded region is reported with
horizontal direction, vertical direction, horizontal distance, delta elevation and slope distance. Each arc
segment of the bounded region is reported with coordinate information for the point of curvature, radius
point, point of tangency and the point of intersection. Additional curve data includes the curve direction,
degree of curvature (arc and chord definitions), radius, delta angle, tangent length, arc length, chord
direction, chord length, external and middle ordinate.
All of the selection methods create an area report that includes the area, perimeter and an inverse of
each course taken along the boundary.
When a closed region is formed, the results will be displayed. The results can be printed to a file or to a
printer. For more information on the location of the printout, see Print Setup in the Eagle Point Menu
manual.
Figure 7-7 Report Area Dialog Box
Report Area Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select an object or internal point and have Eagle Point determine the
boundary, or a lot, depending on which method is selected. This option is not available when the
Select Points to Determine Area method is selected.
Select Points Select this option to determine an area by selecting the bounding points. You may type or
to Determine graphically select points or Nodes that are on the boundary, or define arc portions by selecting
Area points of intersection, points on a curve, or radius points.
Click on the Apply button to report the area by points. For more information on reporting the area
using points, see Report Area By Points on page 219.
Objects Select this option to determine the area of a region by selecting the bounding lines, arcs, spirals,
(select complex objects and closed objects. Upon selecting all of the defining objects, graphically pick an
graphically) internal point within the selected bounding objects to determine the area.
Click on the PIC button and graphically select the bounding objects. Press the Enter key when you
are done selecting objects in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device in
MicroStation. Select an internal point to determine the area. Click on Apply to view the reported
area.
For more information on reporting an area by selecting objects, see Report Area By Objects on
page 222.
218 COGO
Report Area Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 7: Report
Eagle Point Select this option to determine the area of a region by selecting an internal point of a region
Boundary bounded by lines, arcs, spirals, complex and closed objects. If the desired region is not
(select geometrically closed, you may type a tolerance value to close the region selected. The tolerance
internal point value is the minimum distance allowed between two endpoints of bounding objects before these
near objects are closed for the calculation of the area.
beginning)
Type a tolerance value and click on the PIC button. Select an internal point of a bounded region.
Click on Apply to view the reported area.
For more information on reporting an area using the Eagle Point Boundary option, see Report
Area By Eagle Point Boundary on page 223.
Tolerance The tolerance value is the minimum distance allowed between two endpoints of bounding objects
before these objects are closed for the calculation of the area. This option is only available when
the method of Eagle Point Boundary is selected.
Lots Select this option to determine the area of a defined lot. Type the name of the lot or select the lot
from the list of defined lots by clicking on the Defined Lots button.
Click on Apply to view the reported area.
For more information on reporting an area of a lot, see Report Area By Lots on page 225.
Lot Name This is the name of the lot. Type the name in the edit field or click on the Defined Lots button and
select one.
Defined Lots This allows you to select a COGO lot from a list of all lots that have been defined for the project.
Report Area This button allows you to control what is displayed in the Area report. Lot-specific information is
Settings only included if the Lots method is selected.
For more information, see Report Area Settings on page 225.
Report Area By Points

COG O # REPORT # AREA # POINTS
The Report Area by Points option allows you to determine an area by selecting the bounding points.
You may type or graphically select points or Nodes that are on the boundary or define arc portions by
selecting points of intersection, points on a curve or radius points.
Click on the Close Object button to close the area back on the first point. Click on the Show Area button
to display the area formed and the results of the area.
Figure 7-8 Report Area by Points Dialog Box
Report Area by Points Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to graphically select the Nodes or points between which to calculate the
angle.

Report Area by Points Dialog Box Definitions
Area by Points Select the option for entering or selecting Node IDs or coordinates to define the area. The
Options available options are: Line by Start and End Points; Curve by Start, Point of Intersection, End;
Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End; Curve by Start, Radius Point, End; Curve by Start, Radius
Length, End.
counterclockwise.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the icon or the word to change the direction
Counterclockwise of the curve. This is only available if the construction option is set to Curve by Start, Radius
Point, End or Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
line, end of line, start of curve, point of intersection, point on curve, radius point and end of
curve.
select them for the start of line, end of line, start of curve, point of intersection, point on curve,
radius point and end of curve.
Close Object Click on this button to join the last point selected with the first point selected in the command.
This option will only enable after three points have been selected.
Show Area Click on this button to display the reported area. You will need to select an internal point in case
there are any conflicts.
QuickSteps
To calculate the area of a region by selecting points or Nodes, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Area.
The Report Area dialog box (Figure 7-7 on page 218) displays.
2. Select the Points option and click on Apply.
The Report Area by Points dialog box (Figure 7-8 on page 219) displays.
3. From the drop list, choose a method for the type of object that you are defining.
4. Enter or graphically select Nodes or coordinates to define the area.
5. Click on the Close Object button to close the area.
6. Click on the Show Area button.
You are prompted to select a point.
7. Graphically select a point inside the region defined by the points.
The results are reported.
Example
This example shows how to create an area report of a region bounded by Nodes or points on lines in
the CAD graphic. You may enter Node ID values that exist in the project or select points graphically.
1. Select Reports ! Area and choose the Points option.
2. Click on Apply.
3. Determine whether the first course of the area is a line or an arc segment. The first course in
the example is a line segment.
220 COGO
4. Select Line by Start and End Points from the drop list. Click in the Northing edit field in the
Start of Line column and click on the PIC button. Graphically select the start point as shown
Chapter 7: Report
in the figure below.
Figure 7-9 Select Start Point
5. Continue to select each line end point in the CAD graphic until you need to change methods
of selection.
In the example, a cul-de-sac is approached with a known radius and an available radius point in the
CAD graphic.
6. Select the Curve by Start, Radius Point, End method and select the points from the CAD
graphic as shown in the figure below.
Figure 7-10 Enter Radius Point
7. On the next curve portion in this example, the only information available to recreate the
curve was to select a point on the curve itself. The curve is determined by using the Start
Curve, Point on Curve, End option. Graphically select the points as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 7-11 Select a Point on the Curve

8. To complete the area, the region needs to be closed. Click on the Close Object button when
you have entered the first point on which you started.
Figure 7-12 Closing the Area
9. Click on the Show Area button to display the defined area. Graphically select a point internal
to the area.
The results of the area will be displayed.
Report Area By Objects

COG O # REPORT # A REA # OBJECTS
The Report Area by Objects option allows you to determine an area by selecting a single closed object
or by selecting several bounding lines, arcs, complex objects or closed objects to calculate an area.
Select an internal point to properly define the selected region. Click on Apply to report the area.
QuickSteps
To calculate the area of a region bounded by selected lines, arcs, spirals or complex objects, complete
the following steps:
2. Select the Objects method.
3. Click on the PIC button and graphically select one or more objects that form a closed,
bounded region. When you are done selecting objects, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device in MicroStation.
4. Select an internal point inside of the closed region to define it.
5. Click on Apply to accept the bounded area.
The results of the area display.
6. If you want to print the results, click on the Print button.
Example
This example shows how to create an area report of a region bounded by lots or separate line, arc, or
spiral segments in the CAD graphic.
1. Select Report ! Area and choose the Objects (select graphically) option.
2. Click on the PIC icon.
222 COGO
3. Graphically select the objects to use to calculate an area as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 7: Report
Figure 7-13 Select Bounding Objects
4. Once you have selected all of the objects to completely enclose the area to be reported,
press the Enter key in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device in
MicroStation.
You are prompted to select an internal point.
5. Graphically select a point inside the area as shown in the figure below.
6. Click on Apply.
The results of the area are displayed.
Report Area By Eagle Point Boundary

COG O # REPORT # A REA # EAG LE POINT BOUNDARY
The Report Area by Eagle Point Boundary option allows you to determine an area by selecting an
internal point to properly define the selected region. You may specify a tolerance setting for a region
that may not be entirely closed. If the distance between the two endpoints falls within the tolerance
value, the region will be considered closed between those two endpoints. Click on Apply to report the
area.

QuickSteps
To calculate the area of a region bounded by lines, arcs, spirals and complex objects by selecting an
internal point, complete the following steps:
2. Select the Eagle Point Boundary method.
3. Enter the desired tolerance to automatically close the region selected.
4. Click on the PIC button.
5. Select an internal point inside of the closed region to define it.
6. Click on Apply to accept the bounded area.
The results of the area display.
7. If you want to print the results, click on the Print icon.
Example
This example shows how to create an area report of a region bounded by line, arc or spiral segments in
the CAD graphic.
2. Choose Eagle Point Boundary (select internal point near beginning) option.
3. Type 0.001 for the endpoint distance tolerance setting. This setting will automatically join
endpoints of objects that fall within the tolerance distance. This value entered is in the
current working units.
5. Pick a point inside of the area for which you wish to report an area as shown in Figure 7-15
below.
The Eagle Point Boundary is calculated from the selection of an internal point of bounding lines,
arcs, spirals and complex objects. The nearest endpoint of a bounding object to the internal point
selected is the start point for the boundary calculation.
224 COGO
The value specified for the tolerance is applied to each endpoint of the bounding selected objects.
If two endpoints fall within the tolerance value, COGO will connect the two endpoints with a line
Chapter 7: Report
segment for the purpose of closing the boundary. If the endpoints fall outside of the tolerance value,
then the Eagle Point boundary will continue to calculate the boundary until it meets at the same
coordinate at which it started or it is unable to find enough bounding objects. See the figure below
for an example.
Figure 7-16 Endpoint Gap Falls Within Tolerance
After the Eagle Point Boundary command has found a closed area with regard to any tolerance
settings, the closest intersection to the selected internal point will be the start point for the reported
inverse of the bounded region.
6. Click on Apply to display the results of the area.
Report Area By Lots

COG O # REPORT # A REA # LOTS
The Report Area by Lots option allows you to determine an area by selecting a defined lot from the list
of predefined lots or graphically selecting a lot from the CAD graphic.
You may type the lot name or click on the Defined Lots button to select a predefined lot. Click on Apply
to report the area.
QuickSteps
To select a defined lot graphically from the CAD graphic or from the lot database, complete the
following steps:
2. Choose Lots for the selection method.
3. Type the name of the lot or select one from the Lot Database by clicking on the Defined Lots
button.
4. Click on Apply.
The results for the area display.
5. If you want to print the results, click on the Print icon.
Report Area Settings

The Report Area Settings command allows you to control what is displayed in the area report. Since the
area report can be printed, it is also the information that is printed. You can control what items are
printed, the label for each item and what order the items are displayed in the area report. The items that
can be included in the report are Name, Description, ID, Owner, Square Feet (Square Meters), Acres
(Hectares), Perimeter, Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent Square Feet (Square Meters), Parent
Acres (Hectares), Percent of Parent and Closure Data. You can also include Node Descriptions in the
area report for any nodes that are placed on the object being reported. The lot specific items are only
displayed in the area report if a Lot is selected.

The items specific to Lots are Name, Description, Owner, Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent
Square Feet (Square Meters), Parent Acres (Hectares) and Percent of Parent.
Figure 7-17 Report Area Settings Dialog Box
Report Area Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Item Toggle on the items that you wish to display in the area report. The available items that can be placed in
the area report are Name, Description, ID, Owner, Square Feet (Square Meters), Acres (Hectares),
Perimeter, Parent Name, Parent Description, Parent Square Feet (Square Meters), Parent Acres
(Hectares), Percent of Parent and Closure Data. Lot-specific items are only displayed in the area report if
a Lot is selected. The items specific to Lots are Name, Description, Owner, Parent Name, Parent
Description, Parent Square Feet (Square Meters), Parent Acres (Hectares) and Percent of Parent.
Name Toggle this option on if you want the name of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also, specify the
label for the name and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Description Toggle this option on if you want the description of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also, specify
the label for the description and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
ID Toggle this option on if you want the ID of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also, specify the label
for the ID and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Owner Toggle this option on if you want the Owner of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also, specify the
label for the Owner and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Square Feet Toggle this option on if you want the area in Square Feet (Square Meters) to be displayed in the area
(Square Meters) report. Also, specify the label for the Square Feet (Square Meters) and the order it is to be placed into the
area report.
Acres (Hectares) Toggle this option on if you want the area in Acres (Hectares) to be displayed in the area report. Also,
specify the label for the Acres (Hectares) and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Perimeter Toggle this option on if you want the Perimeter of the object to be displayed in the area report. Also,
specify the label for the Perimeter and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Parent Name Toggle this option on if you want the Parent Name of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also,
specify the label for the Parent Name and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Parent Toggle this option on if you want the Parent Description of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also,
Description specify the label for the Parent Description and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Parent Square Toggle this option on if you want the Parent Square Feet (Square Meters) of the lot to be displayed in the
Feet (Square area report. Also, specify the label for the Parent Square Feet (Square Meters) and the order it is to be
Meters) placed into the area report.
Parent Acres Toggle this option on if you want the Parent Acres (Hectares) of the lot to be displayed in the area report.
(Hectares) Also, specify the label for the Parent Acres (Hectares) and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Percent of Toggle this option on if you want the Percent of Parent of the lot to be displayed in the area report. Also,
Parent specify the label for the Percent of Parent and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
226 COGO
Report Area Settings Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 7: Report
Option Function
Closure Data Toggle this option on if you want the Closure Data for the object to be displayed in the area report. Also,
specify the label for the Closure Data and the order it is to be placed into the area report.
Label This allows you to specify how each item is labeled in the area report. You can specify up to 128
characters for the label of each item. This option is available for any item that is toggled on.
Order This allows you to control the order the items are placed in the area report. The lowest number is placed at
the top of the area report and the highest number is placed at the bottom of the report.
Include Node Toggle this option on if you want to include any Node descriptions within the area report. Nodes only
Descriptions display if they are at the key points of the object being reported. The key points include endpoints, PC, PT,
RP and PI locations.
Report Angle
COG O # REPORT # A NG LE
KEY-IN COMMAND: angle
ICON:
The Report Angle command allows you to query an angle formed by three points or two line segments
in a project.
You may type or select Nodes or points, select line segments or complex objects to report the angles
formed by the objects. The information reported includes the angle queried in a user-definable format,
Node IDs, coordinates and tangent directions and distances.
Report Angle By Points

COG O # REPORT # ANG LE # POINTS
The Report Angle by Points command allows you to select three points to calculate the angle between.
You can enter or graphically select Nodes or coordinate points.
Figure 7-18 Report Angle By Points Dialog Box

Report Angle By Points Dialog Box Definitions
PIC This icon allows you to graphically select the Nodes or points between which to calculate the
angle.
Node ID This allows you to enter or graphically select an existing Node. You can select it for the start point,
vertex point and end point.
Northing/ This allows you to enter or graphically select the Northing (Y) and Easting (X) coordinates. You
Easting can select them for the start point, vertex point and end point.
Start to Vertex This displays the calculated horizontal direction and distance from the start point to the vertex
point.
Vertex to End This displays the calculated horizontal direction and distance from the vertex point to the end
point.
Start to End This displays the calculated horizontal direction and distance from the start point to the end point.
Vertex Angle You may choose to display the calculated angle as an angle right, angle left, deflection right or
deflection left. Selecting a different angle type will update the displayed vertex angle.
Print This icon allows you to print the angle report to a file or a printer.
For more information on the location where the report is printed, see Print Setup in the Eagle
Point Menu manual.
QuickSteps
To query an angle formed by three points, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Angle and choose Points.
2. Click on Apply.
The Report Angle By Points dialog box (Figure 7-18 on page 227) displays.
3. Enter or graphically select the start point.
4. Enter or graphically select the vertex point.
5. Enter or graphically select the end point.
6. Change the Vertex Angle option (if necessary).
The available angle options are angle right, angle left, deflection right and deflection left.
7. If you want to print the angle report, click on the Print icon.
8. Click on the Clear button to clear the edit fields to restart or select the next point to build off
of the last two points.
Example
This example shows how to calculate an angle by selecting Nodes or points in the CAD graphic. You
may enter Node ID values that exist in the project or select points graphically.
1. Select Report ! Angle and choose the Points option.
2. Click on Apply.
The Report Angle By Points dialog box (Figure 7-18 on page 227) displays.
3. Select the start point graphically as shown in Figure 7-19 on page 229.
4. Select the vertex point graphically as shown in Figure 7-19 on page 229.
228 COGO
5. Select the end point graphically as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 7: Report
Figure 7-19 Select Angle by Points
6. Select the angle type to report. You may choose from angle right, angle left, deflection right
or deflection left.
7. You may continue to query the next angle created by the current vertex and end point by
selecting a new end point. The first vertex then becomes the start point for the new angle.
Figure 7-20 Select Next Point
Report Angle By Lines

COG O # REPORT # A NG LE # LINES
The Report Angle by Lines command allows you to select line segments or complex objects to calculate
the angle between. If the lines do not intersect, the intersection point will be calculated and displayed as
the coordinates of the vertex.
Figure 7-21 Report Angle By Lines Dialog Box
Report Angle By Lines Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to graphically select the lines or complex objects between which to calculate
the angle.
Vertex Point This displays the Node ID (if applicable) and the Northing and Easting coordinate values of the
determined vertex location of the two line segments.

Report Angle By Lines Dialog Box Definitions
First Line This displays the determined direction, length and distance to the vertex for the first selected line
segment.
Second Line This displays the determined direction, length and distance to the vertex for the second selected
line segment.
Direction This displays the direction of the line segment. The direction is determined from the location in
which it was selected.
Length of Line This displays the length of the selected line segment.
Distance to This displays the distance from the vertex to the furthest endpoint of the line segment away from
Vertex the vertex.
Vertex Angle You may choose to display the calculated angle as an angle right, angle left, deflection right, or a
deflection left. Select a different angle type to update the displayed vertex angle.
Print This icon allows you to print the angle report to a file or printer.
For more information on the location where the report is printed, see Print Setup in the Eagle
Point Menu manual.
QuickSteps
To query an angle formed by lines, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Angle and turn on the Lines radio button.
2. Click on Apply.
The Report Angle By Lines dialog box (Figure 7-21 on page 229) displays.
3. Click on the PIC button and graphically select the first segment.
4. Graphically select the second segment.
5. Change the Vertex Angle option (if necessary).
The available angle options are angle right, angle left, deflection right and deflection left.
6. If you want to print the angle report, click on the Print icon.
Example
This example shows how to calculate an angle by selecting line segments in the CAD graphic. The line
segments may be separated or intersect each other.
1. Select Report ! Angle and choose Lines.
2. Click on Apply.
The Report Angle By Lines dialog box (Figure 7-21 on page 229) displays.
4. Graphically select the first segment as shown in Figure 7-22 on page 231.
230 COGO
5. Graphically select the second line segment as shown in the figure below.
Chapter 7: Report
Figure 7-22 Select Line Segments
The vertex angle displays.
Inverse Points
COG O # REPORT # INVERSE POINTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: invpoint
ICON:
The Inverse Points command may be used to query lines or arcs that are defined by Nodes or points.
You may type or select Nodes or points to report the inverse information between them. Points may be
entered as a range or one at a time. Curves may be defined by points of intersection, radius points or a
point on the curve, all entered individually.
The report will display, if applicable, the point type, Node ID, Northing, Easting, elevation, description,
Field Code, horizontal direction, vertical direction, horizontal distance, delta elevation and slope
distance to the next point.
Figure 7-23 Inverse Points Dialog Box

Inverse Points Dialog Box Definitions
Inverse Points Select the option for entering or selecting Node IDs or coordinates to report inverse
Options information. The available options are: Line by Start and End Points; Line by Range; Curve by
Start, Point of Intersection, End; Curve by Start, Point on Curve, End; Curve by Start, Radius
Point, End; and Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
If the option is set to Line By Start and End Points, you will need to enter or graphically select
two points.
If the option is set to Line By Range, you will need to enter or graphically select two Nodes.
Point, you need to enter or graphically select three points and specify if the direction of the
curve is clockwise or counterclockwise.
If the option is set to Radius Length for the curve option, you need to enter or select two
points graphically and enter a radius length and specify if the direction of the curve is
clockwise or counterclockwise.
PIC This icon allows you to select a Node ID or Northing and Easting coordinate pair from the
CAD graphic when focus is placed in the Node ID or Northing and Easting edit fields
respectively.
Clockwise/ This determines the direction of the curve. Click on the picture or the word to change the
Counterclockwise direction of the curve.
Radius This is the radius length of the curve. This will only be available if the inverse option is set to
Curve by Start, Radius Length, End.
Node ID This allows you to enter or graphically select an existing Node. You can select it for the start
of line, end of line, start of a range, end of a range, start of curve, point of intersection, point
on curve, radius point and end of curve.
select them for the start of line, end of line, start of range, end of range, start of curve, point of
intersection, point on curve, radius point and end of curve.
Print Click on this icon to print the report to a file or directly to the system printer.
See Print Setup in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
Clear List This will clear the list that displays the points inversed. This allows you to start over with a
new series of inverses.
QuickSteps
To inverse between points, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Inverse Points.
This displays the Inverse Points dialog box (Figure 7-23 on page 231).
2. From the drop list, select the method between which to enter Node or coordinates to
inverse.
3. Enter or graphically select Node IDs or coordinates between which to inverse.
For more information on selecting Nodes or coordinates, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page
5.
4. Click on Apply to display the inverse results in the list box.
5. Click on the Print icon if you want to print the inverse results.
6. Click on the Clear List button if you want to Clear the inverse results from the list box.
232 COGO
Inverse Object
Chapter 7: Report
COG O # REPORT # INVERSE OBJECT
KEY-IN COMMAND: invobject
ICON:
The Inverse Object command may be used to generate and print a report of the inverse of selected
lines, arcs, spirals or complex objects.
You may select objects from the CAD graphic and report the inverse information. Objects may be single
line segments, arcs, spirals or complex objects. The direction calculated is based on the location where
the object is selected. The closest endpoint of the object selected is the start of the inverse and is in the
direction of the object selected.
The report for line segments will display the object type, Node ID, Northing, Easting, elevation,
description, Field Code, horizontal direction, vertical direction, horizontal distance, delta elevation and
slope distance to the next endpoint.
The report for curve segments will display the object type and the following information for the curve:
PC, PT, RP, PI, Node ID, Northing, Easting, elevation, description and Field Code. The standard curve
data is also reported.
The report for spiral segments will display the object type and the following information for the spiral:
start point, end point, PI, Node ID, Northing, Easting, elevation, description and Field Code. The
standard spiral data is also reported.
! If a selected object contains a segment that is not a line, arc or spiral segment, the object will be
reported as an undefined object and will display its beginning and ending information as if it were a line
segment.
Figure 7-24 Inverse Object Dialog Box
Inverse Object Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select a new object to inverse from the CAD graphic.
Single Object Turn this option on if you want to display the inverse information for the selected segment of the
object only. If a complex object is selected, only the segment that is selected will be inversed.
Complex Object Turn this option on if you want to display the inverse of all segments of a complex object.

Inverse Object Dialog Box Definitions
Clear List This will clear the list that displays the inversed objects. This allows you to start over with a new
series of inverses.
QuickSteps
To inverse an object, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Inverse Object.
This displays the Inverse Object dialog box (Figure 7-24 on page 233).
2. Select Single Object or Complex Object for the type of inverse you want.
3. Graphically select an object from the CAD graphic. If you want to select additional objects,
click on the PIC button and select another object.
5. Click on the Clear List button if you want to Clear the inverse results from the list box.
Inverse Alignment
COG O # REPORT # INVERSE A LIG NM ENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: invalign

The Inverse Alignment command allows you to generate and print a report of the inverse of an
alignment.
You may select a defined alignment to generate an inverse report. The report includes all of the tangent
endpoints, curve PC and PT points and spiral TS, SC, CS and ST points along the alignment. The
information generated by the report includes the Node ID, the station value, Northing and Easting
coordinates and the direction and distance to next point for each point. Data for curves and spirals is
also reported along the alignment.
Figure 7-25 Inverse Alignment Dialog Box
Inverse Alignment Dialog Box Definitions

Alignment Name This displays the name of the selected alignment.
Length This displays the total calculated length of the selected alignment.
234 COGO
Inverse Alignment Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 7: Report
BOP This displays the beginning of the project station value.
EOP This displays the ending of the project station value.
Station This displays any station equations on the selected alignment.
Equations
QuickSteps
To inverse an alignment, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Inverse Alignment.
2. Highlight the alignment you want to inverse from the list or click on the PIC button and
graphically select an alignment.
3. Click on Next.
The Inverse Alignment dialog box (Figure 7-25 on page 234) displays.
Stakeout Points
COG O # REPORT # STAKEOUT POINTS
KEY-IN COMMAND: stakepoint

The Stakeout Points command allows you to generate and print a report for staking selected Nodes and
points.
Enter or graphically select an occupied point. Enter the backsight orientation. Select the Nodes and
points to generate a report for radial stakeout. The information generated by the report includes the
Node ID information for each occupied point, the angle/direction to each selected point and the
horizontal distance.
The report displays, if applicable, Node ID, angle/direction, distance, Northing, Easting, elevation,
description, CAD properties (layer/level), symbol and Field Code for each point selected.
For more information on selecting a Node or coordinates, see COGO Pick Point Dialog Box on page 5.
For more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9. For more
information on selecting Nodes, see COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box on page 7.

! To select a backsight Node/point, choose the Direction Point option. The resultant obtained from this
dialog box is a direction to the backsight. If you select the Backsight by Direction Point option, enter a
turned angle value of 0°00'00".
Figure 7-26 Stakeout Points Dialog Box
Stakeout Points Dialog Box Definitions

Occupied Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information from which the location that the angles or
directions to the stakeout points are calculated.
Backsight Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information for the backsight that the angles to the
stakeout points are calculated from. If the backsight was determined by a method other than
selecting a point, the values for the Node ID and coordinates will display as
N/A.
Backsight This displays the entered backsight direction.
Direction
Angle Type Select the angle type to display the calculated angles/directions. You may select one of the
following options: Angle Right, Angle Left, Deflection Right, Deflection Left, North Azimuth,
South Azimuth or Bearing
Node ID This column displays the Node ID values for each selected Node.
Angle This column displays the calculated angle to each selected Node using the selected angle type.
Distance This column displays the horizontal distance to each selected Node.
Elevation This column displays the Elevation or Z coordinate values for each selected Node.
Description This column displays the description values for each selected Node.
Northing This column displays the Northing or Y coordinate values for each selected Node.
Easting This column displays the Easting or X coordinate values for each selected Node.
Node.
the block (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or cell (MicroStation).
Print Options This icon allows you to customize how you want the Stakeout Points information printed.
QuickSteps
To stake out points, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Stakeout Points.
2. Enter or graphically select a Node or point for the occupied point. Click on Next.
236 COGO
Chapter 7: Report
3. Enter the backsight direction. Click on Next.
4. Select the Nodes that you want to radially stake out. Click on Apply to select the Nodes.
5. Click on Next.
The Stakeout Points dialog box (Figure 7-26 on page 236) displays.
6. If you want to print the radial stakeout, click on the Print icon.
Example
This example displays the occupied point and the backsight point that are used to stake out the points
along the lot line.
Figure 7-27 Stakeout Points Diagram
Stakeout Boundary
COG O # REPORT # S TAKEOUT BOUNDARY
KEY-IN COMMAND: stakebound

The Stakeout Boundary command may be used to generate and print a report for the radial stakeout of
a closed boundary. Enter or graphically select a Node or point for the occupied station. Enter the
direction of the backsight.
more information on direction options, see COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Select a boundary using one of the methods explained in the following paragraphs.
The Eagle Point Boundary method allows you to select a region bounded by lines, arcs, spirals and
complex objects by selecting an internal point. The point selected will determine the first occupied point
and the traverse direction around the boundary.

You may enter a tolerance value that will artificially close a region if it is not geometrically closed. The
tolerance value is the minimum distance allowed between two endpoints of selected objects before
these objects are closed for determining the boundary.
The Closed Object method allows you to select a closed complex object. The point selected on the
object will determine the first occupied point and the traverse direction around the boundary.
The Lots method allows you to select a defined lot graphically from the CAD graphic or from the lot
database.
The Stakeout Boundary will build the report from the boundary beginning point and find the angle/
direction and distance to the next boundary point to stake out.
All methods create a report that includes all of the endpoints or vertices of lines, curve PC and PT
points along the boundary. The information generated by the report includes the Node ID information
for each occupied point, the angle/direction to each point and the horizontal distance.
The report will display, if applicable, the point type, Node ID, angle/direction, distance, Northing,
Easting, elevation, description, CAD properties (layer/level), symbol and Field Code for each point
along the boundary.
! To select a backsight Node/point, choose the Direction Point option. The result obtained from this
dialog box is a direction to the backsight. If you select the Backsight by Direction Point method, enter a
Figure 7-28 Stakeout Boundary Method Dialog Box
Stakeout Boundary Method Dialog Box Definitions

PIC This icon allows you to select an object or internal point and have Eagle Point determine the
boundary from the CAD graphic. This option is not available when the Lots method is selected.
Eagle Point Select this option to determine a region to stakeout by selecting an internal point to properly
Boundary define the selected region.
(select internal
point near
beginning)
Tolerance Specify a tolerance setting for a region that may not be entirely closed. If the distance between
the two endpoints falls within the tolerance value, the region will be considered closed between
those two endpoints.
Closed Object Select this option to determine a region to stakeout by selecting a closed object.
(select
graphically)
Lots Select this option to select a defined lot from the list of predefined lots or graphically select a Lot
from the CAD graphic to stakeout. You may type the lot name or click on the Defined Lots
button to select a predefined lot.
Lot Name This is the name of the lot. Type it in the edit box or select it by clicking on the Defined Lots
button.
Defined Lots This allows you to select a COGO lot from a list of all lots that have been defined for the project.
238 COGO
Chapter 7: Report
Figure 7-29 Stakeout Boundary Report Dialog Box
Stakeout Boundary Report Dialog Box Definitions

Occupied Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information for the location from which the angles or
directions to the stakeout points are calculated.
Backsight Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information for the backsight that the angles to the
stakeout points are calculated from. If the backsight was determined by a method other than
selecting a point, the values for the Node ID and coordinates will display as
N/A.
Direction
South Azimuth or Bearing.
Angle This column displays the calculated angle to each selected Node using the selected angle type.
Distance This column displays the horizontal distance to each selected Node.
Elevation This column displays the Elevation or Z coordinate values for each selected Node.
Description This column displays the description values for each selected Node.
Point Type This displays the location of the Node along the boundary. If the Node occurs on a line segment,
it is a line type. If the Node occurs on an arc segment, it may be a PC, PT, PCC, or POC.
Northing This column displays the Northing or Y coordinate values for each selected Node.
Easting This column displays the Easting or X coordinate values for each selected Node.
Node.
the block (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or cell (MicroStation).
Print Options This icon allows you to customize how you want the Stakeout Boundary information printed.
QuickSteps (Eagle Point Boundary Option)

To generate a boundary stakeout report using the Eagle Point Boundary option, complete the following
steps:
1. Select Report ! Stakeout Boundary.
2. Select the starting occupied point by typing the Node ID or graphically selecting a Node or
point in CAD.

3. Enter the backsight direction by selecting a direction point or typing in the backsight
direction.
4. Select the Eagle Point Boundary option. Type a tolerance value to close regions that may
not be closed and click on the PIC button to select an internal point.
5. Graphically select a point inside the desired region.
The point you selected will also determine the beginning point of the boundary and the direction of
travel around the boundary. When you select a location, the program will do a radial trace to find
the closest line, arc, spiral or complex object.
6. Accept the selected area.
7. Select the desired Angle Type to display the report in and click on the Print icon to print the
report to a file or directly to the printer.
QuickSteps (Closed Object Option)

To generate a boundary stakeout report by the Closed Object option, complete the following steps:
point in CAD.
direction.
4. Select the Closed Object option and click on the PIC button.
5. Graphically select a closed complex object, such as a line string (MicroStation) or a polyline
(AutoCAD/BricsCad).
The point you selected will also determine the beginning point of the area and the direction of travel
around the area. When you select a location, the program will do a radial trace to find the closest
line, arc, spiral, or complex object.
6. Click on Next.
7. Select the desired Angle Type to display the report and click on the Print icon to print the
240 COGO
QuickSteps (Lots Option)
Chapter 7: Report
To generate a boundary stakeout report by the Lots option, complete the following steps:
point in CAD.
direction.
4. Select the Lots option.

5. Type the lot name, click on the Defined Lots button to select a lot from a list of defined lots
or click on the PIC button and graphically select a defined lot from the CAD graphic.
6. Click on Next.
7. Select the desired Angle Type to display the report and click on the Print icon to print the
Example
This example displays the initial occupied point and the backsight point that are used to stake out the
points along the lot line. It also shows the locations, in order, that will be occupied along the boundary.
Figure 7-30 Stakeout Boundary Diagram

Stakeout Alignment
COG O # REPORT # STAKEOUT A LIG NM ENT
KEY-IN COMMAND: stakealign

The Stakeout Alignment command allows you to select an alignment and generate a stakeout to each
centerline station at a desired interval. The stakeout data will be reported as though the alignment were
a traverse. From an initial occupied point and backsight, and angle and distance will be reported to the
Beginning of Project (BOP). From the BOP, angles and distances will be given to the center line
stations. Each significant point along the alignment, a PI, PC, PT, TS, SC, CS, ST or station equation
point will be used as a new occupied point for the stakeout.
! If the next significant point falls out of the specified maximum sight distance, the stakeout report will
automatically establish a new occupied station along the alignment.
Figure 7-31 Stakeout Alignment Interval Dialog Box
Stakeout Alignment Interval Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Alignments This is the overall station interval that is used for the entire alignment. This value will be applied to all line,
arc and spiral segments of the alignment. For example, if the alignment’s station interval is set to 50, all
stations that are a multiple of 50 will be calculated, 0+00, 0+50, 1+00, 1+50, etc., in addition to other
stations calculated, such as tangent stations relative to the PI, curve stations relative to the PC, spiral
stations relative to the TS/CS and station equation stations.
Tangents This is the station interval along tangent legs. You may specify to station the tangent sections Absolute or
Relative to the PT.
" Absolute: This will base the station interval on the starting station for the entire alignment and is
reported in even stations from there.
" Relative to PI: This will restart the station interval with each PI point along the alignment in
addition to the alignment interval.
Curves This is the station interval between curve shots. This can be set to either Absolute or Relative to PC.
" Relative to PC: This will restart the station interval with each PC along the alignment, in
addition to the alignment interval.
242 COGO
Stakeout Alignment Interval Dialog Box Definitions
Chapter 7: Report
Option Function
Spirals This is the station interval between spiral shots. This can be set to either Absolute or Relative to TS/CS.
" Relative to TS/CS: This will restart the station interval with each TS/CS point along the
alignment, in addition to the alignment interval.
The absolute and relative apply to the stationing method used for the shots to be taken. Absolute will apply
the station interval along the entire alignment. Station values that are a multiple of the alignment station
interval will be reported. For example, absolute with a station of 25 means stations of 2 +00, 2+25, 2+50,
2+75, 3+00, etc., would be reported.
Relative will apply the station interval from the current occupied point station. For example, if the station
interval for curves was set to 25, and the stationing method was set to relative to PC, and the PC has a
station value of 8+32.75, stations 8+57.75, 8+82.759+07.75, etc., would be calculated along the curve. In
addition, the alignment station interval would also be applied. Therefore, station 9+00 would also be
reported.
Maximum Sight This is the maximum distance that would be reported to a point along the alignment. When this length is
Distance reached, the occupied station will be traversed to the last calculated location within the range of the
maximum sight distance from the current occupied station. The stakeout report will continue from the new
occupied station, backsighting the previously occupied station.
Figure 7-32 Stakeout Alignment Report Dialog Box
Stakeout Alignment Report Dialog Box Definitions

Alignment This displays the selected alignment name, length, beginning of project (BOP) station value,
Information end of project (EOP) station value and any station equations that occur.
Occupied Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information for the starting location of the stakeout
report.
Backsight Point This displays the Node ID and coordinate information for the initial backsight that the first angle
is calculated from. If the backsight was determined by a method other than selecting a point, the
values for the Node ID and coordinates will display as N/A.
Direction
Point Type This displays the location of the point along the boundary. If the Node occurs on a line segment,
it is a line type. If the Node occurs on an arc segment, it may be a PC, PT, PCC or POC.
Station This displays the determined station value of the point along the alignment.
South Azimuth or Bearing. This column displays the calculated angle to each point along the
alignment using the selected angle type.

Stakeout Alignment Report Dialog Box Definitions
Distance to This column displays the determined horizontal distance to each point along the alignment from
Point the occupied station.
Print Options This icon allows you to customize how you want the Stakeout Alignment information printed.
QuickSteps
To generate an alignment stakeout report, complete the following steps:
1. Select Report ! Stakeout Alignment.
point in CAD. Click on Next.
direction. Click on Next.
4. Select the alignment to be reported by highlighting the alignment from the list of defined
alignments or by clicking on the PIC button and graphically selecting the desired alignment
from the CAD graphic.
5. Click on Next.
The Stakeout Alignment Station Interval dialog box (Figure 7-31 on page 242) displays.
6. Enter the desired stationing interval to report for the alignment and for the tangent, curve
and spiral portions along the alignment.
The maximum sight distance may also be set to automatically advance the occupied station along
the alignment when this distance is reached from the current occupied station.
7. Click on Next.
The Stakeout Alignment Report dialog box (Figure 7-32 on page 243) displays.
8. Click on the Alignment Information button if you want to view the station data for the
alignment.
9. Select the desired Angle Type to display the report.
10. Click on the Print icon to print the report to a file or directly to the printer.
Example
In this example, you are going to generate a stakeout report for an off-ramp alignment.
1. Select Report ! Stakeout Alignment.
2. Select the occupied station from which the initial portion of the stakeout report will be
generated. Type the Node ID or select a point from the CAD graphic.
244 COGO
3. Enter the backsight point or direction.
Chapter 7: Report
Figure 7-33 Compare Stationing to Mainline
4. Type the name, select the alignment from the list of defined alignments or graphically select
an alignment to generate a stakeout report.
5. Specify what station interval you would like to report each segment type.
For the curve and spiral stations, they may be reported at the interval using the overall stationing
(absolute) or at the interval starting at the start of the curve (PC) or spiral (TS/CS) station. You may
also set the maximum sight distance for the EDM/total station that will be used for the stakeout.
When the maximum sight distance is exceeded, the report calculates the new set-up station along
the alignment (PC, PT, or spiral station).
6. Choose the type of angle or direction to use in the report.
7. Click on the Print icon to print the stakeout report of the alignment.

246 COGO
SETTINGS
In this chapter:
CHAPTER
Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Command Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Launch COGO Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Command Line COGO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Command Line COGO Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Chapter 8: Settings 247

Entry Options
COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgopt

You may set initial Entry Options to customize how information is prompted to you, placed in the CAD
graphic or reported in a dialog box or print out. The flow of certain commands may also be set up so
that they are more tailored to your type of work.
Use the Entry Options command to establish your work environment the way you want it. You may also
save the settings to be used as your defaults. Once the settings are saved, they are used for every new
project that is created.
Entry Options – Defaults Tab

COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS # DEFAULTS TAB
The Defaults tab in the Entry Options command is used to set the default direction type, distance option
and angle type that are typically used in your work session. For example, you may prefer to select two
points in the CAD graphic to obtain a distance value versus typing in the distance. COGO Entry Options
allows you to set all three input types to the most applicable default setting.
! If you do not want to see the Settings dialog box each time a COGO command is issued, turn off the
Start Procedural commands with Settings dialog box toggle.
! If you want to save the settings to be used as the defaults for new projects, toggle on the Save Settings
as Defaults option. The settings are written to the ...\SUPPORT\CG directory and used for every new
Figure 8-1 Entry Options Dialog Box – Defaults Tab
248 COGO
Entry Options Dialog Box – Default Tab Definitions
Option Function
Direction Type For the procedural type dialog boxes that are used in COGO, the standard direction dialog box may take
several different forms. You may select the direction type to be the default when using these commands.
For more information on the direction types described in the following section, see COGO Direction Dialog
Box on page 9.
" Absolute: COGO will always default to a North East Bearing. To change the Absolute default,
you may select one of the following direction types:
North East Bearing
South East Bearing
Chapter 8: Settings
South West Bearing
North West Bearing
North Azimuth
South Azimuth
" Geometric: This allows you to enter a geometric type direction.
" Direction Point: You may type a Node ID or coordinate value or graphically select a point in the
CAD graphic to determine the direction. The direction is calculated from the current occupied
point to the point selected.
" Two Points: You may type two Node IDs or coordinate values or graphically select two points in
the CAD graphic to determine the direction. The direction is calculated from the first point
selected to the second point selected.
" Backsight by Absolute: You may set the backsight direction using any of the absolute direction
types, followed by entering a turned angle. You may set the default angle type as well, as shown
in Figure 8-1 on page 248.
" Backsight by Geometric: You may set the backsight direction by entering a geometric
direction, followed by entering a turned angle.
" Backsight by Direction Point: You may set the backsight direction by typing a Node ID or
coordinate value or graphically selecting a point in the CAD graphic to determine the direction.
The direction is calculated from the current occupied point to the point selected. You then may
enter the angle turned from the backsight point.
" Backsight by Two Points: You may set the backsight direction by typing two Node IDs or
coordinate values or graphically selecting two points in the CAD graphic to determine the
direction. The direction is calculated from the first point selected to the second point selected.
You then may enter the angle turned from the established backsight direction.
Distance For the procedural type dialog boxes that are used in most of the commands in COGO, the standard
Options distance dialog box may take several different forms. You may select the distance option to be the default
when using these commands.
For more information on the distance options, see COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
" Horizontal Distance: You may type in a distance or select a line or arc segment to get a
horizontal distance.
" Distance to Node/Point: You may type a Node ID or coordinate value or graphically select a
point in the CAD graphic to determine the horizontal distance. The distance is calculated from
the current occupied point to the point selected.
" Two Points: You may type two Node IDs or coordinate values or graphically select two points in
the CAD graphic to determine the direction. The direction is calculated from the first point
selected to the second point selected.
" Slope Distance: When slope distance is entered, you may select the method of input from the
Slope Method Options drop list. In addition, for each option you need to type the slope distance,
height of instrument and the height of target.
Angle Type You may select the angle type most used as a default. You may select from Angle Right, Angle Left,
Deflection Right and Deflection Left.
For more information, refer to COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Start Procedural Toggle this on if you want the Settings dialog box displayed at the start of each procedural command.
Commands With Settings on this dialog box include batch processing, placement type, print audit trail and scale Z
Settings Dialog (Elevation).
Box

Entry Options Dialog Box – Default Tab Definitions
Option Function
Save Settings as Toggle on this option if you want the Entry Options specified to be used as the defaults for any new
Defaults projects. When this option is toggled on and the OK or Apply button is pressed, the Entry options are
written to the ...\SUPPORT\CG folder. The settings in the ...\SUPPORT\CG folder are used for every new
Entry Options – Instrument Tab

COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS # INSTRUM ENT TAB
The Instrument tab in the Entry Options command allows you to set the instrument height and target
height as the default values for commands that are used to calculate a horizontal distance from a slope
distance.
! If you change the instrument or target heights while in a command, those old values will be retained for
as long as you are in that command. The new values will take effect the next time the command is run.
Figure 8-2 Entry Options Dialog Box – Instrument Tab
Entry Options Dialog Box – Instrument Tab Definitions

Option Function
Instrument Enter the default Instrument Height that will appear on COGO dialog boxes.
Height
Target Height Enter the default Target Height that will appear on COGO dialog boxes.
Entry Options – Node Placement Tab

COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS # NODE PLACEM ENT TAB
The Node Placement tab in the Entry Options command allows you to control the default starting Node
ID, Elevation, Field Code and description for any COGO command by settings the options on the Node
Placement tab. The starting Node ID may be set and Elevations of Nodes may be set to a constant
value or they may inherit the elevation of a CAD object that they are snapped to or placed along.
250 COGO
The Default Field Code and descriptions may also be set. You may also set default description prefixes
and suffixes to save time typing long, repetitious Node descriptions.
Chapter 8: Settings
Figure 8-3 Entry Options Dialog Box – Node Placement Tab
Entry Options Dialog Box – Node Placement Tab Definitions

Option Function
Node ID Type the starting Node ID value to use. This will appear as the default for each Node to be placed. If the
Node ID already exists in the project when the Node is being placed, the Point Protection dialog box will
display if the option is enabled.
Refer to Point Protection in the Eagle Point Menu manual for more information.
Elevation When placing Nodes, select Constant or Inherit from the drop list. If you use Constant, enter the desired
value in the adjacent edit box. Choosing the Inherit options will set the elevation of the Node to place at
the elevation of the object selected.
Field Code Select a Field Code to use from the drop list of Field Codes. This list is taken from the current Node (Field
Code) Library in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Description Set the default for descriptions for COGO commands that place Nodes. Choose between Default
Description, Use Field Code and Use Command Default.
" Default Description: You may type the description to be used as the default for placement of a
Node description. This will serve as the default for all Node placements.
! The Default Description will override all default descriptions EXCEPT for the Nodes placed during the
Snap Nodes to Objects command.
" Use Field Code: You may set the description for each Node placed to default to the Field Code
description.
" Use Command Default: You may type the description to be used as a default for placement of
a Node description. This, however, will only serve as a default for all Node placements that do
not have an automatic description (i.e. curve, spiral and tangent Nodes).
Description You may type a common prefix to be applied to all of the descriptions that are placed with each Node by
Prefix toggling this option on.
Description You may type a common suffix to be applied to all of the descriptions that are placed with each Node by
Suffix toggling this option on.
Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab

COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS # M APCHECK TAB
The Mapcheck tab in the Entry Options command allows you to set the desired precision for traversing
and displaying mapchecks. This will affect the reported angle, distance, coordinates and closure
precision so that closures can be generated from closed lots. You may also specify whether mapchecks
are run along the chords of curves or through the radius points.
! The precision settings in the Entry Options dialog box – Mapcheck Tab (Figure 8-4 on page 252)
override the precision settings for the system when generating lot reports from COGO.

For more information on system precision, see Precision in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Figure 8-4 Entry Options Dialog Box – Mapcheck Tab
Entry Options Dialog Box – Mapcheck Tab Definitions

Option Function
Angle You may set the angle precision by moving the slide bar to the desired value. The angle precision values
range from the nearest degree to 0.01 seconds.
Distance You may set the distance precision by moving the slide bar or typing the desired value. Distance precision
values range from zero places to eight places to the right of the decimal point.
Coordinates You may set the coordinates precision by moving the slide bar or typing the desired value. Coordinate
precision values range from zero places to eight places to the right of the decimal point.
Closure You may set the closure precision by moving the slide bar or typing the desired value. Closure precision
values range from zero places to eight places to the right of the decimal point.
Run Traverses Toggle on this radio button to traverse curves by proceeding from a PC to the radius point and then out to
Through Radius the PT.
Points
Run Traverse Toggle on this radio button to traverse curves by proceeding from the PC directly to the PT by using the
Along Chords chord direction and distance.
Entry Options – Audit Trail Tab

COG O # SETTING S # ENTRY OPTIONS # A UDIT TRAIL TAB
The Audit Trail tab in the Entry Options command allows you to choose whether to include Node
descriptions and Field Codes in the audit trail report. The audit trail is a report that most COGO
commands create to record the information that was modified during that command. Use the Toggles
command to turn on or off the Audit Trail.
Figure 8-5 Entry Options Dialog Box – Audit Trail Tab
252 COGO
Entry Options Dialog Box – Audit Trail Tab Definitions
Option Function
Print Node Toggle this option on if you want the descriptions of the Nodes to appear in the Audit trail.
Description in
Audit Trail
Print Node Field Toggle this option on if you want the Field Codes of the Nodes to appear in the Audit Trail.
Code in Audit
Trail
Chapter 8: Settings
Toggles
COG O # SETTING S # TOG G LES
KEY-IN COMMAND: cgtoggle

The Node/Object placement toggles allow you to control what objects are placed when using certain
COGO commands. You may control whether Nodes or objects are placed in the project and whether
the objects are drawn in 2-D or 3-D. The only commands that use the Draw 3-D Lines option are Field
Data Traverse and Construct Polar Line.
! You may also control the Audit Trail default for COGO by using the toggle.
Figure 8-6 Toggles Dialog Box
Toggles Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Placement Type This allows you to control what will be placed by a command. The available options are Place Nodes,
Place Objects and Place Nodes and Objects.
" Place Nodes: When the option is set to Place Nodes, lines, arcs and spirals will not be placed
in the CAD graphic. This setting is particularly useful when using a routine that places sideshots.
You want to place the Nodes, but not necessarily the radiating lines from the occupied point.
" Place Objects: When the option is set to Place Objects, Nodes will not be placed in the project.
However, lines, arcs and spirals will be placed into the CAD graphic.
" Place Nodes and Objects: This places both Nodes and objects in the project.
Draw 2-D Lines Lines will be drawn in 2-D only. The starting point elevation will be used for the entire object when it is
placed in the CAD graphic.
Draw 3-D Lines Lines may be drawn in 2-D or 3-D. Three-dimensional lines are only created by the Field Data Traverse
and Construct Polar Line commands.
Print Audit Trail The Audit Trail will print automatically at the end of each COGO command that is run that produces an
Audit Trail.
! Setting the Print Audit Trail toggle here will serve as the default unless it is set differently in the
individual settings for the command.

Command Line Settings
COG O # SETTING S # COM M AND LINE SETTING S
KEY-IN COMMAND: clcset

The Command Line Settings command allows you to set options for various aspects of Command Line
COGO. You can choose whether you want the COGO Command Line to automatically appear
whenever the COGO product is launched. You may also specify that the main COGO palette should
minimize whenever Command Line COGO is launched to save on screen real estate.
The Aliases button on the Command Line Settings dialog box (below) provides access to define how
you want to invoke certain Command Line COGO commands. The Editor button allows you to set
which editor you want to use when editing Command Line COGO batch files. If the Save Settings As
Default toggle is on, the current settings specified are saved globally to the DEFAULT.CG file in the
...\EGPT\SUPPORT\CG folder.
Figure 8-7 Command Line Settings Dialog Box
Command Line Settings Dialog Box Definitions

Option Function
Always Display Use this option to have the COGO Command Line dialog box (Figure 8-10 on page 256) appear whenever
Command Line COGO is selected from the Products menu.
COGO
Always Minimize When this option is toggled on, the main COGO menu palette is minimized whenever the COGO
the COGO Menu Command Line is launched.
Aliases Click on this button to display the Command Aliases dialog box (Figure 8-8 on page 255). This is where
you can customize the key-in commands for the various Command Line COGO commands.
For more information see Command Aliases, below.
Editor Use this button to display the Select Editor dialog box (Figure 8-9 on page 255). This is where you set the
editor that you want to use when editing your batch files.
For more information see Select Editor on page 255.
Save Settings Toggle this option on if you want to save your current settings as the default for all new projects.
As Default
Command Aliases
COG O # SETTING S # COM M AND LINE SETTING S # A LIASES
This command allows you to customize the command key-ins for the available Command Line COGO
commands. In the list, highlight the command name you wish to change and enter the new command
alias in the Alias edit field. Press the Enter key to accept the value and move to the next item in the
command listing. Every command alias must be unique and not left blank. You can print the list of
commands and their aliases using the Print button.
The command aliases are written to the ALIAS.DAT file in the …\EGPT\SUPPORT folder. If you are
sharing the SUPPORT folder across a network, everyone must be using the same command aliases.
When batch files are processed the current command aliases are used to interpret the commands.
254 COGO
For a listing of what each command is used for, refer to Command Line COGO Commands on page
258.
Chapter 8: Settings
Figure 8-8 Command Aliases Dialog Box
Command Aliases Dialog Box Definitions

Command Name This is a list of the commands which have aliases assigned to them.
Alias You can edit an alias in the list by highlighting its row in the list and typing the new alias in the
edit field. Press the Enter key to accept the change.
Print This icon allows you to print the command aliases to a file or printer.
For more information on the location to which the command aliases are printed, see Print Setup
in the Eagle Point Manual.
Select Editor
COG O # SETTING S # COM M AND LINE SETTING S # EDITOR
Use the Editor button on the Command Line Settings dialog box (Figure 8-7 on page 254) to specify the
editor to use when editing COGO Command Line batch files.
Figure 8-9 Select Editor Dialog Box
Select Editor Dialog Box Definitions

Editor Select the editor you wish to use when editing COGO Command Line batch files. Choose from MS
Name DOS Editor, Notepad, Wordpad or User Defined.
Editor File For each editor, type the path and file name, or select the editor by clicking on the folder icon. You may
select any editor as the User Defined option. When saving a file from a User Defined editor, save as
TEXT only.

Launch COGO Command Line
COG O # SETTING S # LAUNCH COG O COM M AND LINE
KEY-IN COMMAND: clcogo

This command launches the COGO Command Line dialog box (Figure 8-10 below) to allow input of
Command Line COGO (CLC) commands. This dialog box acts as the primary interface to Command
Line COGO. Input is generally taken one piece at a time using the Enter key to advance you to the next
prompt. You may record the command entries to a batch file to edit and replay later; however an active
batch file is not necessary to run CLC commands. The COGO Command Line may also be minimized
while not in use to save space on your screen.
When the command prompt displays, “Command:” you must enter one of the supported CLC aliases to
begin entering data. If you type something other than a supported CLC command, that entry is “sent”
over to the CAD environment to be interpreted by the CAD engine.
For example, if you type “zoom” on the COGO Command Line, the native CAD zooming command will
be executed on the CAD command line. Non-CLC commands are not written to the history or active
batch file.
Each CLC command has its own sequence of prompts. After you enter the data for the specified prompt
you use the Enter key to advance to the next prompt. If you find yourself in the wrong command, use
the Esc key to cancel the current command and return to the Command: prompt. There are no native
undo capabilities; however, using a batch file allows you to continue entering data after a mistake and
then edit the batch file and replay it. Use the Manage Command Line Batch Files icon on the COGO
Command Line dialog box (below) to add, edit and replay batch files.
The COGO Command Line also provides a command history showing you the CLC commands entered
during this session. Even though the history window is not displayed, data is being written to it. Use the
Show/Hide History Window icon on the dialog box to display the Command Line COGO History dialog
box. You may also display a help window that shows the sequence of prompts for the current
command. Use the Command Sequence Help icon to display this dialog box. The current command
and various other prompts are displayed to the lower left corner of the COGO Command Line.
For a list of available commands refer to Command Line COGO Commands on page 258.
Figure 8-10 COGO Command Line Dialog Box
COGO Command Line Dialog Box Definitions

Active Batch This static text label displays the current batch file. If the Record icon (see Start/Stop
Recording Batch File on page 257) is pressed in, the commands entered on the COGO
Command Line are written to the batch file specified. If the Record icon is in the Stopped
position (up) the commands entered on the command line are not saved to the active batch
file. You can change the active batch file by using the Manage Command Line Batch Files
button and highlighting the desired batch file description. A batch file is not necessary in order
to use Command Line COGO.
Manage Select this option to add, copy and remove batch files from the current project.
Command
For more information see Manage Command Line Batch Files on page 257.
Line Batch
Files
256 COGO
COGO Command Line Dialog Box Definitions
Start/Stop This two-state icon controls whether or not commands are written to the active batch file.
Recording When the icon is gray (up) nothing is being written to the active batch file. When the button is
Batch File red (pressed in), commands are written to a batch file that can be edited and replayed. Using
this button is the same as using the Start Batch and End Batch commands on the command
line.
For more information, see Start Batch Recording on page 260 and End Batch Recording on
page 260.
Show/Hide This two-state icon is used to control the display of the Command Line History window. After
Chapter 8: Settings
History successfully entering the data for a command, the History window updates. Even if the History
Window dialog box is not displayed, information is saved to it. The History lists all the commands
entered during the current Command Line COGO session until the COGO Command Line
dialog box is closed. The History Window can be resized by dragging the lower right-hand
corner of the dialog box. When the Show/Hide history Window icon is pressed in, the
Command Line History window is displayed at the size and last location at which it was open.
PIC The Pick in CAD (PIC) button is used for various commands and options. When you are able
to select something in CAD pertaining to the current command, the PIC button enables. Items
that may be selected in CAD include Nodes when prompted for an Occupied Node, lines and
arcs when prompted for directions and distances and alignments when prompted for an
alignment.
Command This is the main input field for entering commands and data. When the prompt displays
Edit field Command, you may enter any of the Command Line COGO command aliases. If you enter
something other than a valid COGO command, that key-in is sent to the CAD command line
and issued in CAD. That way you may enter CAD commands directly into the COGO
Command Line edit field. When a COGO command is recognized, this prompt changes
according to the context of the command.
To see a list of available commands refer to Command Aliases on page 254. To see a list of the
command prompt and their valid inputs refer to Command Line COGO Input Fields on page
278.
Command This two-state icon controls the display of the fly-out help that lists the sequence of inputs for
Sequence the current command. When it is pressed in, a fly-out dialog box displays the order of the
Help prompts for the current command. When the button is raised, the fly-out dialog box closes.
Manage Command Line Batch Files

COG O # S ETTING S # LAUNCH COG O COM M AND LINE # M ANAG E COM M AND LINE BATCH FILES
This command is used to add, copy or remove batch files from the current project. This is also where
you can set the active batch file, edit a batch file or preview or play batch files.
The list is multi-select capable to allow you to delete, preview or play more than one batch file. Highlight
more than one batch file by using the Shift or Ctrl keys in combination with your mouse.
Figure 8-11 Manage Command Line Batch Files Dialog Box

Manage Command Line Batch Files Dialog Box Definitions
Description This is the description of the batch file that appears on the COGO Command Line when a batch
file is set active.
File Name This is the location and name of the batch file.
Date This is the date the batch file was last modified.
New Command Use this icon to attach a new batch file to the current project. Enter the Batch File description
Line Batch File and File name. Enter a new file name to create a new batch file or select an existing batch file to
attach it to the current project. This allows you to edit a batch file in an external editor and then
attach it to use in the current project.
Modify Use this icon to change the description or file path and file name for the highlighted batch file.
Command Line
Batch File
Copy Command Use this icon to make a copy of the highlighted batch file. You must enter a unique description
Line Batch File and file name for the copied batch file.
Delete Use this icon to remove the highlighted batch file(s) from the listing or to permanently delete the
Command Line file from its drive location.
Batch File
Edit Use this button to open the highlighted batch file in the editor specified in the Command Line
COGO Editor settings. Be sure to leave the header information in at the top of the batch file.
Preview Click on this button to display the highlighted batch file(s) in the OpenGL Preview dialog box.
This allows you to graphically view your batch files before placing the objects into CAD.
For more information refer to Preview Object in the Eagle Point Menu manual.
Play Use this command to process the highlighted batch file(s) into CAD. If the Erase on Replay
toggle is on, objects previously placed by this batch are removed and replaced. If the toggle is
off, duplicate objects will be placed into CAD.
Erase on Replay Use this toggle to control whether or not items placed by the highlighted batch file(s) are deleted
before being replaced.
Command Line COGO Commands

The following table lists the available Command Line COGO commands and default aliases. Enter the
command aliases on the COGO command line.
Commands Alias
Command Aliases alias
Command Sequence Help ?
Command Line History hist
Draw Lines Only dl
Draw Nodes Only dn
Draw Lines and Nodes dln
Comment cm
Start Batch Recording stbatch
End Batch Recording ebatch
Place Node by Coordinates pn
Place Node by Station/Offset so
Place Polar Point pp
258 COGO
Commands Alias
Start Traverse/Sideshot sttrav
End Traverse etrav
Place Traverse Sideshot ss
Place Traverse Point (Angle) tpa
Place Traverse Point (Direction) tpd
Place Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) tcr
Chapter 8: Settings
Inverse Points ip
Inverse Curve (POC) icpoc
Inverse Curve (RP) icrp
Two Point Offset 2po
Intersect Direction-Direction drdr
Intersect Direction-Distance drdt
Intersect Distance-Distance dtdt
Inverse Angle iang
Inverse Station and Offset iso
Inverse Two Point Offset i2po
Zoom Node zn
Command Aliases
KEY-IN COMMAND: alias
Issue this command to access the listing of command aliases.
For more information refer to Command Aliases on page 254.
Command Sequence Help

KEY-IN COMMAND: ?
Issue this command to display the Help dialog box, which shows the command prompt sequence. This
is the same as selecting the Help button on the COGO Command Line dialog box (Figure 8-10 on page
256).
Command History
KEY-IN COMMAND: hist
Issue this command to display the command history dialog box. This dialog box shows the sequence of
commands issued and the data entered for each command since starting the current COGO Command
Line session. This is the same as selecting the Command Line COGO History button on the COGO
Command Line dialog box (Figure 8-10 on page 256).

Draw Lines Only
KEY-IN COMMAND: dl
Issue this command to have only lines placed when using the Place Polar Point, Place Traverse Point
(Angle), Place Traverse Point (Direction), Place Traverse Curve and Place Traverse Sideshot
commands. After entering the command there are no further inputs. This command sets the option in
the COGO Toggles command.
Draw Nodes Only

KEY-IN COMMAND: dn
Issue this command to have only a Node placed when using the Place Polar Point, Place Traverse
Point (Angle), Place Traverse Point (Direction), Place Traverse Curve and Place Traverse Sideshot
Draw Lines and Nodes

KEY-IN COMMAND: dln
Issue this command to have Lines and Nodes placed when using the Place Polar Point, Place Traverse
Point (Angle), Place Traverse Point (Direction), Place Traverse Curve and Place Traverse Sideshot
Start Batch Recording

KEY-IN COMMAND: stbatch
Issue this command to start recording the commands that follow to the active batch file. Set the Active
batch file by highlighting it in the Manage Command Line Batch Files dialog box (Figure 8-11 on page
257). A batch file is not necessary to run Command Line COGO. This is the same as using the Start/
Stop Recording Batch File button on the COGO Command Line.
End Batch Recording

KEY-IN COMMAND: ebatch
Issue this command to stop recording to the active batch file. This is the same as using the Start/Stop
Recording Batch File button on the COGO Command Line.
Comment
KEY-IN COMMAND: cm
Issue this command to enter a note into the active batch file. Comment lines are for informational
purposes only and are not processed.
260 COGO
Example
Command: cm
Comment: USED AS EVIDENCE OF PROPERTY COR.
This comment precedes the entry of a property corner to further document this particular shot.
Place Node by Coordinates
Chapter 8: Settings
KEY-IN COMMAND: pn
This command allows you to place a Node at specified Northing, Easting, Elevation coordinates. You
may enter the coordinates directly into the edit field or use the PIC icon to graphically select the
Northing and Easting.
Refer to Command Line COGO Input Fields on page 278 for additional information about valid input.
Place Node (Coordinates) Command Sequence
Northing
Easting
Elevation
New Node ID
Field code
Description
Example
Command: pn
Northing: 5000
Easting: 5000
Elevation: 452.74
New Node ID: 25
Field Code: BM
Description: Mon. 1
A new Node with ID 25 is placed at the Northing-Easting coordinate of 5000,5000 with an elevation of
452.74. The field code BM places the Node symbol and it has an overwritten description of “Mon. 1.”
Place Node by Station/Offset

KEY-IN COMMAND: so
This command allows you to place a Node at a specified Station and offset based on the alignment
named. Enter the alignment name or use the PIC button to graphically select the alignment in CAD.
Then enter the station and offset along that alignment that you want to place a new Node at.

Place Node (Station/Offset) Command Sequence
Alignment
Station
Offset
New Node ID
Elevation
Field Code
Description
Example
Command: so
Alignment: cl1
Station: 750
Offset: -24
Elevation: 421.5
New Node ID: 40
Field Code: 72
Description: Lot Corner
A new Node with ID 40 is placed at station 7+50 along the CL1 alignment at an offset of 24 to the left
and an elevation of 421.5. The Field Code 72 places the Node symbol and it has an overwritten
description of “Lot Corner.”
Place Polar Point

KEY-IN COMMAND: pp
This command allows you to place a Node or line or both (depending on the Draw Lines and Nodes
setting) based on occupying a Node/point and entering a Horizontal direction, distance and vertical
attribute.
Place Polar Node Command Sequence
Occupied Node
Horizontal Direction
Distance
Vertical Attribute
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
262 COGO
Examples
Example 1:
Command: pp
Occupied Node: 999
Horizontal Direction: pp50-51
Distance: s110.12
Chapter 8: Settings
Vertical Attribute: z88.5022
New Node ID: 100
Field Code: 70
Description: *
A new Node with ID 100 is placed by occupying Node 999, using the direction calculated between
Nodes 50 and 51and a slope distance of 110.12. The elevation of the Node is calculated from the slope
distance and a Zenith angle of 88 degrees-50 minutes-22 seconds. The Field Code of 70 places the
Node symbol and uses the default description of the Field Code.
Example 2:
Command: pp
Occupied Node: 1000
Horizontal Direction: 8*999/216.40
Horizontal Distance: 72.5
Vertical Attribute: 562.27
New Node ID: 101
Field Code: 70
Description: BENCHMARK
A new Node with an ID of 101 is placed by occupying Node 1000, backsighting to Node 999, turning an
angle to the right of 216 degrees-40 minutes and entering a horizontal distance of 72.5. The new Node
is placed with an elevation of 562.27. The Field Code of 70 places the Node symbol, which then has a
description of “BENCHMARK.”
Start Traverse/Sideshot
KEY-IN COMMAND: sttrav
Issue this command to start the definition of a traverse. You must specify the occupied Node and
backsight information that will be used in the Place Traverse Point (Angle), Place Traverse Point
(Direction), Place Traverse Curve and Place Sideshot commands. You must also specify whether lines
are drawn to the sideshots. The End Traverse command must be issued following the traverse
commands to stop the traverse definition.
Start Traverse/Sideshot Command Sequence
Occupied Node
Backsight Direction

Start Traverse/Sideshot Command Sequence
Draw Sideshot Lines
Example
Command: sttrav
Occupied Node: 1000
Backsight Direction: dp999
Draw Sideshot Lines: 0
This establishes an instrument setup of an occupied Node of 1000 and a backsight direction by
backsighting Node 999. When the sideshots are placed, no lines will be drawn to the Node regardless
of the Draw Lines, Draw Nodes or Draw Lines and Nodes toggles.
End Traverse
KEY-IN COMMAND: etrav
Issue this command to stop the geometry definition of the traverse. Traverse closure information is
written to the history window. Closure information included is:
Closed Area (sq. ft), Closed Area (Acres), Close Perimeter, Total Length, Closing Direction, Closing
Distance, Departure in X (Easting), Departure in Y (Northing), and Error of Closure.
Place Traverse Sideshot

KEY-IN COMMAND: ss
This command allows you to place a new Node by turning/deflecting angles and inputting a distance
and a vertical attribute. The setup data from the current Traverse command is used to turn the angles.
The Setup remains constant unless otherwise specified again using the Start Traverse/Sideshot
command or using the Place Traverse Point commands.
Place Traverse Sideshot Command Sequence
Turned Angle
Distance
Vertical Attribute
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
264 COGO
Example
Command: ss
Turned Angle: 126.10
Distance: 33.2
Vertical Attribute: 268.5
New Node ID: 5000
Chapter 8: Settings
Field Code: 32
Description: SPUR 1
A new Node with an ID of 5000 is placed by turning an angle to the right of 126 degrees-10 minutes,
and entering a distance of 33.2, from the occupied Node and backsight direction previously established
using the Start Traverse/Sideshot command or the setup in a previous traverse command. An elevation
of 268.5 is specified in the vertical attribute. The Node is placed with a Field Code of 32 and has an
overwritten description of “SPUR 1.”
Place Traverse Point (Angle)

KEY-IN COMMAND: tpa
This command allows you to place a new Node by turning/deflecting angles and inputting a distance
and a vertical attribute. The initial setup is taken from the Start Traverse/Sideshot command to place
the first new Node. Then the setup is moved such that the new Node just placed is the occupied Node
and the backsight direction is assumed to be toward the last occupied Node. The setup continues to
move when this command is executed.
Place Traverse Point (Angle) Command Sequence
Turned Angle
Distance
Vertical Attribute
New Node ID
Field Code
Description

Examples
Example 1:
Command: tpa
Turned Angle: dr30.2516
Distance: s86.5
Vertical Attribute: s-2.1
New Node ID: 651
Field Code: tp
Description: *
A new Node with an ID of 651 is placed by deflecting an angle to the right of 30 degrees-25 minutes-16
seconds, and entering a slope distance of 86.5, from the occupied Node and backsight direction
previously established using the Start Traverse/Sideshot command or the setup in a previous traverse
command.
The new Node is placed at an elevation calculated from the slope distance entered and a percent slope
of -2.1. The Field Code tp places the Node symbol and it uses its default description.
Example 2:
Command: tpa
Turned Angle: /-60.10
Distance: /52.6
Vertical Attribute: 7*3.8
New Node ID: 652
Field Code: tp
Description: .
A new Node with an ID of 652 is placed by deflecting an angle to the left of 60 degrees- 10 minutes- 00
seconds, and entering a slope distance of 52.6, from the occupied Node and backsight direction
previously established using the Start Traverse/Sideshot command or the setup in a previous traverse
command. The new Node is placed at an elevation calculated from the slope distance entered and a
delta elevation of 3.8. The Field Code tp places the Node symbol with a blank description.
Place Traverse Point (Direction)

KEY-IN COMMAND: tpd
This command allows you to place a new Node by inputting a horizontal direction, a distance and a
vertical attribute. The initial setup is taken from the Start Traverse/Sideshot command to place the first
new Node. Then the setup is moved such that the new Node just placed is the occupied Node and the
backsight direction is assumed to be toward the last occupied Node. The setup continues to move
when this command is executed.
266 COGO
Place Traverse Point (Direction) Command Sequence
Distance
Vertical Attribute
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
Chapter 8: Settings
Example
Command: tpd
Horizontal Direction: 5*502
Distance: 145
Vertical Attribute: 3*-3
New Node ID: 652
Field Code: 74
Description: *
A new Node with an ID of 652 is placed by the calculated direction from the current occupied Node to
Node 502 and entering a distance of 145 from the occupied Node previously established using the Start
Traverse/Sideshot command or the setup in a previous traverse command. The vertical attribute
specifies that the Node placed should have an elevation calculated by a –3:1 H/V slope. The Field
Code 74 places the Node symbol with its default description.
Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter)

KEY-IN COMMAND: tcr
This command places a curve at the current traverse setup by entering a radius (or degree of
curvature) deflected to the left or right and another curve parameter (arc length, chord length, delta
angle, etc.). The current setup is taken from the occupied Node and backsight direction established in
the previous traverse command. A point on curve (POC) Node is placed at the end of the curve and a
Node is placed at the radius point (RP).
Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) Command Sequence
Radius Direction
Curve Parameter
Elevation
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
Elevation (RP)
New Node ID (RP)

Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) Command Sequence
Field Code (RP)
Description (RP)
Example
Command: tcr
Radius Direction: 500
Curve Parameter: 250
Elevation: 0
New Node ID: 960
Field Code: 70
Description: LOT CORNER
Elevation (RP): 0
New Node ID (RP): 961
Field Code (RP): 32
Description (RP): .
A new Node with an ID of 960 is placed at the end of a curve defined by deflecting to the curve to the
right from the current setup with a radius of 500 and a length of curve of 250. The initial setup is taken
from the Traverse/Sideshot Setup command or the setup in a previous traverse command.
The POC Node is placed at elevation 0, using Field Code 70 and a description of LOT CORNER. The
RP Node is placed with an ID of 961 at an elevation of 0, and uses the Field Code 32 to place the Node
symbol with a blank description.
Inverse Points
KEY-IN COMMAND: ip
This command allows you to query or report the inverse between two Nodes or points to the Command
History dialog box. By default you are prompted to enter the two Node IDs separated by a - (dash). To
graphically select two Nodes from CAD click on the PIC button. To graphically select two Nodes/points
from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then graphically pick two points from CAD. If you
are entering two sets of coordinates by typing them, use a / (slash) to separate the Northing/Easting/
Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate the coordinate pair.
Information included in the report is: Node/Point Coordinates, the horizontal direction, the horizontal
distance, elevation change, zenith angle and slope distance. The Inverse Points command does not
write any information to the active batch file.
Inverse Points Sequence

Node 1 – Node 2
268 COGO
Example
Command ip
Node 1 – Node 2 100-101
The inverse between Node 100 and Node 101 is reported to the Command History dialog box.
Node Northing Easting Elevation Description

100 8792.33 8796.59 893.8 TP
Chapter 8: Settings
101 8950.00 9050.00 891.2 BM 5
Direction Distance Delta Elevation
N58°06’41”E 298.46 -2.6
Zenith Angle Slope Distance
90°29’40” 298.47
Inverse Curve (POC)

KEY-IN COMMAND: icpoc
This command allows you to query or report the inverse along a curve defined by three points along a
curve (PC, POC, PT). The data is written to the Command History dialog box. By default you are
prompted to enter the three Node IDs separated by a – (dash) in the order of PC (Point of Curvature),
POC (Point on Curve), PT (Point of Tangency). To graphically select the three Nodes from CAD click on
the PIC button. To graphically select three points from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key.
Then graphically pick the three Nodes/points from CAD. The order you select the Nodes/points
determines the direction of the curve. If you are entering the coordinates by typing them use a / (slash)
to separate the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate the PC, POC and PT coordinates.
In addition to the selected point information (coordinates), curve parameters are also included in the
report to the Command History dialog box. The Inverse Curve (POC) command does not write any
information to the active batch file.
Inverse Curve (POC) Sequence
Node 1 – Node 2 – Node 3
Example
Command icpoc
Node 1 – Node 2 – Node 3 110-111-112
The inverse curve data between Nodes 110 (PC), 111 (POC) and 112 (PT) is reported to the Command
History dialog box.

PC 110 9301.03 8583.89 925.00 TP
POC 111 9371.74 8654.60 925.00 TP
PT 112 9600.01 8980.60 925.00 TP
RP 50 8561.46 9464.88 925.00 TP
Direction Radial In Radial Out Chord Direction Chord Length
CW S49°59'15"E N25°00'00"W N52°59'48"E 298.47

Radius D.O.C. Arc D.O.C. Chord Delta Angle
1430.3539 04°00'21" 04°00'23" 20°00'00"
Arch Length Tangent Length External Middle Ordinate
499.2877 252.2100 22.0655 21.7303
Tangent In Tangent Out
N42°59'48"E N62°59'48"E
Inverse Curve (RP)

KEY-IN COMMAND: icrp
This command allows you to query or report the inverse along a curve defined by three points of a
curve (PC, RP, PT). The data is written to the Command History dialog box. By default you are
prompted to enter the three Node IDs separated by a – (dash) in the order of PC (Point of Curvature),
RP (Radius Point), PT (Point of Tangency). To graphically select the three Nodes from CAD click on the
PIC button. To graphically select three points from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then
graphically pick the three Nodes/points from CAD. The order you select the Nodes/points determines
the direction of the curve. If you are entering the coordinates by typing them, use a / (slash) to separate
the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate the PC, RP and PT coordinates.
In addition to the selected point information (coordinates), curve parameters are also included in the
report to the Command History dialog box. The Inverse Curve (RP) command does not write any
information to the active batch file.
Inverse Curve (RP) Sequence

Example
Command icrp
Node 1 – Node 2 – Node 3 110-50-112
The inverse curve data between Nodes 110 (PC), 50 (RP) and 112 (PT) is reported to the Command
History dialog box.

PC 110 9301.03 8583.89 925.0 TP
RP 50 8561.46 9464.88 925.0 TP
PT 112 9600.01 8980.60 925.0 TP
Direction Radial In Radial Out Chord Chord Length
Direction
CW S49 59’15”E N25 00’00”W N52 59’48”E 298.47
Radius D.O.C. Arc D.O.C. Chord Delta Angle
1430.3539 04 00’21” 04 00’23” 20 00’00”
Arc Length Tangent Length External Middle
Ordinate
499.2877 252.2100 22.0655 21.7303
Tangent In Tangent Out
N42 59’48”E N62 59’48”E
270 COGO
Two Point Offset
KEY-IN COMMAND: 2po
The Two Point Offset command allows you to place a Node at a given offset (left or right) from a line
defined by two points. The first two prompts ask you to select 2 points that define a direction. You may
enter Node IDs or type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key to pick points graphically in CAD. The next
prompt asks you to enter a distance along that direction from which you want to place a Node at a
perpendicular offset. You may enter a positive or negative distance along the direction established. The
distance is measured from the first point that is selected. Then enter the offset distance using a positive
or negative number to offset the Node to the right or left respectively. Finish the command by entering
Chapter 8: Settings
the Node elevation, Field Code and Description.
Two Point Offset Sequence
First Point
Second Point
Distance Along
Offset
Elevation
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
Example
Command: 2po
First Point: 100
Second Point: 101
Distance Along: -10
Offset: 12
Elevation: 0.00
New Node ID: 102
Field Code: 32
Description: BLDG COR
A new Node with ID 102 is placed at a point 10 units from Node 100 in the opposite direction defined
between Nodes 100 and 101 and 12 units offset perpendicular to the right from that same direction. The

new Node has an elevation of 0.00, a description of BLDG COR and uses field code 32 to place a
specific Node symbol.
Figure 8-12 Two Point Offset Example
Intersect Direction-Direction (Line-Line)

KEY-IN COMMAND: drdr
The Intersect Direction-Direction (Line-Line) command will locate a Node at the intersection of two
inputted directions. Enter the first basepoint using Node ID's or graphic picks and the horizontal
direction from that basepoint. You may optionally choose to offset that direction using a positive or
negative offset value. Then enter the second basepoint, direction and offset using similar options.
Depending on the Draw Nodes/Lines toggle you will have a Node placed at the intersection point, lines
drawn from the two basepoints to the intersection point or both.
Intersect Direction-Direction Sequence
First Point
Offset
Second Point
Offset
Elevation
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
272 COGO
Example
Command: drdr
First Point: 100
Horizontal Direction: 1*65
Offset: 0
Second Point: 101
Chapter 8: Settings
Horizontal Direction: 2*25.1040
Offset: -10
Elevation: 94.32
New Node ID: 103
Field Code: 72
Description: IP
A new Node is placed with ID 103 at the intersection point of two lines. The first line is established going
from Node 100 in a direction of 65 degrees northeast. The second line is established by offsetting a line
10 units to the left of a 25 degree, 10 minute, 40 second southeast bearing from Node 101. The new
Node is placed at elevation 94.32 with a description of IP using a field code of 72.
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line)

KEY-IN COMMAND: drdt
The Intersect Direction-Distance command allows you to locate a Node at the intersection point of one
direction (with optional offset distance) and the radial sweep of a distance from a second point. When
multiple solutions (intersections) exist, the intersection location must be specified.
Specify the most northerly, easterly, southerly, westerly, or both Intersection Locations. The closest
intersection location to the first point specified will be the default. Depending on the Draw Nodes/Lines
toggle you will have a Node placed at the intersection point(s), lines drawn from the two basepoints to
the intersection point(s), or both.
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) Sequence
First Point
Offset
Second Point
Distance
Intersection Location
Elevation
New Node ID
Field Code
Description

Example
Command drdt
First Point 6249
Horizontal Direction az264.195
Offset 0
Second Point 6115
Distance 150
Intersection Location 1
Elevation 0.00
New Node ID 6250
Field Code 72
Description IP
A new Node is placed with ID 6250 at the most northerly intersection point of a line and an arc. The line
is established going from Node 6249 in a direction of 264.195 degrees azimuth. The arc is defined with
a radius point at Node ID 6115 and a radial sweep distance of 150. Intersection Location 1 specifies to
use the most northerly intersection. The new Node is placed at elevation 0.00 with a description of IP
using a field code of 72.
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc)

KEY-IN COMMAND: dtdt
The Intersect Distance-Distance command allows you to locate a Node at the intersection point of the
two circles formed by a radial sweep of the distance entered about each occupied Node. When multiple
solutions (intersections) exist, the intersection location must be specified. Specify the most northerly,
easterly, southerly, westerly, or both Intersection Locations with respect to the second circle specified.
The most northerly intersection location will be the default. Depending on the Draw Nodes/Lines toggle
you will have a Node placed at the intersection point(s), lines drawn from the two basepoints to the
intersection point(s), or both.
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) Sequence
First Point
Distance
Second Point
Distance
Intersection Location
Elevation
New Node ID
Field Code
Description
274 COGO
Example
Command dtdt
First Point 500
Distance 200
Second Point *8942.64396826/9432.43642155/

0.00000000
Distance 500
Chapter 8: Settings
Intersection Location 3
Elevation 25.37
New Node ID 502
Field Code 72
Description IP
A new Node is placed with ID 502 at the most southerly intersection point of two arcs. The first arc is
established going from Node 500 a radial sweep distance of 200. The second arc is defined with a
radius point selected in CAD at the coordinates specified and a radial sweep distance of 500.
Intersection Location 3 specifies to use the most southerly intersection. The new Node is placed at
elevation 25.37 with a description of IP using a field code of 72.
Inverse Angle
KEY-IN COMMAND: iang
The Inverse Angle command allows you to query or report the angle between three points. The data is
written to the Command History dialog box. By default you are prompted to enter the three Node IDs
separated by a - (dash) in the order of Start Point, Vertex Point, and End Point. To graphically select the
three Nodes from CAD use the PIC button. To graphically select three points from CAD, type *
(asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then graphically pick the three points from CAD. The order you
select the Nodes/points determines the direction of the angle. If you are entering the coordinates by
typing them use a / (slash) to separate the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate the
Start, Vertex, and End point coordinates.
Information included in the report is Node/Point Coordinates; the horizontal direction and horizontal
distance between the three points; and the Angle Right, Angle Left, Deflection Right and Deflection Left
between the three points. The Inverse Angle command does not write any information to the active
batch file.
Inverse Angle Sequence
Node 1-Node 2-Node 3

Example
Command iang
Node 1 - Node 2 - Node 3 110-111-112
110 9301.03 8583.89 925.0 TP
111 9371.74 8654.60 925.0 TP
112 9600.01 8980.60 925.0 TP
Direction Distance
Start- N45 00'00"E 100.00

Vertex
Vertex-End N54 59’59”E 397.97
Start-End N52 59'48"E 496.76
Angle Right Angle Left Deflection Deflection

Right Left
189 59'59" 170 00'21" 09 59'59" 350 00'01"
Inverse Station and Offset

KEY-IN COMMAND: iso
The Inverse Station and Offset command allows you to query or report the station, offset, and elevation
information about a selection of Node IDs to the Command History dialog box. Enter the alignment
name or use the PIC button to graphically select the alignment in CAD. Then enter the selection set of
Nodes to query. Enter single Node IDs separated by commas or ranges of Nodes using the dash
character. Finally, specify the method in which to sort the Node listing. Enter 0 for sorting the list by
Node number or 1 for sorting the list by increasing stationing. Refer to Command Line COGO Input
Fields on page 278 for additional information about valid input.
Information included in the report is the station, offset, elevation, and description of the selected Nodes.
Multiple Offsets at the same station are sorted left to right (negative to positive).
Inverse Station and Offset Sequence
Alignment
Node Range
Node Sorting
276 COGO
Example
Command iso
Alignment CL1
Node Range 110-112,257,258
Node Sorting 0
Alignment: CL1
Chapter 8: Settings
Node Station Offset Elevation Description
110 60+00.00 0.00 0.0 LOTX
111 60+00.00 50.00 100.0 LOTX
112 59+97.20 -50.00 95.0 LOTX
257 105+00.00 -50.00 62.4 LOTX
258 105+00.00 50.00 70.9 LOTX
Nodes 110, 111, 112, 257, and 258 have the station and offset reported by increasing Node IDs to the
Command History dialog box for the CL1 alignment.
Inverse Two Point Offset

KEY-IN COMMAND: i2po
The Inverse Two Point Offset command allows you to query or report the distance along, offset, and
elevation information about a selection of Node IDs to the Command History dialog box. These values
are reported with respect to a line defined by two points. The first prompt asks you to enter two Node
ID's separated by a - (dash) that define a direction. To graphically select two Nodes from CAD use the
PIC button. To graphically select two points from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then
graphically pick two points from CAD. If you are entering two sets of coordinates by typing them use a /
(slash) to separate the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate the coordinate pair. Then
enter the selection set of Nodes to query. Enter single Node IDs separated by commas or ranges of
Nodes using the dash character. Finally, specify the method in which to sort the Node listing. Enter 0 for
sorting the list by Node number or 1 for sorting the list by distances along. Refer to Command Line
COGO Input Fields on page 278 for additional information about valid input.
Information included in the report is the first and second point coordinates and the direction and
distance between the first and second points.
Also included for every Node selected is the distance along the line measured from the specified point,
the offset, elevation, and description. Multiple Offsets at the same distance along are sorted left to right
(negative to positive).
Inverse Two Point Offset Sequence
Node 1 - Node 2
Measure From Node
Node Range
Node Sorting

Example
Command i2po
Node 1 - Node 2 100-101
Node Range 510-511/557/560
Node Sorting 0
Nodes 510, 511, 557, and 558 are reported by increasing Node IDs to the Command History dialog
box.
100 8792.33 8796.59 893.8 TP
101 8950.00 9050.00 891.2 BM 5
Direction Distance
N58 06’41” 110.00

E
Node Distance Offset Elevation Description

Along
510 0.00 5.00 0.0 LOTX
511 17.0 22.54 100.0 LOTX
557 65.00 -80.00 62.4 LOTX
560 65.00 -40.00 70.9 LOTX
Zoom Node
KEY-IN COMMAND: zn
The Zoom Node command allows you to view a desired Node ID in CAD. The current window size is
used and the Node ID specified is centered on screen.
Zoom Node Sequence
Node ID
Example
Command zn
Node ID 100
Node ID 100 is centered in the CAD window at the current viewing size.
Command Line COGO Input Fields

For specific information on valid input for the various Command Line COGO prompts, refer to the
following sections.
278 COGO
New Node ID
Enter the Node identifier of the point to place. This entry can be alphanumeric depending on your
system settings for Node formats.
Northing
Enter the Northing (y-coordinate) of the New Node ID that will be placed. The PIC button is enabled to
allow you to graphically select a point in CAD. The x-coordinate of the graphic point picked is also used
as a default for the Easting edit field.
Chapter 8: Settings
Easting
Enter the Easting (x-coordinate) of the New Node ID that will be placed. The PIC button is enabled.
This allows you to graphically select the point in CAD for the Easting.
Using the PIC button while being prompted for the Easting will not reset the Northing value already
entered. If the PIC button was used in the Northing edit field, the Easting is defaulted to the x-
coordinate of the graphic selection.
Elevation
Enter the elevation (z-coordinate) of the New Node ID that will be placed. The initial value when the
COGO Command Line is launched is read from the Entry Options – Node Placement settings. Once an
elevation is entered, that elevation is displayed as the default. This allows you to enter a default
elevation once, then press the Enter key to accept that default every time the elevation is prompted.
Field Code
Enter the Field Code of the New Node ID that will be placed. This controls the Node symbol that will be
placed for the new Node. The initial value when the COGO Command Line is launched is read from the
Entry Options – Node Placement settings. Once a Field Code is entered, that Field Code is displayed
as the default. This allows you to enter a default Field Code once and then press the Enter key to
accept that default every time the elevation is prompted.
Description
Enter the description of the New Node ID that will be placed. A period (.) should be entered when no
description is desired. A blank description is not allowed. An asterisk (*) should be entered when the
description is to be the taken from the Entry Options – Node Placement settings.
For more information, see Entry Options – Node Placement Tab on page 250.
Alignment
Enter the alignment name followed by a space and the sub-project number that is to be used when
calculating stations and offsets. If the sub-project is not specified, it is assumed to be 000 (which is the
sub-project number for alignments created in COGO). You may also use the PIC button to graphically
select the desired alignment. After graphically selecting the alignment, the name and sub-project is
entered in the edit field and you must use the Enter key to progress to the next prompt. Enter a question
mark (?) as the alignment name to display the Defined Alignments dialog box () to select the name from
the list of defined alignments for the project.

Station
Enter the station value along the specified alignment at which the New Node ID will be placed.
Offset
The horizontal distance measured perpendicular from the specified alignment, at which the New Node
ID will be placed.
Occupied Node
This is the Node ID or point that is needed when calculating the new Node ID based on directions (or
angle turned) and distances from that point. By default you enter a Node ID or use the PIC button to
graphically select a Node. You can however, type an asterisk (*) and press the Enter key to select a
point graphically in CAD rather than a Node (using the PIC button is not necessary for this option). You
can alternatively type an * followed by Northing, Easting and Elevation coordinates. For example, to
use an occupied point of 1000, 1000, 50 enter *1000/1000/50 or *1000,1000,50. If you do not enter an
elevation it is taken from the default elevation in COGO.
Draw Sideshot Lines

This prompt controls whether or not lines are drawn to sideshots while defining a traverse. This setting
is independent from the Draw Nodes Only, Draw Lines Only and Draw Lines and Nodes toggles. The
table below lists the available options for changing this setting. Note that the characters in the keyboard
option are not case sensitive.
Method Keyboard Numeric Keypad

Draw Sideshot Lines On on 1
Draw Sideshot Lines Off off 0
Enter the horizontal direction from a given point. The definitions of the available methods are listed in
Table 1: Direction Method Definitions on page 281. The valid input for the various methods are outlined
in Table 2: Direction Input Methods on page 281. There are two different ways to enter the different
directional inputs. One way involves using alpha characters to set the various methods while the
second utilizes your keyboard’s numeric keypad.
Note that the characters in the keyboard option are not case sensitive.
For more information on the various methods refer to COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
280 COGO
Table 1: Direction Method Definitions
Method Definition
Absolute Direction The absolute direction in bearings or azimuths.
Direction Point The direction based on your current occupied point and the direction to
another point.
Two Point The direction from your current occupied point by using the direction between
two other points.
Backsight (Absolute) Enter a backsight direction by knowing an absolute direction. Then enter an
Chapter 8: Settings
angle turned/deflected from the backsight to calculate the resulting direction.
Backsight (Direction Point) Enter a backsight direction by knowing a point to backsight to. Then enter an
angle turned/deflected from the backsight to calculate the resulting direction.
Backsight (Two Point) Enter a backsight direction by using the direction between two points. Then
enter an angle turned/deflected from the backsight to calculate the resulting
direction.
Table 2: Direction Input Methods

Absolute Direction ne##.######## 1*##.########
se##.######## 2*##.########
sw##.######## 3*##.########
nw##.######## 4*##.########
na###.######## ###.########
az###.######## ###.########
sa###.########
Direction Point dpNodeID 5*NodeID
Two Point ppNodeID-NodeID 6*NodeID-NodeID

Backsight (Absolute) and Angle
bsAbsDir/Angle 7*AbsDir/Angle
(Turned angle or deflection)
Backsight (Direction Point) and bsdpNodeID/Angle 8*NodeID/Angle

Angle (Turned angle or
deflection)
Backsight (Two Point) and Angle bsppNodeID-NodeID/Angle 9*NodeID-NodeID/Angle

(Turned angle or deflection)
ar###.######## ###.########
Angle (Turned angle or deflection)
al###.######## -###.########
dr###.######## /###.########
dl###.######## /-###.########
Examples of Horizontal Direction

Direction is traveled from occupied Node. (Assuming Angular Input Units of Degrees, Minutes,
Seconds)
NE34.2156 Northeast bearing of 34 degrees, 21 minutes, 56 seconds.
2*17.54124 Southeast bearing of 17 degrees, 54 minutes, 12.4 seconds.
AZ294.0047 North Azimuth direction of 294 degrees, 0 minutes, 47 seconds.
DP156 Direction to Node 156.
5*1028 Direction to Node 1028.
PP402-403 Direction from Node 402 to Node 403.

6*99-100 Direction from Node 99 to Node 100.
BSNW72.35/129.2039 Direction is calculated from Backsighting a bearing of Northwest 72 degrees, 35 minutes and
turning an angle to the right of 129 degrees, 20 minutes, 39 seconds.
7*362.4215/43.5 Direction is calculated from Backsighting a bearing of Southwest 62 degrees, 42 minutes, 21

seconds and deflecting an angle to the right 43 degrees, 50 minutes.
BSNA180/AL124.03 Direction is calculated from Backsighting an azimuth direction of 180 degrees and turning an angle
to the left of 124 degrees, 3 minutes.
8*276/-191.4520 Direction is calculated from Backsighting Node 276 and turning and angle to the left of 191
degrees, 45 minutes, 20 seconds.
8*276//8.1440 Direction is calculated from Backsighting Node 276 deflecting an angle to the right of 8 degrees, 14
minutes and 40 seconds.
9*100-101/DR45 Direction is calculated from Backsighting the direction from Node 100 to Node 101 and deflecting
an angle to the right of 45 degrees.
Distance
By default, the value entered here is the horizontal distance from the Occupied Node. If a slope
distance is known, enter the letter ‘s’ or a slash (/) prior to the distance value to specify a slope distance.
The Vertical Attribute prompt will follow the Distance prompt for you to specify a vertical angle/slope.
The following table lists the valid inputs for the Distance prompt. Note that the characters in the
keyboard option are not case sensitive.
Distance Input Methods

Horizontal Distance ########.######## ########.########
Horizontal Distance to Point pNodeID 1*NodeID
Horizontal Distance between Two Points ppNodeID-NodeID 2*NodeID-NodeID
Slope Distance s########.######## /########.########
Examples of Distance Input

The Distance is traveled from Occupied Node.
125.65 Horizontal distance of 125.65 units (feet or meters).
P205 Horizontal distance between current Occupied Node and Node 205.
1*1532 Horizontal distance between current Occupied Node and Node 1532.
PP210-211 Horizontal distance between Nodes 210 and 211.
2*501-500 Horizontal distance between Nodes 501 and 500.
S402.5 Slope distance of 402.5 units (feet or meters). The actual horizontal distance to the New Node ID is
calculated from the Vertical Attribute specified.
/155.2 Slope distance of 155.2 units (feet or meters). The actual horizontal distance to the New Node ID is
calculated from the Vertical Attribute specified.
282 COGO
Vertical Attribute
Specify the vertical measurement of the New Node ID. This prompt is used in conjunction with the
Distance prompt to calculate the final elevation. Typically the different options are used with slope
distances but may be used when entering horizontal distances as well. The Vertical Attribute prompt
may also optionally contain Instrument Height and Target Height entries. They should be entered after
the elevation, slope or angle using the '/' (forward slash) character as a separator. If no Instrument
Height or Target Height is specified, the values are used from the COGO Entry Options - Instrument
settings. The definitions of the available methods are listed in Table 1: Vertical Attribute Method
Definitions below. The valid input for the various methods are outlined in Table 2: Vertical Attribute Input
Chapter 8: Settings
Methods below. There are two different ways for entering the different vertical attribute inputs. One way
involves using alpha characters to set the various methods while the second utilizes your keyboard’s
numeric keypad. Note that the characters in the keyboard option are not case sensitive.
For more information on the various methods refer to COGO Distance Dialog Box on page 11.
Table 1: Vertical Attribute Method Definitions
Method Definition
Elevation The elevation of the new Node ID.
% Grade The slope to the new Node ID entered as a percent grade.
H/V Slope The slope to the new Node ID entered as a horizontal distance over vertical distance ratio. Vertical
(V) is considered to be 1.
V/H Slope The slope to the new Node ID entered as a vertical distance over horizontal distance ratio.
Horizontal (H) is considered to be 1.
Zenith Angle The vertical angle measured from the Zenith direction, where 0 degrees is straight up.
Horizon Angle The vertical angle measured from the Horizon, where 0 degrees is horizontal.
Nadir The vertical angle measured from the Nadir direction, where 0 degrees is straight down.
Delta Elevation The difference in elevation of the current (Occupied) Node and the New Node.
Table 2: Vertical Attribute Input Methods

Elevation #####.######## #####.########
Delta Elevation d(+/-)#####.######## 1*(+/-)#####.########
% Grade s(+/-)#####.######## 2*(+/-)#####.########
H/V Slope h(+/-)#####.######## 3*(+/-)#####.########
V/H Slope v(+/-)#####.######## 4*(+/-)#####.########
Zenith Angle z###.######## 5*###.########
Horizon Angle hz(+/-)###.######## 6*(+/-)###.########
Nadir n###.######## 7*###.########
Instrument/Target #####.########/##.########/##.######## Same as Keyboard

Height (method and value)/IH/TH

Examples of Vertical Attribute
(Assuming Angular Input Units are Degrees, Minutes, Seconds)
505.25 Elevation of 505.25 Units (feet or meters).
D-1.78 Change in elevation of 1.78 units (feet or meters) lower than current elevation.
1*2.5 Change in elevation of 2.5 units (feet or meters) higher than current elevation.
S-2 -2% grade.
2*4.5 4.5% grade.
H3 H/V slope of 3:1.
4*2 V/H slope of 2:1.
Z89.4521 Zenith angle of 89 degrees, 45 minutes, 21 seconds.
Z89.4521/ Zenith angle of 89 degrees, 45 minutes, 21 seconds and Instrument Height of 5.15 and a Target Height of
5.15/4.8 4.8.
HZ1.5220 Horizon angle of 1 degree, 52 minutes, 20 seconds.
Backsight Direction
This prompt is used in the Start Traverse/Sideshot command and defines the backsight for the starting
setup. The backsight direction uses the first three methods for the Horizontal Direction prompt. The
definitions of the available methods are listed in Table 1 below. The valid input for the various methods
are outlined in Table 2: Backsight Direction Input Methods below.
There are two different ways for entering the different directional inputs. One way involves using alpha
characters to set the various methods while the second utilizes your keyboard’s numeric keypad. Note
that the characters in the keyboard option are not case sensitive.
For more information on the various methods refer to COGO Direction Dialog Box on page 9.
Table 1: Backsight Direction Method Definitions
Method Definition
Absolute Backsight Direction The absolute backsight direction in bearings or azimuths.
Backsight Direction Point The backsight direction based on your current occupied point and the direction to another
point.
Backsight by Two Point The backsight direction from your current occupied point by using the direction between two
other points.
Table 2: Backsight Direction Input Methods

se##.######## 2*##.########
sw##.######## 3*##.########
nw##.######## 4*##.########
na###.######## ###.########
az###.######## ###.########
sa###.########
Direction Point dpNodeID 5*NodeID
Two Point ppNodeID-NodeID 6*NodeID-NodeID
284 COGO
Turned Angle
This prompt is used in the Place Traverse Sideshot command. The angle turned or deflected from the
backsight direction in the current setup. The table below lists the valid inputs for a turned angle. There
are two different ways for entering the different angular inputs. One way involves using alpha
characters to set the various methods while the second utilizes your keyboard’s numeric keypad. Note
that the characters in the keyboard option are not case sensitive.
Chapter 8: Settings
Angle Right ar###.######## ###.########
Angle Left al###.######## -###.########
Deflection Right dr###.######## /###.########
Deflection Left dl###.######## /-###.########
Radius Direction
Enter the radius or degree of curve for the circular arc being defined when using the Traverse Curve
(PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) command. A plus (+) or minus (-) controls the direction of the curve
(deflected right or left respectively). By default the value entered is assumed to be the radius of the arc.
Otherwise enter the letter “d” followed by the degree of curvature value. Note that the letter “d” is not
case sensitive. The circular arc is drawn tangent to the prior traverse segment.
You can optionally specify the chord direction for non-tangent curves. Use a backslash '/' following the
radius or degree of curvature value to specify the absolute chord direction. Enter the absolute direction
in bearings or azimuths. Refer to the table below for valid input of bearings and azimuths.

se##.######## 2*##.########
sw##.######## 3*##.########
nw##.######## 4*##.########
na###.######## ###.########
az####.######## ###.########
sa###.########

Examples of Radius Input
500 Arc Radius of 500 units (feet or meters), deflected to the right. Tangent to the prior traverse segment.
-2130 Arc Radius of 2130 units (feet or meters), deflected to the left. Tangent to the prior traverse segment.
D6.30 Arc Degree of Curvature in as 6 degrees, 30 minutes, deflected to the right. Tangent to the prior traverse
segment.
500/ne67.2354 Arc Radius of 500 units (feet or meters), deflected to the right with a chord direction of 67 degrees, 23
minutes, 54 seconds northeast.
-1000/3*12.3404 Arc Radius of 1000 units (feet or meters), deflected to the left with a chord direction of 12 degrees, 34
minutes, 9 seconds southwest.
D-8.24/176.5218 Arc Degree of Curvature in as 8 degrees, 24 minutes, deflected to the left with a chord direction of 176
degrees, 52 minutes, 18 seconds north azimuth.
Curve Parameter
Enter a curve parameter to define a curve with the input Radius Direction when using the Traverse
Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) command. The radius method cannot be used for the Traverse
Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Parameter) command. There are two different ways for entering the different
angular inputs. One way involves using alpha characters to set the various methods while the second
utilizes your keyboard’s numeric keypad. Note that the characters in the keyboard option are not case
sensitive.

Arc Length ######.######## ######.########
Radius r######.######## 1*######.########
Chord Length c######.######## 2*######.########
Delta Angle d###.######## 3*###.########
Tangent t######.######## 4*######.########
External e######.######## 5*######.########
Middle Ordinate m######.######## 6*######.########
Examples of Curve Parameter Input

250 Arc Length of 250 units (feet or meters).
1*800 Radius of 800 units (feet or meters).
2*325.2 Chord Length of 325.2 units (feet or meters).
D*12.3015 Delta Angle of 12 degrees, 30 minutes, 15 seconds.
First Point
Enter a Node Identifier or coordinates of the first reference point. When entering Nodes they can be
alphanumeric depending on your System settings for Node Formats. You may type the Node ID or
graphically select it from CAD using the PIC button. When using coordinates for the first point, type an *
(asterisk) and press the Enter key to graphically select a point in CAD. Or enter the coordinates directly
by typing the Northing/Easting/Elevation values separated with a / (slash).
286 COGO
Second Point
Enter a Node Identifier or coordinates of the second reference point. When entering Nodes they can be
alphanumeric depending on your System settings for Node Formats. You may type the Node ID or
graphically select it from CAD using the PIC button. When using coordinates for the second point, type
an * (asterisk) and press the Enter key to graphically select a point in CAD. Or enter the coordinates
directly by typing the Northing/Easting/Elevation values separated with a / (slash).
Node 1 – Node 2
Chapter 8: Settings
This input field is used for the Inverse Points command. Enter two Node IDs separated by a – (dash) in
the order that defines the desired direction.
To graphically select the Nodes from CAD use the PIC button and select each Node. After selecting the
Nodes the entries are displayed in the edit field. Use the Enter key to accept the two Node IDs.
To graphically select two points from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then graphically
pick the two points from CAD in the order that defines the desired direction. If you are entering the
coordinates by typing them, use a / (slash) to separate the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to
separate the pair of coordinates.

This input field is used for the Inverse Curve commands. Enter three keypoint Node IDs separated by a
– (dash) in the order determined by the command. To graphically select the three Nodes from CAD use
the PIC button and select each Node. After selecting the Nodes the entries are displayed in the edit
field. Use the Enter key to accept the three Node IDs.
To graphically select three points from CAD type * (asterisk) and press the Enter key. Then graphically
pick the three points from CAD. If you are entering the coordinates by typing them, use a / (slash) to
separate the Northing/Easting/Elevation and a ~ (tilde) to separate each of the keypoint coordinates.
Distance Along
This Input Field is used for the Two Point Offset command and is similar to the Offset Input Field. Enter
a positive or negative distance along the direction established. A negative distance indicates to go a
certain amount in the opposite direction of the horizontal direction entered.

288 COGO
COGO
GLOSSARY
OF
TE R M S
Alignment
An alignment delineates directions and distances for a structure such
as a roadway, channel or pipeline, or can be used to define a base line
or section line. You may use the alignment for the purposes of locating
boundaries and for determining station and offset values of features
such as monuments, junction boxes, lot corners, etc. Alignments can
be comprised of tangent sections, horizontal curves and spiral curves.
Batch Processing
This is the process of recording input to a batch file for editing and
playback of the information. Several commands in COGO can be
recorded to a batch file.
Eagle Point Boundary

This is an algorithm used to calculate the boundary of a region by
selecting a point to determine proximity. The nearest calculated closed
region is determined and highlighted in the CAD graphic. In some
cases, you may specify a tolerance to automatically close the distance
between two endpoints that fall within the tolerance value as the
boundary is being calculated.
Lot
This is a closed region in the CAD graphic that may be selected to be
annotated, added to a lot table and used when creating legal
descriptions or generating lot reports.
Mapcheck
This is a report that may be generated using selected lots in the
project. The selected lots will then be subjected to the established Map
Check precision settings for a re-calculation of the closure data. You
may establish the known precision settings for angles, distance,
coordinates and closure.
Node
This refers to the text and symbol that are placed into the CAD graphic
(or external database) that identify points (northing, easting, elevation
coordinate triplets) to reference within various products.
Polar Line
You may place a line and/or a Node from a known point at a known
direction/angle and distance. You may use the standard COGO
methods of input for determining distance and direction.
Glossary of Terms 289

SDMS Format
This format is based on the AASHTO Survey Data Management System for recording and
processing survey data. The structure is based on two-character labels or data tags that are
assigned to various bits of survey information. The information is then grouped by what surveying
activity was used to record the information.
Translate-Rotate-Scale
You may select a group of survey data that was placed in the project using an assumed coordinate,
bearing, and/or scale factor and apply the necessary corrections.
290 COGO
INDEX
A Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg Dialog Box . . . 70
Absolute Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . . . . 64
Acres (Hectares) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog
Acres/Hectares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 171 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Active Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog
Active Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 242
Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 259 All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 279 Always Display Command Line COGO . . . . 254
Alignment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Always Minimize the COGO Menu . . . . . . . . 254
Alignment Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 216, 234 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 187, 195, 236, 239, 252
Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Angle Type . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 236, 239, 243, 249
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Angle, turned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . 67 Area by Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Alignment Traverse Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 59 Area Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Alignment Traverse Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Area Parking – Row Spacing Dialog Box . . . 194
Alignment Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . 66 Area Parking Lot Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg . . . . . . . . . 70 Attribute listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Alignment Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . 64 Attributes Placed at New Location . . . . . . . . . 39
Curve to Station 6+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Audit Trail Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Curve to Station 8+50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Audit Trail, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 253
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Auto-Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Starting Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . 61 Average Coordinates & Elevations
Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 of Selected Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Summary of Alignment Traverse
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
B
Tangent to 6+50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tangent to Station 10+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Back Side of Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tangent to Station 4+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Back Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg . . . 71 Backsight Direction . . . . . . . . 236, 239, 243, 284
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Leg Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Method Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Alignment Traverse Combining Spiral Leg Backsight Node ID/Backsight Direction/
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Direction Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Backsight Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 239, 243
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Backsight With an Angle Deflected
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 to the Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Alignment Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box . . . 68 Backsight With an Angle Deflected
Alignment Traverse Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 to the Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Alignment Traverse Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Left . . 10
Combining Spiral leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Right . 10
Curve leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Spiral In leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Spiral Out leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tangent leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 16
Alignment Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Alignment Traverse Sideshot Dialog Beginning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 60, 64, 156
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Alignment Traverse Sideshot Dialog Box . . . . 66 Best Fit Curve Placed Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 127
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Alignment Traverse Spiral Leg Dialog Best Fit Line Placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Index 291
BOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 235 Closed Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Closing Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76 Closing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Back Side of Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Closing the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Boundary Traverse Closure Data Dialog Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Closure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . 82 Closure Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Boundary Traverse Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Closure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . 80 Closure Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Continue Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Closure Northing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Closure Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Final Leg of Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 COGO Command Line Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 256
First Curve on Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box . . 14, 15
Resultant Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . 80 COGO Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 11
Start of Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Backsight With an Angle Deflected
Starting Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . 76 to the Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starting Node Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Backsight With an Angle Deflected
Summary of Boundary Traverse to the Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Backsight With an Angle Turned
Boundary Traverse Closure Data Dialog to the Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Backsight With an Angle Turned
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 to the Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Retrieval of a Direction From a Complex
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Curve Direction Options Diagram . . . . . . 84 Retrieval of a Direction From a Line . . . . . . 9
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 COGO Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 13
Boundary Traverse Curve Leg Dialog Box . . . 83 Retrieval of a Distance When Selecting
Boundary Traverse Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 a Line, Complex Object or Arc . . . . . . 12
Curve Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Three Vertical Angle Measurements . . . . 12
Display Boundary Closure Data . . . . . . . . 75 COGO Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Tangent Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Complex Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg . . . . . . . . . . 80 Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Boundary Traverse Tangent Leg Dialog Box . 81 Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 COGO Pick Point Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . 14
C COGO Place Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
COGO Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CAD Graphic After Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . . . 44
Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CAD Graphic Before Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . 44
COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CAD Settings 186, 187, 188, 190, 191, 192, 194, 195, 196
COGO Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 16
Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Choose Nodes and Options to Draw Through 123
Column Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Circular Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Combining Spiral Leg . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 69, 71, 73
Clean Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Combining Spiral leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Cleaned Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 259
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Lot Corners to be Cleaned . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Command Aliases Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Command Edit field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Cleaned Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Command History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 217
Command Line Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Clear List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 232, 234
Command Line COGO Commands . . . . . . . . 258
Clockwise/Counterclockwise 69, 71, 72, 83, 123, 162, 190,
Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
220, 232
Command History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Close Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Command Sequence Help . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Close Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 220
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Closed Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Draw Lines and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Closed Object (select graphically) . . . . . . . . 238
Draw Lines Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Closed Objects (select along path) . . . . . . . . 160
Draw Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
292 COGO
End Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 COGO Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . 16
End Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 7
Intersect Direction-Direction (Line-Line) . 272 COGO Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) . . 273 Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) . . 274 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Inverse Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Constant Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inverse Curve (POC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Construct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Inverse Curve (RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Construct Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Construct Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Inverse Station and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Construct Curve Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Inverse Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Construct Curves by PC, Back
Place Node by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 261 Tangent, Dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Place Node by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . 261 Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent,
Place Polar Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Place Traverse Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . 265 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT . . . . . . 107
Place Traverse Point (Direction) . . . . . . . 266 Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT . . . . 106
Place Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve
Start Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Start Traverse/Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Construct Curves by PI, Tangent
Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve Direction, Tangent Distance . . . . . . 113
Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Construct Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Construct Inscribed Curve . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Zoom Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves . . . 131
Command Line COGO Input Fields . . . . . . . . 278 Construct Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral . 136
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Construct Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Backsight Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Construct Polar Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Command Line COGO Input Fields . . . . 279 Construct Spiral Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Curve Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Construct Best Fit Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Best Fit Curve Placed Diagram . . . . . . . 127
Draw Sideshot Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Selected Nodes for Best Fit Curve
Horizontal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
New Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Construct Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Northing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Best Fit Line Placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Occupied Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Radius Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Select Nodes for Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . 115
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Construct Curve Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Turned Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Construct Curve Tangent Diagram . . . . 128
Vertical Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Command Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Command Line Settings Dialog Box . . . . 254 Construct Curve Tangent Diagram . . . . . . . . 128
Select Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent,
Command Line Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . 254 Dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 111
Command Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Command Sequence Help . . . . . . . . . . 257, 259 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Construct Curves by PC, Back Tangent,
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 112
Compare Stationing to Mainline . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Complex Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Complex Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT . . . . . . 107, 108
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT –
Batch Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Continue Curve Option Used . . . . . 108
COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box . . 14 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
COGO Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
COGO Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Construct Curves by PC, PI, PT – Continue
COGO Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Curve Option Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
COGO Pick Point Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Construct Curves by PC, POC, PT . . . . 106, 107
COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box . . 14 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
COGO Place Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 6 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Index 293
Construct Curves by PC, RP and Curve QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Construct Through Nodes Diagram . . . . . . . . 125
Construct Curves by PC, RP, Curve Construct Through Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . 123
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Continue Radial Area Command . . . . . . . . . . 180
Construct Curves by PC, PR Continue Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
and Curve Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Continue Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Continuing Feature Line Diagram . . . . . . . . . 120
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Construct Curves by PI, Tangent Direction, Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog
Tangent Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Convert Objects to an Alignment . . . . . . 157
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Construct Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Construct Feature Line Dialog Box . . . . 117 Convert Objects to Alignment Dialog Box . . . 156
Continuing Feature Line Diagram . . . . . 120 Convert Objects to an Alignment . . . . . . . . . . 157
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Convert to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Finished Feature Line Diagram . . . . . . . 120 Convert to Lot – Closed Objects
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Along Path Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Start Feature Line Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 119 Convert to Lot – Eagle Point Boundary
Construct Feature Line Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 117 Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Construct Inscribed Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Convert to Lot – Objects Method . . . . . . 166
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Convert to Lot – Points Method . . . . . . . 162
Inscribed Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 129 Convert to Lot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 160, 161
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Convert to Lot – Closed Objects
Select Key Point Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Along Path Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Select PI Point Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves . . . . . . 131 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves Convert to Lot – Eagle Point Boundary
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Enter Transition Length Diagram . . . . . . 134 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Place Reverse Curve Nodes Diagram . . 134 Select Internal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Tolerance Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Select Two Line Segments Diagram . . . 133 Convert to Lot – Objects Method . . . . . . . . . . 166
Construct Inscribed Reverse Curves Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Construct Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral . . . . 136 Select Bounding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Select Internal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral . . . . . . . . . 137 Convert to Lot – Points Method . . . . . . . . . . . 162
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Convert to Lot By Points Dialog Box . . . . 162
Select PI Point Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Define Curve Using Point on Curve . . . . 164
Construct Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Define Curve Using Radius Point . . . . . . 164
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Offset Curb Lines Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 122 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Offset Right of Way Lines Diagram . . . . 122 Select Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Convert to Lot By Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . 162
Select Alignment or Object to Offset Convert to Lot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 161
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Construct Polar Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 116 Coordinates, place Node by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Construct Polar Line Results . . . . . . . . . 116 Copy Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Copy Command Line Batch File . . . . . . . . . . 258
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Copy Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Construct Polar Line Results . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Construct Spiral Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Create Lot Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Construct Spiral Tangent Diagram . . . . 135 Create Lot Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 171
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Create Lot Groups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Create Lot Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Construct Spiral Tangent Diagram . . . . . . . . 135 Create Lot Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Construct Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Create Lot Reports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 172
Construct Through Nodes Diagram . . . . 125 Create Mapcheck Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Construct Through Nodes Dialog Box . . 123 Create Mapcheck Report Settings . . . . . . . . . 175
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Create Mapcheck Report Settings
294 COGO
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Direction of Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 83
Create Mapcheck Report Settings Dialog Direction Options 47, 65, 66, 68, 71, 72, 81, 83, 99
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Direction or Angle Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Create Mapcheck Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Direction Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 97, 249
Create Mapcheck Report Settings . . . . . 175 Displace Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
Create Mapcheck Reports Dialog Box . . 174 Display Boundary Closure Data . . . . . 75, 81, 84
Create Mapcheck Reports Dialog Box . . . . . . 174 Distance . . . . . . . . . 25, 118, 236, 239, 252, 282
Current Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Distance Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Curve Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Examples of Distance Input . . . . . . . . . . 282
Curve Direction Options Diagram . . . . . . . . . . 84 Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Curve Leg . . . . . . . 65, 67, 69, 71, 73, 75, 81, 84 Distance from Beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curve leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Distance Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Curve Node Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Distance Options . . 13, 65, 66, 81, 97, 100, 249
Curve Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Distance to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Examples of Curve Parameter Input . . . 286 Distance to Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Curve Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Curve to Station 6+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Do Not Change Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
Curve to Station 8+50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Do Not Place Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Curved Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Double Row (Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Curved Parking Lot Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Double Row (Island) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 242 Draw 2-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Circular Curve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Draw 3-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Draw End Stripes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 191, 195
D Draw Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Draw Lines and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Data To Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Draw Lines for Sideshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 258
Draw Lines Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Dc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Draw Nodes Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Draw Sideshot Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Define Curve Using Point on Curve . . . . . . . . 164
Duplicate Node Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Define Curve Using Radius Point . . . . . . . . . 164
Define Reverse Curve by Degree of Curve . . 132
Define Reverse Curve by End Point . . . . . . . 132
E
Define Reverse Curve by Radius . . . . . . . . . 132 Eagle Point Boundary (select internal point
Define Reverse Curve by Transition Length . 132 near beginning) . . . . . . . 160, 170, 219, 238
Defined Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 156, 214 Easting 6, 7, 15, 20, 27, 36, 129, 212, 214, 216, 236, 239,
Defined Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 219, 238 279
Degree of Curve (Arc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 71, 83 Easting (X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Degree of Curve (Chord) . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 71, 83 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 258
Delete Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Delete Command Line Batch File . . . . . . . . . 258 Edit Batch File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Delete Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 172 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Delete Lot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Edit Batch File Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Delete Selected Node(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Edit Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Delete Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Edit Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Delta Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 83 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Delta Elevation/Grade/Slope Ratio/Ratio/ Edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Vertical Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Delta X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Editor File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Delta Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Editor Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Departure in X (Easting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Editor, select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Departure in Y (Northing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Elevation 6, 7, 15, 20, 27, 30, 36, 124, 212, 216, 236, 239,
Description 6, 7, 15, 21, 27, 30, 36, 56, 158, 171, 173, 210, 251, 279
212, 216, 226, 236, 239, 251, 258, 279 Elevation (Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Description Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Elevation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Description Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 End Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 191, 195
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 230 End Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Ending Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Ending Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Direction Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Endpoint Gap Falls Within Tolerance . . . . . . 225
Direction Method Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Enter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 180, 182
Index 295
Enter Radius Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Traverse to Node 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Enter Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Traverse to Node 3002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Enter Transition Length Diagram . . . . . . . . . 134 Traverse to Node 3003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 248 Trees Located from Node 3000 . . . . . . . . 91
Entry Options – Audit Trail Tab . . . . . . . 252 Trees Located from Node 3003 . . . . . . . . 94
Entry Options – Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . 248 Field Data Traverse Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 86, 91
Entry Options – Instrument Tab . . . . . . . 250 Field Data Traverse Entry Options . . . . . . . 96, 97
Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab . . . . . . . 251 Field Data Traverse Entry Options Dialog
Entry Options – Node Placement Tab . . 250 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Entry Options – Audit Trail Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 252 File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 258
Entry Options – Defaults Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Final Leg of Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Entry Options Dialog Box – Defaults Final Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Finished Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Entry Options – Instrument Tab . . . . . . . . . . 250 Finished Feature Line Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Entry Options Dialog Box – Instrument Finished Hammer Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 First Curve Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Entry Options – Mapcheck Tab . . . . . . . . . . . 251 First Curve on Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Entry Options Dialog Box – Mapcheck First Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Follow CAD Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Entry Options – Node Placement Tab . . . . . 250
Entry Options Dialog Box – Node G
Placement Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Graphically Select Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Entry Options Dialog Box – Audit Trail Tab . 252
Group Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Entry Options Dialog Box – Defaults Tab . . . 248
Group Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Entry Options Dialog Box – Instrument Tab . 250
Entry Options Dialog Box – Mapcheck Tab . 252
Entry Options Dialog Box – Node H
Placement Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Hammer Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
EOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 235 Hold all existing descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Horizontal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Erase Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Direction Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Direction Method Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 281
Erase on Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Examples of Horizontal Direction . . . . . . 281
Error of Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Horizontal Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Even Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Horizontal Distance or Slope Distance . . . . . . 87
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 275, 276, 278
Existing Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 I
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 84
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 171, 173, 226
Include Node Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
F
Inscribed Curve Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Field Code 6, 7, 15, 21, 27, 30, 36, 37, 87, 210, 213, 217, Inscribed Spiral Curve Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
236, 239, 251, 279 Inscribed Spiral-Curve-Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Insert Disabled Symbol . . . . . . . . . 188, 192, 196
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Insert Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Inside/Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Field Data Traverse Dialog Box . . . . . 86, 91 Instrument Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 250
Field Data Traverse Entry Options . . . . . 96 Instrument Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Instrument/ Target Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Resultant Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . 96 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Sideshot Node T303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Intersect 3-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Sideshot T301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . 140
Sideshot T302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . 142
Start Traverse on Node 1000 . . . . . . . . . 90 Intersect Direction-Station . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Starting Backsight Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Intersect Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Starting Occupied Station . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Intersect 3-D Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Summary of Field Data Traverse Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Intersect 3-D Lines Example . . . . . . . . . . 153
Traverse Back to Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Place Intersection Node Example . . . . . . 153
Traverse Node 3002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Traverse Node 3003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Intersect 3-D Lines Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Traverse Node 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Intersect Direction-Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
296 COGO
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Inverse Curve (RP) Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Intersect Direction-Direction Example . . 141 Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Intersection Direction-Direction Inverse Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Inverse Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Intersect Direction-Direction (Line-Line) . . . . 272 Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231, 268
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Intersect Direction-Direction Sequence . 272 Inverse Point Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Intersect Direction-Direction Example . . . . . . 141 Inverse Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Intersect Direction-Direction Sequence . . . . . 272 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Intersect Direction-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Inverse Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Inverse Points Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Intersect Direction-Distance Dialog Box . 142 Inverse Points Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Intersect Direction-Distance Example . . 144 Inverse Station and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Place Intersection Node Example . . . . . 145 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Inverse Station and Offset Sequence . . 276
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) . . . . . 273 Inverse Station and Offset Sequence . . . . . . 276
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Inverse Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
equence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Inverse Two Point Offset Sequence . . . 277
Intersect Direction-Distance (Arc-Line) Inverse Two Point Offset Sequence . . . . . . . 277
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Island Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Intersect Direction-Distance Dialog Box . . . . 142 Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Intersect Direction-Distance Example . . . . . . 144
Intersect Direction-Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 J
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Intersect Direction-Station Example . . . . 150
Intersection Direction-Station Dialog Box 149
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 K
Turn Angle from Station 1 + 450 Keep Selected Node(s), Delete Remaining
and Place Intersection Node . . . . . . 151 Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Intersect Direction-Station Example . . . . . . . 150
Intersect Distance-Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 L
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Intersect Distance-Distance Example . . . 147 Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 227
Place Intersection Node Example . . . . . 147 Launch COGO Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 256
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 COGO Command Line Dialog Box . . . . 256
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) . . . . . . 274 Manage Command Line Batch Files . . . 257
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Layer/Level . . . . . . . 53, 210, 212, 217, 236, 239
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Convert Objects to Alignment . . . . . . . . 156
Intersect Distance-Distance (Arc-Arc) Convert to Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Create Lot Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Intersect Distance-Distance Example . . . . . . 147 Create Lot Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Intersecting Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Create Mapcheck Reports . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Intersection Direction-Direction Example . . . . 142 Layout Area Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Intersection Direction-Station Dialog Box . . . 149 Layout Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Layout Curved Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . 189
Inverse Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Layout Hammer Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . 204
Inverse Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 234 Layout Linear Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . 185
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Layout Offset Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Inverse Alignment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Layout Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Inverse Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Layout Road Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Layout Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Inverse Angle Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Layout Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Inverse Angle Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Manage Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Inverse Curve (POC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Modify Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Layout Area Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Inverse Curve (POC) Sequence . . . . . . . . . . 269 Area Parking – Row Spacing Dialog
Inverse Curve (RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Area Parking Lot Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Inverse Curve (RP) Sequence . . . . . . . . 270 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Index 297
Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions Layout Linear Parking Lot – Dimensions
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Layout Linear Parking Lot – Disabled Stall
Stall Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 196 Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style Dialog
Layout Area Parking Lot – Dimensions Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Layout Offset Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Layout Area Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Enter Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Layout Area Parking Lot – Parameters Place Center of Cul-de-sac Node . . . . . . 203
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Place Tangent to Curve Node . . . . . . . . 203
Layout Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 199 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Select Right-of-Way Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Finished Bulb Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Specify Fillet Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Place Fillet, Tangent and Nodes . . . . . . 200 Layout Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Continue Radial Area Command . . . . . . 180
Select Right-of-Way Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Enter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Specify Fillet Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Specify Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Layout Curved Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Curved Parking Lot Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Layout Road Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Layout Curved Parking Lot – QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Dimensions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 190 Select Objects to Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Select Offset Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Stall Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 192 Select Segments to be Removed . . . . . . 184
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Set Fillet Radius for Curb Returns . . . . . 185
Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 191 Layout Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style Continue Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Enter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Dimensions QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Select Base Points and Directions . . . . . 182
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Disabled Stall Layout Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Enter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Parameters Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Final Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Layout Curved Parking Lot – Style Dialog QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Select Base Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Layout Hammer Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Leader Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Attributes Placed at New Location . . . . . . 39
Finished Hammer Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . 207 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Place Fillet Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Leader Attributes of BM Node . . . . . . . . . 39
Place Nodes on Corners of Cul-de-sac . 207 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Leader Attributes of BM Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Select Right of Way Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Left Side, Less than or equal to . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Select the Center Point and Back Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 191, 195, 216, 234
Tangent Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Length of Chord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 84
Width and Depth of Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . 206 Length of Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 84
Layout Linear Parking Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Length of Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Length of Spiral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 73
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Dimensions Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 186 Line Type to Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Parameters Linear Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Linear Parking Lot Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Layout Linear Parking Lot – Style Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Linked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Layout Linear Parking Lot– Disabled Local Grid Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Stall Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 188 Locate Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
298 COGO
Lost Point Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Solve for Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Lost Point Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N
Lot (select graphically) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 171, 173, 226
Lot Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Name Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Lot Corners to be Cleaned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lot Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
New Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Lot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
New Command Line Batch File . . . . . . . . . . 258
Lot Group, Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
New Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 99
Lot Group, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
New Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Lot Groups, Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
New Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 172
Lot ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
New Lot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Lot Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
New Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 279
Lot Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 170, 219, 238
New Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Lot Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Next Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Lot Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Node Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Lot, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Node Description in Audit Trail, Print . . . . . . 253
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4, 219, 238
Node Field Code in Audit Trail, Print . . . . . . 253
Node ID 5, 6, 15, 20, 22, 27, 35, 36, 87, 123, 129, 162, 210,
M 211, 212, 214, 216, 220, 228, 232, 236, 239, 244, 251,
Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 279
Manage Batch Files Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 56 Node Placement Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 251
Manage Batch Files Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Node, occupied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Manage Command Line Batch Files . . . 256, 257 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 19
Manage Command Line Batch Files Clean Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Copy Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Manage Command Line Batch Files Dialog Edit Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Erase Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Manage Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Leader Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Manage Lots Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Locate Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Manage Lots Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Match Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Mapcheck Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Modify Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Mapcheck Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 252 Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Match Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Place Nodes Along Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Match Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . 27
Nodes Matched Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Raise/Lower Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Renumber/Rename Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Select Node to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Resection by 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Select Node to Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Resection by 3 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Match Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Resize Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Maximum Sight Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Rotate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Scale Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Middle Ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 84 Snap Nodes to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Modified Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Modify Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Zoom to Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Modify Command Line Batch File . . . . . . . . . 258 Nodes Matched Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Modify Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 169 Nodes Placed Along Right-of-Way Line . . . . . 26
Modify Lot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Nodes To Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Modify Lot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 North, East, South, West . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Modify Lot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Northing 6, 7, 15, 20, 27, 36, 129, 212, 214, 216, 236, 239,
Modify Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 279
Modify Nodes – Select Nodes Dialog Northing (Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Northing/Easting . . . . . . 124, 163, 220, 228, 232
Modify Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 187, 191, 195
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Number of Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Modify Nodes – Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . 52 Number of Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Modify Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Number of Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Modify Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Number of stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 192
Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Number to Add/Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Index 299
O QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Select Right-of-Way Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Objects (select graphically) . . . . . . . . . . 160, 218 Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . 25
Occupied Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Occupied Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Occupied Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 239, 243 Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30, 214, 216, 280 Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Offset Between Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Offset Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Place Fire Hydrant at 10+00 . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Offset Curb Lines Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset . . 29
Offset Right of Way Lines Diagram . . . . . . . . 122 Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 176, 227 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 171, 173, 226 Select Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box . . . . 27
P Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Parent Acres (Hectares) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Parent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161, 173 Place Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parent Area (Acres/Hectares) . . . . . . . . 159, 171 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parent Area (Square Feet/Square Easting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 171 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parent Description . . . . 158, 161, 171, 173, 226 Field Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parent Name . . . . . . . . . 158, 161, 171, 173, 226 Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parent Square Feet (Square Meters) . . . . . . 226 Northing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parking, area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Place Nodes on Corners of Cul-de-sac . . . . . 207
Parking, curved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Place Polar Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Parking, linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107, 109, 110, 111 Node Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Percent of Parent . . . . . 159, 161, 172, 173, 226 Place Reverse Curve Nodes Diagram . . . . . . 134
Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 171, 173, 226 Place Tangent to Curve Node . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Place Traverse Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
PIC 5, 6, 7, 11, 13, 20, 27, 36, 37, 65, 66, 68, 70, 72, 81, 83, Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
86, 123, 129, 143, 159, 160, 162, 170, 186, 187, 188, Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
190, 191, 192, 194, 195, 196, 214, 216, 218, 219, 228, Place Traverse Point (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . 266
229, 232, 233, 238, 257 Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Pick Point Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Place Center of Cul-de-sac Node . . . . . . . . . 203 Place Traverse Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Place Fillet Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Place Fillet, Tangent and Nodes . . . . . . . . . . 200 Placement Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Place Fire Hydrant at 10+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Placement Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Place Intersection Node Example . 145, 147, 153 Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . 29 POC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Point of Curvature (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Point of Intersection (PI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Point of Tangency (PT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Point Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Place Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Point Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 243
Place Node by Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Polar Point, place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Place Node by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Print 17, 210, 211, 213, 217, 228, 230, 232, 233, 235, 255
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Print Audit Trail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 253
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Print Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Place Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Print Lot Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Place Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Print Mapcheck Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Place Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Print Node Description in Audit Trail . . . . . . . 253
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Print Node Field Code in Audit Trail . . . . . . . . 253
Place Nodes Along Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 236, 239, 244
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Print Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Nodes Placed Along Right-of-Way Line . 26 Print Options for Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box . . 25 PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 107
300 COGO
R Report Area By Eagle Point Boundary . . . . . 223
Endpoint Gap Falls Within Tolerance . . 225
Radial Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 180 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Radius . . . . . 69, 71, 83, 111, 123, 162, 220, 232 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Radius Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Select Internal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Examples of Radius Input . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Report Area By Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Radius Point (RP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Raise/Lower Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Report Area By Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 211 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Re-compute BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Select Bounding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 99 Select Internal Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Relative Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Report Area By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Renumber Node to Lowest Available . . . . . . 213 Closing the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Renumber Node to Next Available . . . . . . . . 213 Enter Radius Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Renumber Node to Selected Value . . . . . . . . 213 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Renumber/Rename Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Report Area by Points Dialog Box . . . . . 219
Renumber/Rename Nodes Dialog Box . . 40 Select a Point on the Curve . . . . . . . . . . 221
Renumber/Rename Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . 40 Select Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Current Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Report Area by Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 219
New Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Report Area Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Number to Add/Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Report Area Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 225
Renumber/Rename Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Report Area Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . 226
Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Report Area Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 226
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Inverse Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Inverse Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Report Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Inverse Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Report Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Report Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Report Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Report Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Report Station/Offset Dialog Box . . 215, 216
Report Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Report Station/Offset Dialog Box . . . . . 215, 216
Report Unused Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Report Unused Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Single Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Report Unused Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . 211
Stakeout Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Report Unused Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 211
Stakeout Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Resection by 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 32
Stakeout Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Report Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Report Angle By Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Resection by 3 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33
Report Area By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Report Angle By Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Resize Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Report Angle By Lines Dialog Box . . . . . 229 Displace Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Select Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Do Not Change Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Report Angle By Lines Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 229 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Report Angle by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Resize Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Scale Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Report Angle By Points Dialog Box . . . . 227 Resize Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Select Angle by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Displace Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Select Next Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Do Not Change Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Report Angle By Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 227 Relative Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Report Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Scale Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Report Area By Eagle Point Boundary . . 223 Resolve Duplicate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Report Area By Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Report Area By Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Resolve Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box . . 212
Report Area By Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Resolve Duplicate Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . 212
Report Area Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Resultant Calculated Coordinates . . . . . . 80, 96
Report Area Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Retrieval of a Direction From a Complex
Index 301
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Select Node to Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Retrieval of a Direction From a Line . . . . . . . . . 9 Select Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 210
Retrieval of a Distance When Selecting Select Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
a Line, Complex Object or Arc . . . . . . . . . 12 Select Nodes for Best Fit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Right Side, Less than or equal to . . . . . . . . . 216 Select Objects to Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Road Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Select Offset Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Select PI Point Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 137
Rotate Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Select Points to Determine Area . . . . . . . . . . 218
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Select Points to Form Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Local Grid Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Select Right of Way Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Select Right-of-Way Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Rotate Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Select Right-of-Way Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 202
Rotated Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Select Segments to be Removed . . . . . . . . . 184
Select New Direction Points . . . . . . . . . . 49 Select Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 221
Traverse Nodes to Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Select the Center Point and Back Tangent
Rotate Nodes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Rotation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Select Two Line Segments Diagram . . . . . . . 133
Rotated Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Selected Nodes for Best Fit Curve Diagram . 127
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Selected Nodes, Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Rotation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 99 Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 216
Row Spacing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 216
Row Spacing, area parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Set Fillet Radius for Curb Returns . . . . . . . . . 185
RP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Run Traverse Along Chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Command Line COGO Commands . . . . 258
Run Traverses Through Radius Points . . . . . 252 Command Line COGO Input Fields . . . . 278
Command Line Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
S Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Launch COGO Command Line . . . . . . . . 256
Save Settings As Default . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 254
Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Save Settings as Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 250
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Show Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Translate-Rotate-Scale Scale Factor
Show Lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
by Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 100
Show Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Scale Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43
Show/Hide History Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Side Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Scale Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 65, 67, 69, 71, 73
Scale Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sideshot Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sideshot Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Scale Z (Elevation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sideshot Lines, draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Second Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Sideshot Node T303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Sideshot T301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Select a Point on the Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Sideshot T302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Select Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Single Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Select Alignment or Object to Offset
Single Row (Edge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Single Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Select Alignment to Snap Nodes . . . . . . . . . . 23
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Select Angle by Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Single Station/Offset Dialog Box . . . . . . . 214
Select Base Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Single Station/Offset Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 214
Select Base Points and Directions . . . . . . . . 182
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Select Bounding Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 223
Size of Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Select Center of Cul-de-sac . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Slope Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Select Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Snap Nodes to Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Select Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Select Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Select Internal Point . . . . . . . 168, 169, 223, 224
Select Alignment to Snap Nodes . . . . . . . 23
Select Intersection Point Graphically . . . . . . 143
Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box . . . . . 22
Select Key Point Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Snap Options and Descriptions Dialog
Select Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Select Lot Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 174
Snapped Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Select Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 174
Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 22
Select New Direction Points . . . . . . . . . . 49, 102
Snap Options and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Select Next Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Snap Options and Descriptions Dialog Box . . . 24
302 COGO
Snapped Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Station Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Solve for Lost Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Station at PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Specify Fillet Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 204 Station at PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Specify Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Station Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral Curve Spiral, Inscribed . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 64, 156
Spiral Curve Station/Spiral to Tangent Station 71 Station Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral In Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 69, 71, 73 Station Data Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral In leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Station Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral Out Leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67, 69, 71, 73 Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Spiral Out leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Station Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 235
Spiral Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Station of Next Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Spiral to Curve Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Station/Offset, place Node by . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Spirals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 243 Summary of Alignment Traverse Example . . . 63
Transition Spiral Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Summary of Boundary Traverse Example . . . 80
Square Feet (Square Meters) . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Summary of Field Data Traverse Example . . . 95
Square Feet/Square Meters . . . . . . . . . 158, 171 Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Stakeout Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Compare Stationing to Mainline . . . . . . . 245 Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Edit Batch File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Stakeout Alignment Interval Dialog Box . 242 Manage Batch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Stakeout Alignment Report Dialog Box . 243 Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Stakeout Alignment Interval Dialog Box . . . . 242 Swivel Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Stakeout Alignment Report Dialog Box . . . . . 243 CAD Graphic After Swivel Nodes . . . . . . 44
Stakeout Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 CAD Graphic Before Swivel Nodes . . . . . 44
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
QuickSteps (Closed Object Option) . . . . 240 QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
QuickSteps (Eagle Point Boundary Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 213, 217, 236, 239
Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
QuickSteps (Lots Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 T
Stakeout Boundary Diagram . . . . . . . . . 241
Tangent Direction . . . . . . . . . 65, 71, 72, 81, 113
Stakeout Boundary Method Dialog Box . 238
Tangent Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 81, 113
Stakeout Boundary Report Dialog Box . . 239
Tangent Leg . . . . . 65, 67, 69, 71, 73, 74, 81, 84
Stakeout Boundary Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tangent leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Stakeout Boundary Method Dialog Box . . . . . 238
Tangent Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 84
Stakeout Boundary Report Dialog Box . . . . . 239
Tangent to 6+50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Stakeout Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tangent to Station 10+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tangent to Station 4+00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Stakeout Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Target Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Stakeout Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 236
Target Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 250
Stakeout Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Text Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Stakeout Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Text Style/Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Start Batch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Thickness/Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Start Feature Line Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Three Vertical Angle Measurements . . . . . . . 12
Start of Boundary Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Through Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Start Procedural Commands With Settings
Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 25, 253
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Toggles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Start to End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Toggles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Start to Vertex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 238
Start Traverse on Node 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Tolerance Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Start Traverse/Sideshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Total Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Total Printed Columns Available . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Total Printed Columns Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Start/Stop Recording Batch File . . . . . . . . . . 257
Transition Spiral Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Starting Backsight Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Starting Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Translate-Rotate-Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Starting Location Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 61, 76
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Starting Node ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Local Grid Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Starting Occupied Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Modified Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 214, 216, 243, 280
Index 303
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Width and Depth of Cul-de-Sac . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Z
Select New Direction Points . . . . . . . . . 102
Zoom Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Translate-Rotate-Scale Reference
Zoom Node Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Direction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Zoom Node Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Traverse Objects to Modify . . . . . . . . . . 102
Zoom to Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Translate-Rotate-Scale Reference Direction
QuickSteps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Zoom To Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Translate-Rotate-Scale Scale Factor
Zoom To Node Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
by Distance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Trapezoidal Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Traverse Back to Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Traverse Curve (PC, Radius, Curve
Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Traverse Node 3002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Traverse Node 3003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Traverse Node 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Traverse Nodes to Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Traverse Objects to Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Traverse Point (Angle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Traverse Point (Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Traverse Sideshot, place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Traverse to Node 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Traverse to Node 3002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Traverse to Node 3003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Traverse, end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Traverse/Sideshot, start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Trees Located from Node 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Trees Located from Node 3003 . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Triangular Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Turn Angle from Station 1 + 450 and Place
Intersection Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Turned Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Two Point Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Two Point Offset Example . . . . . . . . . . . 272
U
Undo . . . . . 59, 65, 67, 70, 71, 73, 75, 81, 84, 88
Undo Feature Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Unlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Use bi-directional Aisles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Use Key Point on Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
V
Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Vertex Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 230
Vertex Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Vertex to End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Vertical Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Input Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Method Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
W
Width . . . . . . . . 17, 187, 188, 191, 192, 195, 196
304 COGO

COGO by Eagle Point

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

COGO by Eagle Point

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COGO by Eagle Point

Table of Contents iii

Table of Contents vii

COGO Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Figure 1-1 Circular Curve Parameters

Figure 1-2 Transition Spiral Parameters

COGO Pick Point Dialog Box

Figure 1-3 COGO Pick Point Dialog Box

COGO Pick Point Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Place Node Dialog Box

Figure 1-4 COGO Place Node Dialog Box

COGO Place Node Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box

Figure 1-5 COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box

COGO Select Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 1-6 Retrieval of a Direction From a Line

Figure 1-7 Retrieval of a Direction From a Complex Object

Figure 1-8 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Right

Figure 1-9 Backsight With an Angle Turned to the Left

Figure 1-10 Backsight With an Angle Deflected to the Right

Figure 1-11 Backsight With an Angle Deflected to the Left

COGO Direction Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Distance Dialog Box

Figure 1-14 Three Vertical Angle Measurements

COGO Distance Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 1-16 COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box

COGO Place Curve Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box

Figure 1-17 COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box

COGO Curve Node Options Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Settings Dialog Box

Figure 1-18 COGO Settings Dialog Box

COGO Settings Dialog Box Definitions

COGO Print Options Dialog Box

Figure 1-19 Print Options Dialog Box

Print Options Dialog Box Definitions

KEY-IN COMMAND: placenode

Figure 2-1 Place Nodes Dialog Box

Place Nodes Dialog Box Definitions

Snap Nodes to Objects

KEY-IN COMMAND: snapnode

Figure 2-2 Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box

Snap Nodes to Objects Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-3 Select Alignment to Snap Nodes

Figure 2-4 Snapped Nodes

Snap Options and Descriptions

Figure 2-5 Snap Objects and Descriptions Dialog Box

KEY-IN COMMAND: placealong

Figure 2-6 Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box

Place Nodes Along Object Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-7 Select Right-of-Way Line

Figure 2-8 Nodes Placed Along Right-of-Way Line

KEY-IN COMMAND: placestaoff

Figure 2-9 Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box

Place Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

Figure 2-10 Select Alignment

4. Type the station value of 1000.

Figure 2-11 Place Fire Hydrant at 10+00

Figure 2-12 Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box

Place Multiple Nodes by Station/Offset Dialog Box Definitions

KEY-IN COMMAND: 2pntres

Figure 2-13 Resection by 2 Points

KEY-IN COMMAND: 3pntres